Phonebook Tab

Phonebook Tab

Version 9.1

User's Guide

Copyright © 1981-2007 Danware Data A/S. All Rights Reserved.

Portions used under license from third parties.

Document Revision: 2008087

Please send any comments to:

Danware Data A/S

Bregnerodvej 127

DK-3460 Birkerod

Denmark

Fax: Int +45 45 90 25 26

E-mail: [email protected]

Internet: http://www.netop.com

2

Warranty

Danware Data A/S warrants the quality of the physical material of the user package, that is manual and

CD-ROM. If these items are defective, we will exchange them at no cost within 60 days of purchase from

Danware Data.

Disclaimer

Danware Data A/S denies any and all responsibility for damages caused directly or indirectly as a result of any faults with the enclosed programs and/or documentation.

License

Danware Data A/S retains the copyright to the user manual. All patent, copyright and other proprietary rights in and to the programs will remain with Danware Data A/S or its licensers.

Your purchase gives you the right to copy and use the programs as described on your Danware License

Certificate included in your package.

Please save your Danware License Certificate and your original CD-ROM. They serve as your legal right to use the software. You may also need them in order to receive future updates to the product.

Please be careful not to install or run the software on more PCs than your Danware License Certificates permits you to do.

The programs may be copied for backup purposes only, and only as long as the above mentioned rules are adhered to.

Trademarks

NetOp® and the red kite are registered trademarks of Danware Data A/S. All other products mentioned in this manual are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

3

Contents

Contents

2.3 Install ....................................................................................................................................................23

4

Contents

5

Contents

6

Contents

7

Contents

8

Contents

4.3.2.1.3 Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using Windows Security

9

Contents

10

Contents

11

Introduction

1 Introduction

Welcome to NetOp Remote Control, the remote control software from Danware.

We hope that this product will meet your requirements and fulfill your expectations.

If you encounter problems using this product, first consult with its manuals and help systems.

Additional troubleshooting guidance is available from the NetOp KnowledgeBase that can be searched for detailed technical information.

The local supplier of your NetOp product is available for advising you on how to obtain maximum benefit from it.

As a last resort, submit a support request to NetOp Customer & Product Support . We will endeavour to get back to you as soon as possible with a solution to your problem.

NetOp Certification, Education and Documentation

This main section includes these sections:

·

Features

·

Documentation

·

Updates

·

Compatibility

·

Common Controls

1.1 Features

NetOp Remote Control includes these modules:

·

NetOp Guest : Enables the computer user to remote control and interact in other ways with another

computer that runs NetOp Host or extended Host.

· NetOp Host: Enables the computer to be remote controlled and interacted with in other ways from a

computer that runs NetOp Guest .

· NetOp Security Server: Extended Host that can manage Guest access security for multiple Hosts.

· NetOp Gateway: Extended Host that can route NetOp traffic between different communication devices.

· NetOp Name Server: Extended Host that can connect NetOp modules across segmented networks.

NetOp Remote Control features include:

·

Remote Control

·

Other Interaction

·

Security

·

Operating Systems

·

Communication Devices

1.1.1 Remote Control

NetOp Guest can run a

Remote Control

session with one or multiple NetOp Hosts or extended Hosts to show the Host computer screen image to enable the Guest user to work with keyboard and mouse on Host computers and control them in different ways.

A computer that runs NetOp Host can be remote controlled from NetOp Guest . The Host can allow multiple

simultaneous Guest connections to enable a Multi Guest Session in which one connected Guest has

keyboard and mouse control while other connected Guests have limited access to the Host computer.

12

Introduction

1.1.2 Other Interaction

NetOp Guest can run a

Monitor session with one or multiple

NetOp Hosts or extended Hosts to sequentially

show their computer screen image and optionally switch to

Remote Control .

NetOp Guest can run a

File Transfer

session with one or multiple

NetOp Hosts or extended Hosts to transfer

and manage files and directories. If the Host allows multiple Guest connections, multiple Guests can run

separate File Transfer

sessions with it at the same time.

NetOp Guest can run a

Chat session with one or multiple

NetOp Hosts or extended Hosts to communicate

by typed text. If the Host allows multiple Guest connections, multiple Guests can join in a

Multi Chat Session

with one Host. NetOp Host

can start a Chat

session with one or multiple connected Guests.

One NetOp Guest

and one

NetOp Host or extended Host can run an

Audio-Video Chat session to

communicate by sound and optionally live image.

NetOp Host can start an

Audio-Video Chat session only

with a connected Guest that has keyboard and mouse control.

NetOp Guest can run a

Remote Management session with one or multiple

NetOp Hosts or extended Hosts to

manage Host computers. If the Host allows multiple Guest connections, multiple Guests can run separate

Remote Management sessions with it at the same time.

NetOp Guest can run a

Demonstrate session with one or multiple

NetOp Hosts or extended Hosts to show a

live Guest computer screen image on the Host computer screen.

NetOp Guest can run a specified program on a

NetOp Host or extended Host computer, see

Run Program .

NetOp Guest can execute a system control command on a

NetOp Host

or extended Host computer, see

Execute Command .

NetOp Guest can send a

NetOp Message to a

NetOp Host or extended Host.

NetOp Guest can get the hardware and software inventory of a

NetOp Host or extended Host computer, see

Get Inventory

.

NetOp Host or extended Host can

Request Help from a

NetOp Guest

that offers help services, see Help

Request Tab .

1.1.3 Security

You can protect

NetOp Guest and

NetOp Host

or extended Host setup by a

Maintenance Password

.

NetOp Host

NetOp Host or extended Host

Guest Access Security

can protect against unauthorized Guest access and actions:

·

Guest Authentication authenticates the Guest by specified credentials.

· A

Guest Profile can specify which credentials are required.

· A

Security Role specifies what the Guest is allowed to do when connected.

· The Host

Guest Policy specifies how certain security issues are handled.

·

The Host can apply a Guest Address Check

to limit access.

The communication between NetOp modules is protected by Encryption .

All NetOp Remote Control modules can log NetOp events locally and centrally in a

NetOp Log .

1.1.4 Operating Systems

NetOp Remote Control modules are available for a wide range of operating systems. This table shows which features are available in NetOp Remote Control modules for different operating systems:

Windows ActiveX Linux Solaris Mac OS/2 DOS Windows CE** Symbian** Operating Systemsu qFeatures

Modules:

Guest

Host

• • • • •

**

**

• • • • • •

13

Introduction

Security Server

Gateway

Name Server

Sessions:

Remote Control

File Transfer

Chat

Audio-Video Chat

Remote Management

Actions:

Run Program

Execute Command

NetOp Message

Monitor

Get Inventory

Request Help (Host)

Help Services (Guest)

• •

**

• •

**

• • • • • • • •

• • • • • •

**

*

• •

*

*

• • • •

*

• •

• •

**

* Host only. ** With a NetOp product other than NetOp Remote Control version 9.0.

NetOp Remote Control modules for different operating systems can interact with only few limitations, see

Compatibility .

1.1.5 Communication Devices

NetOp Remote Control modules can communicate by a wide range of Communication Devices . This table

shows which

Communication Devices are available with different operating systems:

Communication Devicesu qOperating systems

Windows Server 2003

Windows XP

Windows 2000

Windows NT 4.0

Windows ME/98SE

ActiveX

Linux

Solaris

Mac

OS/2

DOS

Windows CE

Symbian

NetBIO IPX ISDN Window Serial TCP/IP TCP/IP Gatewa Infrare Termina

S (CAPI) s (TCP) y d l Server modem

• • • • • • • • • •

*

• • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • •

*

• • • • • • • • •

*

• • • • • • • • •

• •

• •

• •

• • • • • •

• • •

**

**

• •

*Terminal server modules only. **DOS to DOS only.

1.2 Documentation

NetOp Remote Control documentation includes three Manuals and four Help systems.

This User’s Manual in supported languages is available as a downloadable printable PDF file. It contains these chapters:

1.

Introduction

: Explains features, documentation, updates, compatibility and common controls.

2.

Installation

: Explains NetOp Remote Control installation.

14

Introduction

3.

NetOp Guest

: Explains NetOp Guest functionality.

4.

NetOp Host

: Explains NetOp Host functionality.

5.

Common Tools

: Explains tools that are common to all NetOp Remote Control modules.

The Administrator’s Manual in English is available as a downloadable printable PDF file. It contains these chapters:

1. NetOp Security Management: Explains NetOp Security Manager and NetOp Security Server functionality.

2. NetOp Gateway: Explains NetOp Gateway functionality.

3. NetOp Name Management: Explains NetOp Name Server functionality.

4. Advanced Tools: Explains advanced NetOp Remote Control tools.

5. Other Operating Systems: Explains installation and particulars of NetOp Remote Control for Linux,

Solaris, Mac, OS/2 and DOS.

The NetOp Pack'n Deploy Manual in English is available as a downloadable printable PDF file. It contains only the NetOp Pack'n Deploy section of the Advanced Tools chapter of the Administrator’s Manual.

Note: Manual PDF's are also available from the NetOp KnowledgeBase .

NetOp Guest Help that is available from

NetOp Guest (Windows, Linux and Solaris) in the language in which

it is installed includes these sections:

·

Introduction

: Explains features, documentation, updates, compatibility and common controls.

·

Installation

: Explains NetOp Remote Control installation.

·

NetOp Guest

: Explains NetOp Guest functionality.

·

Common Tools

: Explains tools that are common to all NetOp Remote Control modules.

NetOp Host Help that is available from

NetOp Host , NetOp Security Manager, NetOp Security Server, NetOp

Gateway and NetOp Name Server (Windows) in the language in which it is installed includes these sections:

·

Introduction

: Explains features, documentation, updates, compatibility and common controls.

·

Installation

: Explains NetOp Remote Control installation.

·

NetOp Host

: Explains NetOp Host functionality.

·

Common Tools

: Explains tools that are common to all NetOp Remote Control modules.

NetOp Security Manager Help that is available from NetOp Security Manager in English explains NetOp

Security Management functionality.

NetOp Pack'n Deploy Help that is available from NetOp Pack'n Deploy in English explains NetOp Pack'n

Deploy functionality.

Help system sections contain the same information as the matching manual sections.

Note: You cannot expect the documentation to be updated with the most recent product updates. Look for the most recent update information in the ReadMe.txt file that will be updated with major updates.

1.2.1 How to Use NetOp Documentation

We recommend first-time NetOp users to read the Quick Guide and then make a test installation and try it out using the Help system for guidance.

We recommend experienced NetOp users to review the User’s Manual or Help system

Introduction section

Features

section to get up to date with available features.

Read detailed explanations only when needed to clarify the product functionality.

15

Introduction

1.2.2 Typographical Conventions

These typographical conventions are used in the documentation:

· Italics text represents screen text.

·

ALL CAPS text represents keyboard keys (+ indicates that keys must be pressed at the same time).

·

Lucida Console font text represents keyboard entries.

·

Colored underlined text is a jump hotspot. Click the hotspot to jump to the section or topic that explains the

underlined text subject.

· [Square brackets] are used around optional entries.

· <Angle brackets> are used around contents descriptions.

1.2.3 Standard Buttons

These standard window buttons will be explained only if their functionality deviates from their standard functionality:

· OK: Click this button to close a window to apply window selections.

· Cancel: Click this button to close a window without applying window selections.

·

Help: Click this button to open the Help system on the topic that explains the window content.

1.3 Updates

NetOp products will be improved from time to time through the release of updated builds.

To identify the build of an installed NetOp product, select the

Help menu About... command to show the

About...

window. The build number in the format YYYYDDD (Y=year number digit, D=day number digit) will

be shown in parentheses next to the version number.

To ensure that your NetOp product is up to the current standard, the most recently released build should always be installed.

To update automatically, enable the Web Update functionality, see Web Update Tab .

To update manually, in the NetOp KnowledgeBase select Download Products to show available downloads.

If your installed product version is available with a higher build number, you should download and install it.

Installation requires valid license numbers. Products with the same version number down to the first decimal use the same license numbers.

The ReadMe.txt file installed with an update will contain the most recent update information.

1.4 Compatibility

This table provides an overview of older NetOp remote control products and their compatibility with NetOp

Remote Control version 9.1.

Product

NetOp Remote Control

(Language column languages apply to the

Windows version. Other operating system versions are available in English only)

Version Language Latest build Version 9.1 compatibility

9.0

English

French

German

Italian

Japanese

Portuguese

Spanish

2007250 Full. Features added in newer versions are typically not available in older versions.

8.0

English

French

German

Italian

2006047

16

Introduction

7.65

7.6

7.5

7.0

6.5

6.0

NetOp for Windows

NetOp for OS/2

5.4

5.3

6.5

5.4

5.3

NetOp for DOS (Network) 4.3

NetOp for DOS (Modem) 1.01

NetOp for DOS (ISDN) 1.03

Japanese

Portuguese

Spanish

English

French

German

Italian

Japanese

Portuguese

Spanish

2004342

English

French

German

Italian

Japanese

Portuguese

Spanish

2003246

English

French

German

Italian

Japanese

Portuguese

Spanish

2003048

English

French

German

Italian

Japanese

Portuguese

Spanish

2002291

2002063 English

French

German

Spanish

English

French

German

Spanish

1999309

English

English

English

English

1998315

22497

2002063

1999322

English

English

English

English

-

-

30197

-

Full. Features added in newer versions are typically not available in older versions.

Full. Features added in newer versions are typically not available in older versions.

NetBIOS and

IPX communication only.

DOS to DOS only

DOS to DOS only

1.5 Common Controls

This section explains the controls of common NetOp Remote Control user interface elements. It includes these sections:

·

Window Control

·

Menu and Toolbar Control

·

Table Control

17

Introduction

1.5.1 Window Control

Windows with an icon at the title bar left end share these window controls:

Click the title bar left icon, right-click anywhere in the title bar or press ALT+SPACE to show this standard window control menu:

Restore: Select this command or click the matching title bar right end button to restore a maximized or minimized window to its normal size.

Move: Select this command to show an arrow-pointed +. Press the keyboard arrow buttons to move the window. Press ENTER to end the operation.

Note: Typically, move a window by dragging its title bar.

Size: Select this command to show an arrow-pointed +. Press the keyboard arrow buttons to show a double arrow at a window border and move the window border to resize the window. Press ENTER to end resizing.

Note: Typically, resize a window by dragging its borders or corners.

Minimize: Select this command or click the matching title bar right end button to minimize the window. The window can minimize into a taskbar button or a notification area button or if inside a window work panel into a minimized window typically in the lower left corner of the work panel. Click a taskbar minimized window button or double-click a notification area minimized window button to restore the window.

Maximize: Select this command or click the matching title bar right end button to maximize the window.

Close: Select this command, click the matching title bar right end button, press ALT+F4 or double-click the title bar icon to close the window without applying window selections. If the window represents a loaded program, the program will be unloaded.

1.5.2 Menu and Toolbar Control

Enabled menu commands will appear in black text. Menu commands that are disabled with the current selection will appear in gray text. Press ALT to enable active window keyboard menu selection that will underline the menu or command letter whose key will select the menu or command. Place the mouse pointer on an active window command to show a hint in the status bar. A command that switches a status On/Off can show a check mark or an icon. If check marked or if the icon appears pressed in, the status is On and selecting the command will switch the status Off. Executing a command will close the menu.

Drag the left end of a toolbar to move it from its default position below the menu bar to place it along a window border or anywhere outside the window. Enabled toolbar buttons will appear in color. Toolbar buttons that are disabled with the current selection will appear gray. Place the mouse pointer on an active window toolbar button to show a tool tip with the button name and a hint in the status bar. A toolbar button that switches a status On/Off can appear pressed in. If appearing pressed in, the status is On and clicking the button will switch the status Off.

1.5.3 Table Control

Typically, these controls are available with tables in window panes:

Resize the pane by resizing the window by dragging its borders. Change the width of a column by dragging the right border of its heading. Sort records (ascending/descending) by any column by clicking the column heading. If table content extends beyond the pane, it will have scrollbars.

Click a record to select and highlight it. Click a record and while pressing SHIFT click another record to select

18

Introduction

and highlight both records and records in between. Click a record and while pressing CTRL click other records to select and highlight clicked records.

19

Installation

2 Installation

This main section explains how to install NetOp Remote Control on a computer that runs on a Windows operating system.

Note: Installing NetOp Remote Control on computers that run on other operating systems is explained in the

Administrator’s Manual Other Operating Systems chapter.

This main section contains these sections:

·

Requirements

·

Download Installation Files

·

Install

·

Install Alternatives

2.1 Requirements

Computers that shall run NetOp Remote Control must meet certain requirements that are specified in the

NetOp

KnowledgeBase

, select Technical Requirements.

Note: To install NetOp Remote Control on a Windows Vista, 2003, XP, 2000 or NT computer, the user must have administrator rights.

Before installing, read the ReadMe.txt file that will be available with downloadable installation files. This file contains important general information and may contain update information that was not available when the documentation was last edited.

20

Installation

2.2 Download Installation Files

To download NetOp Remote Control installation files, connect to the NetOp

KnowledgeBase

and select

Download Products > NetOp Remote Control > Windows to show these contents:

Click your preferred NetOp Remote Control language version hotspot to show these contents:

21

Installation

It contains these hotspots:

· View Readme: Click to show in the right window pane the current version and build ReadMe.txt file contents.

· View Modification Notes: Click to show in a new browser window the current version Modification Notes for all builds up to and including the current build if Acrobat Reader is installed on your computer.

·

View Release Notes: Click to show the current version Release Notes in a new browser window if Acrobat

Reader is installed on your computer.

·

Download Manuals: Click to download available manuals as PDF files in a zipped folder.

· Download Host: Click to download NetOpRemoteControlHost_<Language abbreviation>.msi from which you can

install NetOp Host.

· Download Guest: Click to download NetOpRemoteControlGuest_<Language abbreviation>.msi from which you can

install NetOp Guest.

22

Installation

·

Download Gateway: Click to download NetOpGateway_<Language abbreviation>.msi from which you can

install NetOp Gateway.

· Download Security Server: Click to download NetOpRemoteControlSecurityServer_<Language abbreviation>.msi from which you can

install NetOp Security Server.

·

Download Name Server: Click to download NetOpNameServer_<Language abbreviation>.msi from which you can

install NetOp Name Server.

2.3 Install

Run a

downloaded msi file to show this Welcome to NetOp <module> Setup Wizard window:

Click Next to show this window:

23

Installation

Read the license agreement and click I accept the terms in the license agreement to enable the Next button.

Click it to show this window:

Fill in the fields:

User name: []: Specify the user name.

24

Installation

Organization: []: Specify the licensee name.

Serial number: []: Specify the license number.

Note: When a NetOp module is installed on a computer for the first time, it will run for 30 days if no license number is specified. After this trial period, it will run only if a valid license number is specified.

Click Next to show this window:

Click Typical or Complete to install typical or all available program features and click Next to show the

Windows Firewall Configuration

window.

Click Custom and click Next to show this window:

25

Installation

In this window, you can exclude installing sub features that you do not need. By default, all sub features will be installed: Select a sub feature to exclude/include it. This table explains available sub features:

Sub feature

Remote Management Enables Remote Management

Web Update

Utilities

Media files

Help system

Readme file

Script and code examples

SNMP logging

Remote printing

ActiveX component

Marker mode

Advanced feature driver

Available on module: Gue

Functionality

Enables Web Update

Enables unhiding module

Includes sound and animation files

Includes help system

Includes ReadMe file

Includes script and code examples

st

Ho st

• • •

• • •

• • •

Enables SNMP logging

Enables remote printing

Enables ActiveX scripting

Enables NetOp Marker Utility

Enables remote control commands

• • •

• • •

• •

• •

Security

Server

• • •

• • •

• • •

Command mode transfer

Security Manager

Code examples

Enables command mode screen transfer

Installs NetOp Security Manager

Includes security code examples

• •

Note: Re-run the setup wizard to change the sub feature selection, see Change or Remove .

Gateway Name

• •

Server

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

Click Reset to restore the original selection.

Click Disk Usage to show this window:

26

Installation

This window that shows the designation, total and available disk space of available disk drive volumes will indicate the disk space requirements of the selected installation. Click OK to close the window.

Click Browse to show this window:

This window shows the selected destination folder name, its content of folders and its path. Click the dropdown box button to show available folders in the path. From the buttons, you can move up in the folder

27

structure and create a folder. Select a folder to show its path and click OK to apply the selection.

When satisfied with the selection in the

Custom Setup

window, click Next to show this window:

Installation

It warns you that certain NetOp services may require computer restart to work properly. Leave the box checked to allow the computer to restart if required. Click Next to show this window:

28

Installation

Leave the box checked to modify the Windows firewall configuration to enable NetOp communication. Click

Next to show this window:

Check the box to save the installation msi file in the directory in which the NetOp module is installed to have it available for reinstallation. Click Install to execute installation. When completed, this window will be shown:

Leave the box checked to load the installed module. Click Finish to end the setup wizard.

29

Installation

2.3.1 Change or Remove

You can change or remove a

Windows Installer installation from Start > (Settings >) Control Panel > Add or

Remove Programs or by re-running the installation.

In the Add or Remove Programs window, select the installed module and click Change or re-run the setup wizard to show the

Welcome to NetOp <Module> Setup Wizard window. Click Next to show this window:

Click Modify to show the

Custom Setup

window to change selections and complete installation like

Windows

Installer

.

Click Repair to show a Repair... window like the

Ready to Install

window to complete re-installation like

Windows Installer .

Note: To Modify or Repair, installation files must be available.

Click Remove to show a Remove... window like the

Ready to Install

window to complete removal like

Windows Installer .

In the Add or Remove Programs window, click Remove to remove the module in a small window.

Note: Change or remove will not affect the user configuration of installed modules, see NetOp Configuration

Files .

2.4 Install Alternatives

These install alternatives are available:

·

Install from a Directory

·

Pack'n Deploy

·

Terminal Server

30

Installation

2.4.1 Install from a Directory

To install from a directory, save or copy downloaded msi files to the directory. To install, run (double-click) a

NetOp module msi file.

2.4.2 Pack'n Deploy

NetOp Pack'n Deploy enables creating customized setup NetOp module installation files (Pack) and install with them on remote computers (Deploy) or on a local computer (Silent install), see the Administrator’s

Manual Advanced Tools chapter NetOp Pack'n Deploy section.

2.4.3 Terminal Server

Installing NetOp Remote Control on a terminal server computer requires special precautions, see the

Administrator’s Manual Advanced Tools chapter NetOp in Terminal Server Environments section.

31

NetOp Guest

3 NetOp Guest

This main section explains the functionality of NetOp Guest on a computer that runs on a Windows operating system.

Note: NetOp Guest on a computer that runs on a Linux or Solaris operating system has a similar functionality. The particulars of NetOp Guest for other operating systems are explained in the

Administrator’s Manual Other Operating Systems chapter.

NetOp Guest ActiveX component is explained in the Administrator’s Manual Advanced Tools chapter

NetOp Guest ActiveX Component section.

NetOp Guest can remote control and interact with a computer that runs NetOp Host or extended Host.

This section includes these sections:

·

Load and Unload

·

Connect Guide

·

Host Security Guide

·

NetOp Guest Window

·

Guest Tools

·

Guest Sessions

·

Session Tools

·

Guest Actions

3.1 Load and Unload

NetOp Guest installation is explained in

Installation

.

To load NetOp Guest, select Start > (All) Programs > NetOp Remote Control > Guest or use one of the

available Loading Alternatives

.

If you load NetOp Guest for the first time after installation, the Setup Wizard

will be shown in front of the

NetOp Guest Window

.

If you have loaded NetOp Guest before, the

NetOp Guest Window

will be shown.

To unload NetOp Guest, in the NetOp Guest Window click the

Window Control Close button, select the

matching

Window Control command or

File Menu

Exit command or press ALT+F4.

3.1.1 Loading Alternatives

You can load NetOp Guest by these alternative methods:

1. In the Windows XP Start menu, select Guest if pinned to your Start menu or in your list of most frequently used programs.

2. Run the NetOp Guest program file NGSTW32.EXE from the directory where NetOp Guest is installed, typically C:\Program Files\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest or from a desktop shortcut that you have created.

3. In the Windows Run or Command Prompt window, execute a command that specifies the NGSTW32.EXE path and file name. You can extend this command by any of these switches (add one space before each switch):

Switch

/A:

Function

Start an

Audio-Video Chat session with the connected to

Host.

/B:<Recording file path and name>

Play back <Recording file path and name>. Do not

32

NetOp Guest

combine this switch with other switches.

/C:<Communication profile>

/D:

Disconnect from the connected to Host. Do not combine this switch with other switches.

/E:<Phonebook file path and name>

Show the Connection Properties of <Phonebook file

path and name> or, if combined with a session switch (/

A:, /F:, /G:, /R: or /V:), start this session with the

<Phonebook file path and name> Host.

/F:

Start a File Transfer session with the connected to Host.

/G:

Start a

Host.

Remote Management

session with the connected to

/H:<Host name>

Connect by <Communication profile> to the Host specified by the switch /H: or /P:.

Connect to the <Host name> Host by an enabled networking communication profile or if specified by the switch /C: that communication profile.

/LGD:<Gateway logon domain>

When connected to a connecting NetOp Gateway, specify

<Gateway logon domain> to log on.

/LGN:<Gateway logon name>

When connected to a connecting NetOp Gateway, specify

<Gateway logon name> to log on.

/LGP:<Gateway logon password>

When connected to a connecting NetOp Gateway, specify

<Gateway logon password> to log on.

/LHD:<Host logon domain>

When connected to a Host, specify <Host logon domain> to log on.

/LHN:<Host logon name>

When connected to a Host, specify <Host logon name> to log on.

/LHP:<Host logon password>

When connected to a Host, specify <Host logon password> to log on.

/M:[<Recording file path and name>] Combine this switch with /R: to record the remote control session. If no <Recording file path and name> is specified, a recording file named <Time stamp>-<Guest

ID>-<Host ID>.dwr will be saved in the NetOp Configuration

Files

record directory.

/P:<Telephone number or IP address> Connect to the <Telephone number or IP address>

Host by an enabled point-to point communication profile or if specified by the switch /C: that communication profile.

/R:

Start a Remote Control

session with the connected to Host.

/S:<Script file path and name>

Run <Script file path and name>. Do not combine this switch with other switches.

/V:

Start a Chat

session with the connected to Host.

/X:<Number of pixels from left screen border>[,<Number of pixels from upper screen border>[,<Number of pixels width>[,<Number of pixels height>]]]

Combine this switch with /R: to specify a non-default position and size of the

Remote Control

window.

Note: Use the same command structure to load or control NetOp Guest from another application.

Examples

<NetOp Guest program path and file> /E:”C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator

\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest\PhBook\John.dwc” /R: /

M:

Explanation: Load the Guest and connect to the Host of the phonebook entry file John.dwc that resides in the Administrator NetOp configuration files PhBook directory to start a remote control session with it and record the session storing the recording file in its default location with its default name.

<NetOp Guest program path and file> /C:TCP/IP /H:Peter /F:

Explanation: Load the Guest and using the communication profile TCP/IP connect to the Host named Peter

33

NetOp Guest

to start a file transfer session with it.

<NetOp Guest program path and file> /S:”C:\SCRIPTS\MY SCRIPT.DWS”

Explanation: Load the Guest and run the C:\SCRIPTS\MY SCRIPT.DWS script file.

Note: Switch paths and file names that contain spaces and special characters must be enclosed by double quotes.

3.1.2 Setup Wizard

When you load NetOp Guest for the first time after installation, this window will show in front of the

NetOp

Guest Window :

Note: By default, NetOp Guest setup will be individual to each user, see

NetOp Configuration Files

.

To skip the Setup Wizard, click Cancel to close the window to apply the default setup.

Note: The default setup lacks settings that you may need to connect to a Host. We therefore recommend

that you run the Setup Wizard. You can re-run the Setup Wizard from the Tools Menu

Run Setup Wizard

command.

Click Next to show this window:

34

NetOp Guest

Select one of these options:

¤ Fast connections: You will typically connect across a local area network (default selection).

¡ Slow connections: You will typically connect across the Internet or by a telephone connection.

Click Next to show this window:

35

Select one of these options:

¤ No: You will not communicate by modem (default selection).

¡ Yes: You will communicate by modem.

Click Next to show this window:

NetOp Guest

Select one of these options:

¤ No: You will not connect by a NetOp WebConnect service (default selection).

¡ Yes: You will connect by a NetOp WebConnect service.

Click Next to specify your NetOp WebConnect service or show this window:

36

NetOp Guest

We recommend that you leave the default Yes, I want to register my NetOp license on-line selection unless you or somebody else in your organization has already registered or will register the license.

Click Next to connect to register or show this window:

Click Finish to close the window to end the Setup Wizard.

37

NetOp Guest

3.2 Connect Guide

You can connect:

· to one Host by a

communication profile

and a Host name or address, or

· to one or multiple Hosts by

Host records

.

To connect to one Host by a communication profile and a Host name or address:

1. In the

Tab Panel

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, select a communication profile that matches a communication profile that is enabled on the Host.

2. In the

Host Section , specify a Host name or address as required by the selected communication profile.

3. Click the

Buttons Connect button to connect to start the default type session, see the

Program Options

window

General Tab , click a

Toolbar Session Buttons button or select a

Connection Menu

Session

Commands command to connect to start a session or click a

Toolbar

Action Buttons button or select a

Connection Menu

Action Commands

command to connect to execute an action.

4. Typically, a logon window will be shown to log on to the Host, see

Guest Authentication .

5. When logged on to the Host, the session will start or the action will execute.

To connect to one or multiple Hosts by Host records:

·

Double-click a

Tab Panel tab Host record to connect to start the default type session, see the

Program

Options window

General Tab .

· Select one or multiple

Tab Panel

tab Host records and click a

Toolbar Session Buttons button or select a

Connection Menu

Session Commands command to connect to start a session.

· Select one or multiple

Tab Panel

tab Host records and click a

Toolbar

Action Buttons

button or select a

Connection Menu

Action Commands command to connect to execute an action.

Host records will be available on these

Tab Panel

tabs:

·

Phonebook Tab : Stores Host records that you have created or saved from the

Quick Connect Tab

or

History Tab .

·

Quick Connect Tab : Can show Host browse records on the

NetOp Network Tab , see

Browse for Hosts

,

and network computer records on the Windows Network Tab .

·

History Tab : Stores records of previous Host connections.

·

Help Request Tab : Will show records of pending Host help requests.

If connection fails, see Connect Problems

.

38

3.2.1 Connect Problems

If

connection to a Host fails, typically this window will be shown:

NetOp Guest

This window advises you on how to overcome connect problems.

Here is some additional advice:

· Verify that communication can physically reach the Host computer:

If communicating across an IP network, execute this command in a Windows Command Prompt window:

PING <Host computer IP address>

This command will send four data packets to the specified IP address requesting replies. If positive replies are received, communication can physically reach the Host computer. If negative replies are received, check your network setup or consult with your network/system administrator.

If communicating across a modem connection using

Windows Modem , the setup of your modem in

Windows may not satisfy NetOp requirements. Try setting up your modem using Serial instead.

· Verify on the NetOp Host window Names tab that the Host will respond to the specified name or address with the selected communication profile. Read in the

Communication Device section about the

characteristics of the communication device used by the selected communication profile.

·

Try connecting to other Hosts starting with Hosts close to you. Try using other communication profiles and other Host names or addresses.

· Read the

Host Security Guide .

·

Consult with your network/system administrator.

·

As a last resort, submit a support request to NetOp Customer & Product Support.

3.3 Host Security Guide

A Host and a connecting Gateway can apply Guest Access Security to limit which Guests can connect and what connected Guests are allowed to do. This guide includes these sections:

·

Guest Authentication

·

Security Role

39

NetOp Guest

·

Guest Profile

·

Guest Policy

·

Address Check

·

Encryption

3.3.1 Guest Authentication

A Host and a connecting Gateway can authenticate a connecting Guest or Guest user by logon credentials.

Note: Authentication can validate the credentials submitted by a Guest but cannot verify the identity of a connecting Guest or Guest user.

This section contains these sections:

·

Shared NetOp Authentication

·

Individual NetOp Authentication

·

Windows Authentication

·

Directory Services Authentication

·

NetOp Security Server Authentication

·

RSA SecurID Authentication

·

Smart Card Authentication

3.3.1.1 Shared NetOp Authentication

If the Host or a connecting NetOp Gateway uses shared NetOp authentication (default selection), this window will be shown on the Guest computer screen when the Guest connects:

Password []: Specify in this field the shared password specified on the Host or connecting Gateway.

The available number of logon attempts is specified by Host

Guest Policy

.

40

NetOp Guest

3.3.1.2 Individual NetOp Authentication

If the Host or a connecting NetOp Gateway uses individual NetOp authentication, this window will be shown on the Guest computer screen when the Guest connects:

Guest ID: []: Specify in this field a Guest ID specified on the Host or connecting Gateway.

Password: []: Specify in this field the matching password specified on the Host or connecting Gateway.

The available number of logon attempts is specified by Host

Guest Policy

.

3.3.1.3 Windows Authentication

If the Host or a connecting Gateway uses Windows authentication or if the Host uses NetOp Security Server and its Preferred Guest Type is Windows User, this window will be shown on the Guest computer screen when the Guest connects:

User name: []: Specify in this field a Windows logon user name specified in the local or domain Windows

Security Management used by the Host computer, the connecting Gateway computer or NetOp Security

Server.

Password: []: Specify in this field the matching password specified in Windows Security Management.

Domain: []: Specify in this field the matching domain specified in Windows Security Management.

The available number of logon attempts is specified by Host

Guest Policy

.

3.3.1.4 Directory Services Authentication

If the Host uses Directory Services authentication or if the Host uses NetOp Security Server and its Preferred

Guest Type is Directory Services User, this window will be shown on the Guest computer screen when the

Guest connects:

41

NetOp Guest

User name: []: Specify in this field a directory services user common name specified on the Host or NetOp

Security Server and on the directory server specified below.

Password: []: Specify in this field the matching password specified on the directory server.

Directory Server: []: Specify in this field the matching directory server.

The available number of logon attempts is specified by Host

Guest Policy.

3.3.1.5 NetOp Security Server Authentication

If the Host uses NetOp Security Server and its Preferred Guest Type is NetOp Guest ID, this window will be shown on the Guest computer screen when the Guest connects:

Guest ID: []: Specify in this field a Guest ID specified in the security database used by the NetOp Security

Server.

Password: []: Specify in this field the matching password specified in the security database used by the

NetOp Security Server.

Change Password...: To change the password, click this button to show this window:

42

NetOp Guest

New password: Specify in this field the new password.

Confirm new password: Re-specify in this field the new password for confirmation.

The available number of logon attempts is specified by Host

Guest Policy

and can be further limited by security database specification.

3.3.1.6 RSA SecurID Authentication

If the Host uses NetOp Security Server and its Preferred Guest Type is RSA SecurID User, this window will be shown on the Guest computer screen when the Guest connects:

User name: []: Specify in this field your RSA SecurID user name.

Password: []: This field will be included only if triple factor security is specified by NetOp Security Server.

Specify in the field your triple factor security NetOp password.

PASSCODE: []: Specify in this field your RSA SecurID PASSCODE (PIN + token number).

Change Password...: This button will be included only if triple factor security is specified by NetOp Security

Server. Click it to change your NetOp password like in

NetOp Security Server Authentication .

The available number of logon attempts is specified by Host

Guest Policy

.

43

NetOp Guest

3.3.1.7 Smart Card Authentication

If the Host uses NetOp Security Server and its Preferred Guest Type is Smart Card and PIN, this window will be shown on the Guest computer screen when the Guest connects:

Insert your NetOp authentication Smart Card into your Smart Card reader and click OK to show a window that requests the matching PIN number. Specify your matching PIN number.

The available number of logon attempts is specified by Host

Guest Policy

.

3.3.2 Security Role

NetOp Host can specify locally and the NetOp Security Server security database can specify centrally in

Security Roles which actions shall be allowed to a Guest and which confirm access option shall be available to the Host computer user.

Each Security Role specifies these elements:

This section includes these sections:

·

Allow Guest To

·

Confirm Access

44

NetOp Guest

3.3.2.1 Allow Guest To

The Host or security database Security Role specification upper part that is indented under Allow Guest to:

- specifies which actions will be allowed to a Guest when connected to the Host. Checked actions will be allowed, unchecked will be denied.

þ Remote control: Start a

Remote Control

session to show the Host computer screen image (default: allowed). Indented actions below can be allowed if Remote control is allowed.

þ Use keyboard and mouse: Execute keyboard and mouse actions on the Host computer screen

(default: allowed).

þ Lock keyboard and mouse: Disable the Host computer keyboard and mouse (default: allowed).

þ Blank the screen: Make the screen turn black to the Host computer user (default: allowed).

þ Transfer clipboard: Transfer Guest computer clipboard contents to the Host computer clipboard and vice versa (default: allowed).

þ Execute command (Restart, ...):

Execute Command on the Host computer including other commands

like Restart (default: allowed).

þ Request chat: Start a

Chat session with the Host (default: allowed).

þ Request audio-video chat and transfer sound: Start an

Audio-Video Chat session with the Host and

transfer the sound of applications running on the Host computer (default: allowed).

¨ Request video: In an

Audio-Video Chat session, transfer a Host computer video camera image to the

Guest

Audio-Video Chat window Remote section video frame (default: denied).

þ Send files to Host:

File Transfer from the Guest computer to the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Receive files from Host:

File Transfer from the Host computer to the Guest computer (default: allowed).

þ Run programs:

Run Program on the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Redirect print: Send a print job from one computer to a printing device available to the other computer,

45

NetOp Guest

see the

Program Options

window

Remote Printing Tab

(default: allowed).

þ Remote manage: Start a

Remote Management

session to manage the Host computer system (default: allowed).

þ Retrieve inventory:

Get Inventory from the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Send message: Send a

NetOp Message to the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Demonstrate:

Demonstrate

the Guest computer screen image on the Host computer screen (default:

allowed).

þ Join multi Guest session: Join a

Remote Control

session that another Guest runs with the Host (default: allowed).

þ Act as multi Guest session administrator: Manage a

Remote Control

Multi Guest Session (default:

allowed).

3.3.2.2 Confirm Access

The Host or security database Security Role specification lower part that is indented under Confirm access:

- specifies whether the Host computer user shall confirm Guest user access to the Host computer. One of these options will be selected:

¤ No: The Host computer user shall not confirm access (default selection).

¡ Yes, except when: The Host computer user shall confirm access except in the cases checked below.

¨ Computer locked: If the computer is locked, the Host computer user cannot confirm access (default: unchecked).

¨ No user logged on: If no user is logged on to the Host computer, no user will be available to confirm access (default: unchecked).

¨ Guest user logged on: If Guest credentials match the Host computer user logon credentials, confirm access is typically not justified (default: unchecked).

If the Host user shall confirm access, this message will be shown when the Guest has logged on:

This message will remain until the Host computer user has confirmed access or confirm access has timed

out, see Host Guest Policy . If the Host computer user allows access, the Guest will access the Host

computer. If the Host computer user denies access or confirm access times out, the Host will disconnect.

Cancel: Click this button to close the message to disconnect.

46

NetOp Guest

3.3.3 Guest Profile

A Guest profile specifies how the Host shall respond to a Guest connection attempt.

By default, the Host will use

Shared NetOp Authentication

for which the Host specifies one Guest profile that is shared by all connecting Guests.

For individual authentication methods, the Host can specify individual Guest profiles or apply Windows

Security Management or directory services specified Guest user profiles. NetOp Security Server can apply security database specified Guest profiles or Windows Security Management or other external Guest user profiles.

This is the Host window that specifies an

Individual NetOp Authentication Guest profile:

It specifies Guest credentials that consist of a Guest ID and a Password and selects one of these Call back options:

¤ No call back: The Host will not disconnect and reconnect (default selection).

¡ Call back to: []: The Host will disconnect and reconnect to a telephone number or IP address that is specified in the field. Only if the Guest connects from this telephone number or IP address, it can gain

access to the Host, see also Address Check

.

¡ Roving call back: This window will show on the Guest computer screen:

Enter callback phone number: []: Specify in the field the telephone number or IP address from which the

Guest computer connected. The Host will disconnect and reconnect to the specified telephone number or IP address. This call back option will not limit Guest access, but the Host computer organization will carry connection charges during a session.

47

3.3.4 Guest Policy

A Host and a connecting Gateway can apply these Guest security policies:

NetOp Guest

·

Specify the available number of logon attempts (default: 3) and select which action shall be executed if all available connecting Guest logon attempts are unsuccessful: Disconnect (default selection), Disable Host

(deny any connection until reset on the Host computer) or Restart Windows.

Note: Restart Windows will typically reload and restart the Host or Gateway.

· Select which action shall be executed after disconnect: None (default selection), Lock computer, Log off

Windows or Restart Windows.

Note: A Guest can connect to a locked Host computer and a Host computer with no user logged on. The

Guest user must unlock or log on to the Host computer to access it.

· Disable file transfer if no user is logged on to the Host computer (default: unselected).

· Record remote control sessions (default: disabled) and disconnect if session recording fails (default: disabled).

·

Timeout (disconnect if not completed within a specified number of seconds):

·

Confirm Access

(default: no timeout).

48

NetOp Guest

·

Authentication (default: no timeout).

·

Inactivity (no Guest computer keyboard or mouse activity, default: no timeout).

3.3.5 Address Check

A Host and a connecting Gateway can allow connections by network communication only from computers with specified MAC and IP addresses:

Note: MAC addresses apply to connections by

NetBIOS and

IPX communication devices. IP addresses

apply to connections by

TCP/IP and

TCP/IP (TCP)

communication devices.

A Host and a connecting Gateway can allow connections by ISDN (CAPI) communication only from

telephone numbers in an

Allowed ISDN Numbers

list (default: not applied).

A Host and a connecting Gateway can allow connections by point-to-point communication only from a

specified telephone number or IP address by call back, see Guest Profile (default: not applied).

3.3.6 Encryption

NetOp communication is protected by encryption, see the

Program Options

window

Encryption Tab

.

A Guest can connect only if at least one encryption type enabled on the Guest is also enabled on a

49

connecting Gateway and on the Host.

3.4 NetOp Guest Window

When NetOp Guest is loaded, this window will be shown:

NetOp Guest

It contains these elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Menu Bar

·

Toolbar

·

Tab Panel

·

Status Bar

3.4.1 Title Bar

This is the

NetOp Guest Window title bar:

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

3.4.2 Menu Bar

This is the

NetOp Guest Window menu bar:

It contains these menus:

·

File Menu

50

NetOp Guest

·

Connection Menu

·

Edit Menu

·

View Menu

·

Tools Menu

·

Help Menu

3.4.2.1 File Menu

This is the

NetOp Guest Window File menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Import to Phonebook: Select this command to show the

Import to Phonebook

window.

Export from Phonebook: Select

Phonebook Tab

directories or records and select this command to show the

Export from Phonebook

window.

Exit: Select this command or a Window Control Close control to unload NetOp Guest.

3.4.2.2 Connection Menu

This is the

NetOp Guest Window

Connection menu:

Connection menu commands fall into these groups:

·

Session Commands

·

Action Commands

·

Other Commands

51

NetOp Guest

3.4.2.2.1 Session Commands

These are the

Connection Menu session commands:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

To enable session commands, specify a Host name in the

Quick Connect Tab

Host Section Name field or

select one or multiple Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab ,

Connections Tab

, History Tab

or

Help Request

Tab Host records.

Note: You can start a session with multiple Hosts at a time only if the session is not running with any selected Host. You can end a session with only one Host at a time.

Remote Control: Select this command or the matching

Tab Panel

record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Remote Control

button to start or end a

Remote Control session. If a Remote Control

session is running with the last selected record Host, the command will be check marked to end the session.

Monitor: Select this command or the matching Tab Panel record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Monitor

button to start or end a Monitor session. If a Monitor session is running with the last selected record

Host, the command will be check marked to end the session.

File Transfer: Select this command or the matching

Tab Panel

record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

File Transfer

button to start or end a

File Transfer session. If a File Transfer session is running with

the last selected record Host, the command will be check marked to end the session.

Chat: Select this command or the matching Tab Panel record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Chat

button to start or end a

Chat

session. If a

Chat

session is running with the last selected record Host, the command will be check marked to end the session.

Audio-Video Chat: Select this command or the matching

Tab Panel

record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Audio-Video Chat

button to start or end an

Audio-Video Chat

session. If an

Audio-Video Chat

session is running with the last selected record Host, the command will be check marked to end the session.

Note: If the Guest or the Host is engaged in another audio session, you cannot start an

Audio-Video Chat

session.

Remote Management: Select this command or the matching

Tab Panel record context menu command or

click the

Toolbar

Remote Management

button to start or end a

Remote Management session. If a Remote

Management session is running with the last selected record Host, the command will be check marked to

end the session.

Demonstrate: Select this command or the matching Tab Panel record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Remote Management

button to start or end a

Demonstrate session. If a Demonstrate session is

running with the last selected record Host, the command will be check marked to end the session.

If you start a session with multiple Hosts, this window will be shown:

52

NetOp Guest

The window will show a session type icon and Launch <Session type>.

The pane below will show records of selected Hosts in a table with these column contents:

·

Description: Progress indicator and Tab Panel

record Description column value. These progress indicators can be shown:

Command execution in progress

Command executed successfully

Command execution failed

·

Name: Tab Panel record Name column value.

· Phone number:

Tab Panel

record Phone number column value.

·

Communication Profile:

Tab Panel record Communication Profile column value.

·

Status: Textual progress indicator.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Commands will execute sequentially as indicated by the progress indicators and Status column content.

If no other session is running with a selected record Host, starting a session will include connecting to the

Host.

Note: If Guest Access Security on a selected record Host does not allow the session of the selected

command, command execution will fail, see Allow Guest To

.

¨ Close this dialog box on successful completion: Check this box to close this window when the command has executed successfully on all selected record Hosts (default: unchecked).

Cancel/Close: During progress, this button will show Cancel. Click it to cancel executing the command on the current Host record and proceed to the next. After completion, this button will show Close. Click it to close the window.

53

NetOp Guest

3.4.2.2.2 Action Commands

These are the

Connection Menu action commands:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

To enable action commands, specify a Host name in the

Quick Connect Tab

Host Section

Name field or

select one or multiple Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab ,

Connections Tab

or History Tab Host records.

Run Program: Select this command or the matching Tab Panel record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Run Program

button to showthe

Run Program

menu.

Execute Command: Select this command or the matching

Tab Panel record context menu command or click

the

Toolbar

Execute Command

button to show the

Execute Command

menu.

Send Message: Select this command or the matching Tab Panel record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Send Message

button to showthe

NetOp Message

window.

Get Inventory: Select this command or the matching

Tab Panel

record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Get Inventory

button to

Get Inventory from selected record Host computers.

Note: When executing a Run Program ,

Execute Command or

Get Inventory action, the

Command Progress

Status

window will be shown.

3.4.2.2.3 Other Commands

These are the

Connection Menu other commands:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Disconnect: Select a Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab ,

Connections Tab or

History Tab connected Host

record and select this command or the matching record context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Disconnect

button to disconnect.

Note: You can disconnect only one Host at a time.

Local File Transfer: Select this command or

NetOp File Manager

window

View Menu

Local

command or click

the

Toolbar

Local File Transfer

button or

NetOp File Manager

window

Toolbar

Local

button to start a local

File Transfer session.

Playback Session Recording: Select a

Recordings Tab record and select this command or the matching

record context menu command or double-click the record to play back the session recording.

54

NetOp Guest

3.4.2.3 Edit Menu

This is the

NetOp Guest Window Edit menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Cut: Select one or multiple Tab Panel

folders or records and select this command or the matching context menu command to remove selected folders or records and place them on the clipboard.

Copy: Select one or multiple

Tab Panel folders or records and select this command or the matching context

menu command to copy selected folders or records to the clipboard.

Paste: Select a Tab Panel folder and select this command or the matching context menu command to paste

the clipboard contents into the selected folder.

Delete: Select one or multiple

Tab Panel folders or records and select this command or the matching context

menu command or click the Toolbar

Delete

button to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting

selected folders or records.

Caution: Deleting a folder will delete all folders and records in it.

Rename: Select a Tab Panel folder and select this command or the matching context menu command to

show this window:

New folder name: []: The field highlights the folder name. Edit it to rename the folder.

New: This command expands into these commands:

Phonebook Entry: Showing the

Phonebook Tab

, select this command or the matching Records Pane

context menu command or click the Toolbar

Phonebook Entry

button to show the

Connection Properties

window to create a phonebook record.

Script: Showing the

Script Tab , select this command or the matching

Records Pane context menu

command to show the

Script

window to create a NetOp Script

.

Folder: Select a

Tab Panel

Tree Pane folder and select this command or the Tree Pane

context menu

New Folder command to show this window:

55

NetOp Guest

Enter folder name: []: Specify in this field a folder name to create this folder in the selected folder.

Refresh: Select this command to refresh the contents of the shown

Tab Panel tab. If the

Quick Connect Tab

is shown, this will

Browse for Hosts .

Note: Tab contents will show changes from outside the tab only if refreshed.

Connection Properties: Select a

Phonebook Tab ,

History Tab or

Help Request Tab Host record and select

this command or the matching context menu command or click the

Toolbar

Connection Properties

button to

show the

Connection Properties

window to view or edit the selected Host record connection properties.

Edit Script: Select a

Script Tab record and select this command or the record context menu

Edit

command to

open the record script in the

Script

window.

3.4.2.4 View Menu

This is the

NetOp Guest Window View menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Tree Window: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Tree Window

button to hide/show the shown

Tab

Panel tab

Tree Pane (default: shown). If shown, the command will be check marked.

Large Icons: Select this command or click the Toolbar

Large Icons

button to show the shown

Tab Panel

tab

Records Pane records as horizontal rows of large icons. If selected, the command will be check marked.

Small Icons: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Small Icons

button to show the shown

Tab Panel tab

Records Pane records as horizontal rows of small icons. If selected, the command will be check marked.

List: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

List

button to show the shown

Tab Panel tab

Records Pane

records as vertical columns of small icons. If selected, the command will be check marked.

Details: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Details

button to show the shown

Tab Panel tab

Records

Pane records in a table with details in columns (default selection). If selected, the command will be check

marked.

View File Manager Log: Select this command or the

NetOp File Manager

window

Options Menu

View File

Manager Log

command to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Log Files (*.log) to

open a

File Transfer log (typically named NFM.LOG) to show it in the

NFM Log Viewer

window.

Modem Dialog: Select this command to show the

Modem Dialog

window.

56

NetOp Guest

3.4.2.5 Tools Menu

This is the

NetOp Guest Window Tools menu:

Its commands are explained in

Guest Tools .

3.4.2.6 Help Menu

This is the

NetOp Guest Window Help menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control.

Contents: Select this command to open the NetOp Guest Help system on the

Introduction topic. The left

pane of the window will show a graphical table of contents.

Online Support: Select this command to open the Support for NetOp Remote Control web page to submit a support request.

Apply License/Online Registration: This command will be Apply License if a trial version is installed and

Online Registration if a licensed version is installed.

Select Apply License to show this window:

Licensed to: []: Specify in this field your licensee name.

Serial number: []: Specify in this field your Guest license number.

OK: Click this button to replace the trial version licensee name and license number by the specified

57

NetOp Guest

licensee name and license number.

Select Online Registration to open the NetOp Product Registration web page to register your NetOp product with the manufacturer.

Quick Guide: Select this command to open the NetOp Guest Help system on the

Connect Guide

topic.

Help for this Tab: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Help for this Tab

button to open the NetOp Guest

Help system on the topic of the shown Tab Panel tab.

About...: Select this command to show this window:

This window contains information on your NetOp Guest installation. The build number in format

YYYYDDD (Y=year number digit, D=day number digit) is enclosed in parentheses next to the version number.

System Info...: Click this button to show the

System Info

window.

3.4.3 Toolbar

The

NetOp Guest Window

toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout

Tab :

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Toolbar buttons are grouped into these sections:

·

Session Buttons

·

Action Buttons

·

Other Buttons

3.4.3.1 Session Buttons

These are the

Toolbar session buttons:

58

NetOp Guest

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

To enable session buttons, specify a Host name in the Quick Connect Tab

Host Section Name field or select

one or multiple

Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab

,

Connections Tab ,

History Tab

or

Help Request Tab

Host records.

Note: You can start a session with multiple Hosts at a time only if the session is not running with any selected Host. You can end a session with only one Host at a time.

Remote Control: Click this button or select the Connection Menu or

Tab Panel record context menu

Remote Control

command to start or end a

Remote Control

session. If a

Remote Control session is

running with the last selected record Host, the button will appear pressed in to end the session.

Monitor: Click this button or select the Connection Menu or

Tab Panel record context menu

Monitor

command to start or end a Monitor session. If a Monitor session is running with the last selected

record Host, the button will appear pressed in to end the session.selected record Hosts.

File Transfer: Click this button or select the Connection Menu

or

Tab Panel record context menu

File

Transfer

command to start or end a File Transfer

session. If a

File Transfer session is running with

the last selected record Host, the button will appear pressed in to end the session.

Chat: Click this button or select the Connection Menu or

Tab Panel record context menu

Chat

command to start or end a Chat session. If a Chat session is running with the last selected record

Host, the button will appear pressed in to end the session.

Audio-Video Chat: Click this button or select the Connection Menu

or Tab Panel record context menu

Audio-Video Chat

command to start or end an

Audio-Video Chat session. If an Audio-Video Chat

session is running with the last selected record Host, the button will appear pressed in to end the session.

Note: If the Guest or the Host is engaged in another audio session, you cannot start an

Audio-Video

Chat session.

Remote Management: Click this button or select the

Connection Menu or

Tab Panel

record context menu

Remote Management

command to start or end a Remote Management

session. If a

Remote

Management session is running with the last selected record Host, the button will appear pressed in

to end the session.

Demonstrate: Click this button or select the Connection Menu or

Tab Panel record context menu

Demonstrate

command to start or end a

Demonstrate session. If a Demonstrate session is running

with the last selected record Host, the button will appear pressed in to end the session.selected

record Hosts.

If you start a session with multiple Hosts, the

Command Progress Status

window will be shown.

3.4.3.2 Action Buttons

These are the

Toolbar action buttons:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

To enable action buttons, specify a Host name in the

Quick Connect Tab

Host Section Name field or select

one or multiple

Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab

,

Connections Tab

or History Tab

Host records.

Run Program: Click this button or select the

Connection Menu

or

Tab Panel record context menu

Run

Program

command to show the

Run Program drop-down menu.

Execute Command: Click this button or select the

Connection Menu or

Tab Panel record context

menu

Execute Command

command to show the

Execute Command drop-down menu.

Send Message: Click this button or select the

Connection Menu or

Tab Panel

record context menu

Send Message

command to show the

NetOp Message

window.

59

NetOp Guest

Get Inventory: Click this button or select the Connection Menu

or

Tab Panel record context menu

Get

Inventory

command to

Get Inventory from selected record Host computers.

Note: When executing a

Run Program ,

Execute Command

or Get Inventory action, the

Command Progress

Status

window will be shown.

3.4.3.3 Other Buttons

These are the

Toolbar other buttons:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Disconnect: Select a Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab ,

Connections Tab or

History Tab

connected Host record and click this button or select the

Connection Menu or record context menu

Disconnect

command to disconnect.

Note: You can disconnect only one Host at a time.

Local File Transfer: Click this button or the

NetOp File Manager

window

Toolbar

Local

button or

select the Connection Menu

Local File Transfer

command or

NetOp File Manager

window

View Menu

Local

command to start a local

File Transfer session.

Connection Properties: Select a

Phonebook Tab ,

History Tab

or Help Request Tab Host record and

click this button or select the

Edit Menu

or record context menu

Connection Properties

command to show the

Connection Properties

window to view or edit the selected Host record connection

properties.

Phonebook Entry: Showing the

Phonebook Tab

, click this button or select the

Edit Menu

or

Records

Pane context menu

New Phonebook Entry

command to show the

Connection Properties

window to create a phonebook record.

Delete: Select one or multiple Tab Panel folders or records and click this button or select the

Edit

Menu or context menu

Delete

command to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting selected folders or records.

Caution: Deleting a folder will delete all folders and records in it.

Tree Window: Click this button or select the

View Menu

Tree Window

command to hide/show the

shown Tab Panel tab

Tree Pane

(default: shown). If shown, the button will appear pressed in.

Large Icons: Click this button or select the View Menu

Large Icons

command to show the shown

Tab

Panel

tab records as horizontal rows of large icons. If selected, the button will appear pressed in.

Small Icons: Click this button or select the

View Menu

Small Icons

command to show the shown

Tab

Panel

tab records as horizontal rows of small icons. If selected, the button will appear pressed in.

List: Click this button or select the

View Menu

List

command to show the shown

Tab Panel tab

records as vertical columns of small icons. If selected, the button will appear pressed in.

Details: Click this button or select the

View Menu

Details

command to show the shown

Tab Panel tab

records in a table with details in columns (default selection). If selected, the button will appear pressed in.

Help for this Tab: Click this button or select the Help Menu

Help for this Tab

command to open the

NetOp Guest Help system on the topic of the shown

Tab Panel tab.

60

3.4.4 Tab Panel

This is the

NetOp Guest Window tab panel:

NetOp Guest

It can contain up to all of these tabs (default: all):

·

Phonebook Tab

·

Quick Connect Tab

·

Connections Tab

·

History Tab

·

Help Request Tab

·

Recordings Tab

·

Script Tab

·

Inventory Tab

By default, the

Quick Connect Tab

will be shown in front.

Organize tab panel tabs from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab .

61

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.1 Phonebook Tab

This Tab Panel tab will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab

:

It works like your personal quick-dial telephone directory. However, connecting to a Host requires much more than a phone call:

·

You must select the right communication profile

·

You must specify the Host name and possible connecting elements correctly

· When connected, you may need to specify logon credentials

· Guest settings should fit Host settings and optimize transmission speed and quality

· Your preferred interactive functionality should be in place when connected

All of this can be specified in

Phonebook Records to access Host computers by a few mouse clicks.

The Phonebook tab contains an optional left

Tree Pane

and a right

Records Pane .

The

Tree Pane will show the phonebook directory structure. To hide/show the Tree Pane , click the

Toolbar

Tree Window

button or select the

View Menu

Tree Window

command (default: shown).

The

Records Pane will show the

Phonebook Records in the phonebook directory selected in the

Tree Pane .

62

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.1.1 Tree Pane

This is the

Phonebook Tab tree pane:

It will initially contain only a Phonebook element that is the root of the NetOp Guest phonebook.

Right-click in the pane to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

This menu enables you to manage your Phonebook and phonebook reference directories. You can also manage directory folders by drag and drop.

Commands in the first three sections match

Edit Menu

commands.

Add Phonebook Reference: Select this command to show this window:

63

NetOp Guest

A phonebook reference will link to a directory that contains

Phonebook Records , for instance a

phonebook shared by multiple users.

Click the [...] button to show a Browse for Folder window to select a directory to specify its name in the

Name field and its path in the Folder field. You can edit the Name field phonebook reference name. A new phonebook reference will show in the tree pane as an additional phonebook element that expands into the directories of the selected directory.

Edit Phonebook Reference: Select a phonebook reference element and select this command to show the

phonebook reference specification in the

Add Phonebook Reference

window to edit it.

3.4.4.1.2 Records Pane

This is the

Phonebook Tab records pane:

It will show the

Phonebook Records

in the

Tree Pane

selected folder as icons or table records according to the

Toolbar or

View Menu

selection.

Details

will show records in a table with these column contents:

· Description: Communication device type icon (

Networking , Point-to-Point

,

Gateway ,

Network Point-to-Point

or

Infrared

) and record identifying description.

· Name: Host

Networking

name, if applicable.

· Phone Number: Host or Host network NetOp Gateway

Point-to-Point or Gateway telephone number or IP

address or Network Point-to-Point IP address, if applicable.

· Communication Profile: Guest

Communication Profile name.

·

Comment: Optional user editable comment. A record generated by Browse for Hosts

will show the Host user name, if enabled, and (Gateway) if the Host is a NetOp Gateway.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control.

To start a session with selected record Hosts, click a

Session Buttons button or select a

Session Commands

command.

To execute an action on selected record Host computers, click an Action Buttons

button or select an

Action

Commands

command.

Double-click a record to start the default type session with the record Host, see the

Program Options

window

General Tab

.

Right-click a record or multiple selected records to show this context menu:

64

NetOp Guest

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

The first section contains

Session Commands .

The second section contains

Action Commands

.

If one record is selected, a <Custom application> command can be included after action commands. Select

this command to run the custom application. Assign a custom application to a Phonebook Record on the

Connection Properties

window

Custom Tab

.

Disconnect: See

Other Commands .

Remaining commands match Edit Menu commands.

3.4.4.1.3 Phonebook Records

Phonebook records specify Host

Connection Properties .

You can create as many phonebook records as you like, including multiple alternative phonebook records for the same Host.

To swiftly create phonebook records, add Quick Connect Tab

NetOp Network Tab Host records or copy

Quick Connect Tab

NetOp Network Tab or

History Tab

Records Pane

Host records to the Phonebook Tab

.

You can create phonebook records by copying phonebook or history dwc files to the Phonebook Tab or by

importing phonebook data in a comma separated file, see Phonebook Export and Import .

To create a phonebook record from scratch, showing the

Phonebook Tab

click the

Toolbar

Phonebook Entry

button or select the

Edit Menu or

Records Pane

context menu

New Phonebook Entry

command to show the

Connection Properties

window. Select a phonebook record first to base the phonebook record on the

connection properties of the selected phonebook record.

To edit a phonebook record, select it and click the

Toolbar

Connection Properties

button or select the

Edit

Menu

or

Records Pane context menu

Connection Properties

command to show its connection properties in

the

Connection Properties

window.

You can copy and move phonebook records between the Phonebook root folder and user-created folders, also by drag and drop.

Phonebook records will be saved as files with the extension dwc in the PhBook directory that resides in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data

65

NetOp Guest

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest\PhBook. dwc files are XML format files whose contents can be shown in any text editor. Passwords will be encrypted by a secure algorithm.

To connect to your favorite Hosts without loading NetOp Guest first, copy their phonebook records to your computer desktop where they will show as dwc file icons. Double-click the file icon to start the default type session with the Host, see the

Program Options

window

General tab. If not loaded, NetOp Guest will load

and run minimized in a notification area NetOp Guest button. Right-click the dwc file icon to show a context menu with

Session Commands

, a

Connection Properties

command and standard desktop icon commands.

3.4.4.1.4 Phonebook Export and Import

You can export and import phonebook data in a comma separated values (CSV) file.

Export

Select a

Phonebook Tab

Tree Pane element or select one or multiple

Records Pane records and select the

File Menu

Export from Phonebook

command to show this window:

Export file name: [][Browse...]: Specify in this field the CSV file path and name. If you specify only a file name, the export file will be saved in the directory in which NetOp Guest is installed. Click [Browse...] to show a

Windows Save As window to select the directory and specify the name of the CSV file to specify the path and name in the Export file name field.

¨ Export Passwords: Check this box to include phonebook record passwords in the CSV file (default: unchecked).

Note: You cannot export phonebook record

Connection Properties

window

Display Tab ,

Keyboard/Mouse

Tab ,

Compression/Encryption Tab ,

Desktop Tab

and Record Tab

properties, but you can specify these properties when importing.

CSV File Syntax

The CSV file is a plain text file. It contains for each phonebook record a line of values separated by commas according to this syntax:

<Folder path>,<Description>,<Phone number>,<Name>,<Comment>,<Communication profile>,<Host logon name>,<Host logon password>,<Host logon domain>,<Gateway logon name>,<Gateway logon password>,<Gateway logon domain>,<Protect item password>,<Wake on LAN MAC address>,<Logon credentials flags>,<Custom application description>,<Custom application command line>.

Passwords will be encrypted as 32-digit hexadecimal checksums prefixed by ENCRYPTED:.

Import

Select the

File Menu

Import to Phonebook

command to show this window:

66

NetOp Guest

Import file name: [][Browse...]: Specify in this field the CSV file path and name. Click [Browse...] to show a

Windows Open window to select the directory and specify the name of the CSV file to specify the path and name in the Import file name field.

Connection Properties...: Click this button to show the

Connection Properties

window with the

Display Tab

,

Keyboard/Mouse Tab ,

Compression/Encryption Tab

,

Desktop Tab and

Record Tab

to optionally specify imported phonebook record properties on these tabs.

OK: Click this button to import the CSV file to create Phonebook Records

in the CSV file specified phonebook structure.

3.4.4.2 Quick Connect Tab

This Tab Panel tab will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab

.

It enables you to connect to Hosts that you have not connected to before and

Browse for Hosts .

It contains these elements:

·

Host Section

·

Communication Profile Section

·

Buttons

·

NetOp Network Tab

·

Windows Network Tab

67

NetOp Guest

To connect or Browse for Hosts

, first select a communication profile in the

Communication Profile Section .

Then:

·

Connect by a Name and/or Address , or

·

Browse for Hosts

to connect to one or multiple Hosts by records of responding Hosts.

Note: If connection fails, see Connect Problems

.

3.4.4.2.1 Host Section

The contents of this

Quick Connect Tab

section:

will depend on the

Communication Profile Section

selected

Communication Profile

Communication Device

type:

·

Networking

·

Point-to-Point or Gateway

·

Network Point-to-Point

·

Infrared

Networking

If in the Communication Profile Section

you select a

Communication Profile that uses a

Networking

Communication Device (

NetBIOS (including RemPCNB v. 4.3),

IPX

(including RemPCIPX v. 4.3), TCP/IP ,

WebConnect or

Terminal Server

), the

Host Section

will have these contents:

Note: To connect or browse by multiple networking

Communication Profiles

, enable them at Guest loading and select <Any initialized communication>.

Name: []: To Connect , specify in the field of this drop-down box a name or address that is enabled on the

Host, see

NetBIOS Settings

,

IPX Settings ,

TCP/IP Settings or

Terminal Server Settings

. To Browse for Hosts

, specify any number of Host name beginning characters to request that Hosts whose name begins with these characters respond. The drop-down box list will contain Host names or addresses that have been specified before. Select a name or address in the list to show it in the field.

Note: NetOp will interpret the Name drop-down box field name according to the default Host name qualifier or a prefixed Host name qualifier, see the

Program Options

window

Host Name Tab

.

Point-to-Point or Gateway

If in the Communication Profile Section

you select a

Communication Profile that uses a

Point-to-Point

(

ISDN

(CAPI) ,

Serial

or

Windows Modem ) or

Gateway

Communication Device , the

Host Section will have these

contents:

68

NetOp Guest

If you connect by Point-to-Point

communication directly to a Host:

- specify in the Phone number drop-down box field the Host computer modem telephone number and leave the Name drop-down box field empty.

If you connect by Gateway communication through a Guest network NetOp Gateway that connects by

Pointto-Point or Network Point-to-Point

communication to a Host:

- specify in the Phone number drop-down box field the Host computer modem telephone number if using point-to-point communication or IP address if using network point-to-point communication and leave the

Name drop-down box field empty.

If you connect by Point-to-Point

communication to a Host network NetOp Gateway that connects to a network computer Host:

- specify in the Phone number drop-down box field the Host network NetOp Gateway computer modem telephone number and optionally specify in the Name drop-down box field the Host name, see

Gateway

Connection .

If you connect by Gateway communication through a Guest network NetOp Gateway that connects by

Pointto-Point or Network Point-to-Point

communication to a Host network NetOp Gateway that connects to a network computer Host:

69

NetOp Guest

- specify in the Phone number drop-down box field the Host network NetOp Gateway computer modem telephone number if using

Point-to-Point communication or IP address if using Network Point-to-Point

communication and optionally specify in the Name drop-down box field the Host name, see

Gateway

Connection .

The drop-down box lists will contain telephone numbers, IP addresses and Host names that have been specified before. Select a list entry to show it in the field.

Note: NetOp will interpret the Name drop-down box field Host name according to the default Host name qualifier or a prefixed Host name qualifier, see the

Program Options

window

Host Name Tab .

Network Point-to-Point

If in the Communication Profile Section

you select a

Communication Profile that uses a

Network Point-to-

Point

Communication Device (

TCP/IP (TCP)

,

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6)

), the

Host Section will have these contents:

If you connect directly to a Host, specify in the IP Address drop-down box field the Host computer IP address and leave the Name drop-down box field empty.

If you connect by Network Point-to-Point communication to a Host network NetOp Gateway that connects to

a network computer Host, specify in the IP Address drop-down box field the NetOp Gateway computer IP address and optionally specify in the Name drop-down box field the Host name, see

Gateway Connection .

The drop-down box lists will contain IP addresses and Host names that have been specified before. Select a list entry to show it in the field.

Note: NetOp will interpret the Name drop-down box field name according to the default Host name qualifier or a prefixed Host name qualifier, see the

Program Options

window

Host Name Tab

.

Infrared

If in the Communication Profile Section

you select a

Communication Profile that uses the

Infrared (IrDA)

Communication Device , the

Host Section will have these contents:

If you connect directly to a Host, leave the Name drop-down box field empty.

If you connect by infrared communication to a Host network NetOp Gateway that connects to a network

computer Host, optionally specify in the Name drop-down box field the Host name, see Gateway Connection.

The drop-down box list will contain Host names that have been specified before. Select a name in the list to show it in the field.

Note: NetOp will interpret the Name drop-down box field name according to the default Host name qualifier or a prefixed Host name qualifier, see the

Program Options

window

Host Name Tab

.

70

NetOp Guest

Gateway Connection

If you connect by Point-to-Point or Gateway ,

Network Point-to-Point or Infrared

communication to a Host network NetOp Gateway without specifying a Host name in the

Host Section Name drop-down box field, this

window will be shown when connected to the Host network NetOp Gateway:

Select one of these options:

¤ Remote Control Gateway: Connect to the Gateway (default selection).

¡ Connect to specific Host: []: Specify in the field a Host network Host name to connect to the Host.

¡ Browse for Hosts: []: Leave the field empty or specify any number of Host name first characters to

Browse for Hosts on the Host network.

3.4.4.2.2 Communication Profile Section

To connect to a Host or

Browse for Hosts from the

Quick Connect Tab , first select in this section:

- a

Communication Profile that will match a Communication Profile that is enabled on the Host or a

connecting NetOp Gateway.

Initially, the drop-down box selection will be TCP/IP. The drop-down box list will contain the names of Guest

Communication Profiles

. Select a name in the list to show it in the field.

Edit...: Click this button to show the

Communication Profile Edit

window to edit the selected

Communication

Profile .

New...: Click this button to show the

Communication Profile Edit

window to create a

Communication Profile .

Delete: Click this button to delete the selected

Communication Profile .

3.4.4.2.3 Buttons

The

Quick Connect Tab

has these buttons:

Connect: Click this button to connect to a Host by your selection in the Communication Profile Section and

your specification in the

Host Section

to start the default type session, see the

Program Options

window

General Tab

. If connection fails, see

Connect Problems .

71

NetOp Guest

Browse: Click this button to

Browse for Hosts

by your selection in the

Communication Profile Section

and your specification in the

Host Section

to show records of responding Hosts on the

NetOp Network Tab when

the browse has timed out.

Disconnect: This button will be enabled only if connected by a

Point-to-Point

( ISDN (CAPI) ,

Serial or

Windows Modem)

or Gateway

Communication Device

, see

Point-to-Point or Gateway

. Click the button to disconnect the point-to-point connection.

Connection Properties...: Click this button to show the Connection Properties window with a limited selection

of tabs. Selections in this window will apply when connecting or browsing for Hosts from the Quick Connect

Tab .

3.4.4.2.4 NetOp Network Tab

This Quick Connect Tab tab will show Host records after a

Browse for Hosts :

The section title will show Browse list (created <Time>). To update the tab contents, browse again.

The tab pane will show Hosts records as icons or table records according to the

Toolbar or

View Menu

selection (initially empty).

Details

will show Host records in a table with this column content:

· Host ID: Status indicator and Host record identifier, typically a Host specified Host ID or a directory service specified Host user name attribute. These status indicators can be shown:

A directory service returned this record, but the Host did not respond.

Host responded and is available.

Host responded but may not be available because it or another Guest running a session with it does not allow further connections. Verify by connecting.

·

User Name: Host computer Windows or network logon user name, if enabled.

· Phone Number: Host network NetOp Gateway telephone number or IP address, if applicable.

· Communication Profile: Guest communication profile name.

·

Information: A NetOp Gateway record will show (Gateway).

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Click a record Host ID value to specify it in the Host Section Name field.

Double-click the record Host ID value to connect to start the default type session, see the

Program Options

window General Tab .

Right-click the Host ID value of a record or multiple selected records to show this context menu:

72

NetOp Guest

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

The first menu section contains

Session Commands .

The second menu section contains

Action Commands .

Disconnect: See

Other Commands .

Copy: Select this command or the matching Edit Menu command to copy selected records to the clipboard.

Pasting the clipboard content into a

Phonebook Tab folder will save the records as

Phonebook Records .

Add to Phonebook: Select this command to show a Windows Browse For Folder window to select the folder in which to add selected records as

Phonebook Records .

3.4.4.2.5 Windows Network Tab

This Quick Connect Tab tab will contain Windows network names:

The tab pane will initially show records of Windows domains and workgroups recognized by the Guest

computer as icons or table records according to the Toolbar or

View Menu selection.

Details

will show

domain and workgroup records in a table with these column contents:

· Name: Domain icon and domain or workgroup name.

Other columns will be empty.

Double-click a record to expand it into its computer records:

The tab pane will show records of selected domain or workgroup running computers as icons or table

73

NetOp Guest

records according to the Toolbar

or

View Menu selection.

Note: A computer record verifies that the computer is running but not that NetOp Host is running on the computer.

Details

will show computer records in a table with these column contents:

·

Name: Computer icon and computer name.

· Operating System: Computer operating system name.

· Version: Computer operating system version.

·

Comment: Computer comment, if any.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control.

Click a record Name value to specify it in the Host Section Name field.

Double-click a record Name value to connect to start the default type session, see the

Program Options

window General Tab .

Note: The session will start only if NetOp Host on the selected computer responds to connecting by the selected communication profile by its computer name.

Right-click the Name value of one or multiple selected records to show this context menu:

This menu matches the NetOp Network Tab context menu.

3.4.4.2.6 Connect by a Name and/or Address

To connect to a Host by a Host name and/or address, identify whether you can connect directly, through a

Guest network NetOp Gateway or through a Host network NetOp Gateway.

To connect directly:

1. Select in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section a

Communication Profile

that matches a

Communication Profile

that is enabled on the Host.

Note: If the

Networking

Communication Devices

of the

Communication Profiles

enabled on the Host are unavailable or cannot be enabled on the Guest, see

Unavailable Networking Communication Devices .

2. Specify in the

Host Section

a name enabled on the Host, the Host computer modem telephone number or

Host computer IP address as required by the Communication Device type, see

Networking

,

Point-to-Point or Gateway

,

Network Point-to-Point

or

Infrared

.

3. To connect:

·

Click the

Connect

button to connect to start the default type session, see the

Program Options

window

General Tab , or

·

Click a

Toolbar Session Buttons button or select a

Connection Menu

Session Commands command to

74

NetOp Guest

connect to start a session, or

· Click a

Toolbar

Action Buttons button or select a

Connection Menu

Action Commands

command to connect to execute an action.

To connect through a Guest network NetOp Gateway:

1. Select in the

Communication Profile Section a

Communication Profile that uses the

Gateway

Communication Device to show the

Host Section explained in the Point-to-Point or Gateway topic.

2. Specify in the

Host Section

what is required to connect to the Host and connect as explained above.

To connect through a Host network NetOp Gateway:

1. Select in the

Communication Profile Section a

Communication Profile that will connect to the Host network

NetOp Gateway.

2. Specify in the

Host Section

Phone number or IP address drop-down box field the Host network NetOp

Gateway computer modem telephone number or IP address as required and in the Name drop-down box field the Host name and connect as explained above.

If connection fails, see Connect Problems

.

Note: If the Host is connected to by a Networking

Communication Device , you can

Browse for Hosts

to verify that the Host is available.

3.4.4.2.7 Unavailable Networking Communication Devices

If the

Networking

Communication Devices of the

Communication Profiles that are enabled on the connect to

NetOp module are unavailable or cannot be enabled on the connect from NetOp module, you can connect or

Browse for Hosts through a NetOp Gateway.

The

Terminal Server

Communication Device is available on a terminal server NetOp module but unavailable

on a network computer NetOp module. To connect between a network computer NetOp module and a terminal server NetOp module, a terminal server console NetOp Gateway can route the communication, see also the Administrator's Manual Advanced Tools chapter NetOp in Terminal Server Environments section.

On Guest and Host, enable

Networking

Communication Profiles

.

On NetOp Gateway, enable matching

Networking

Communication Profiles .

Connect by <Any initialized communication> that will use enabled Networking

Communication Profiles

and

request that any NetOp Gateway that receives the communication shall route it to other enabled Networking

Communication Profiles

.

3.4.4.2.8 Browse for Hosts

If you can connect to a Host directly or indirectly through a Host network NetOp Gateway by a

Networking

Communication Device , you can also browse for Hosts.

Note: When you connect by a

Networking

Communication Device using the Host name qualifier H:: (Host ID)

or U:: (User name), you actually always browse (broadcast a name) to request Hosts to respond by the

specified name. Host name qualifiers are explained in the

Program Options

window

Host Name Tab

topic.

To browse for all directly reachable Hosts, select in the Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section a

communication profile that uses a Networking

Communication Device , leave the

Host Section

empty and click the

Browse

button to show records of responding Hosts on the NetOp Network Tab .

Specify in the

Host Section any number of name first characters to limit the browse response to names with

these first characters.

To browse indirectly through a Host network NetOp Gateway, see

Gateway Connection

. This will also show records of responding Hosts on the

NetOp Network Tab .

If you use the LDAP:: Host name qualifier, a browse for Hosts will search directory services specified on the

Program Options

window

Directory Services Tab for users to show matching user name attributes and user

address attributes (typically IP addresses) on the NetOp Network Tab

. The Guest will browse by the received user address attributes to indicate which Hosts are available.

75

NetOp Guest

Specify in the

Host Section a user name mask (a user name with wildcard characters like * designating any

characters) to limit the directory services search to matching users.

From the NetOp Network Tab , you can connect to responding Hosts by record selection.

3.4.4.3 Connections Tab

This Tab Panel tab will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab

:

It will show records of connected Hosts as icons or table records according to the Toolbar

or

View Menu

selection.

Details

will show Host records in a table with these column contents:

·

Sessions: Icons of running sessions.

· Name: Host

Networking

communication name, if applicable.

· Phone Number: Host or Host network NetOp Gateway

Point-to-Point or Gateway communication

telephone number or IP address or

Network Point-to-Point communication IP address, if applicable.

· Communication Profile: Guest communication profile name.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Right-click a record to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

The first section contains

Session Commands .

The second section contains

Action Commands

.

Disconnect: See

Other Commands .

76

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.4 History Tab

This Tab Panel tab will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab

:

It stores records of historical Host connections.

It contains an optional left Tree Pane and a right

Records Pane

.

The

Tree Pane will show the history directory structure. To hide/show the Tree Pane , click the

Toolbar

Tree

Window

button or select the

View Menu Tree Window

command (default: shown).

The

Records Pane will show the

History Records

in the history directory selected in the

Tree Pane .

3.4.4.4.1 Tree Pane

This is the

History Tab tree pane:

It will initially contain only a History folder that will be the root of the History directory structure.

Right-click in the pane to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control.

From this menu, you can manage your History directories. You can also manage directory folders by drag and drop.

Commands match Edit Menu commands.

77

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.4.2 Records Pane

This is the

History Tab records pane:

It will show the

History Records

in the selected Tree Pane folder as icons or table records according to the

Toolbar

or

View Menu selection.

Details

will show records in a table with these column contents:

· Description: Communication device type icon (

Networking , Point-to-Point

,

Gateway ,

Network Point-to-Point

or

Infrared

) and record identifying description.

· Created: Date and time of last connection by this record.

· Name: Host

Networking

name, if applicable.

·

Phone Number: Host or Host network NetOp Gateway

Point-to-Point or Gateway telephone number or IP

address or Network Point-to-Point IP address, if applicable.

·

Communication Profile: Guest

Communication Profile name.

·

Comment: Optional user editable comment. A record generated by Browse for Hosts

will show the Host user name, if enabled, and (Gateway) if the Host is a NetOp Gateway.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

To start a session with selected record Hosts, click a

Session Buttons button or select a

Session Commands

command.

To execute an action on selected record Host computers, click an Action Buttons

button or select an

Action

Commands

command.

Double-click a record to start the default type session with the record Host, see the

Program Options

window

General Tab

.

Right-click a record or multiple selected records to show this context menu:

78

NetOp Guest

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

The first section contains

Session Commands .

The second section contains

Action Commands

.

Disconnect: See

Other Commands .

Remaining commands match Edit Menu commands.

3.4.4.4.3 History Records

A history record will automatically be created in the

History Tab

History root folder when disconnecting from a

Host. An older history record in the folder with the same Description will be overwritten.

You can copy and move history records between the History root folder and user-created folders, also by drag and drop. Copy your favorite history records to the

Phonebook Tab to serve as

Phonebook Records .

History records will be saved as files with the extension dwc like

Phonebook Records

in the History directory that resides in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>

\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest\History.

3.4.4.5 Help Request Tab

This Tab Panel tab will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab

:

Note: To service help requests, enable

Communication Profiles at Guest loading and enable help services,

see the

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab .

If help requests are pending, this icon will be shown in the

Status Bar and in the notification area in the lower

79

NetOp Guest

right corner of the screen:

Double-click the notification area button to show the Help Request tab.

The Help Request tab pane will show records of pending help requests as icons or table records according to the

Toolbar or

View Menu

selection.

Details

will show help request records in a table with these column contents:

· Host ID: Help request icon and Host identification.

· Time: Time of the help request.

·

Help Service: Name of the help service to which the help request was sent, see the

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab.

·

Problem Description: Host specified problem description.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

To respond to a help request, typically double-click the record to start the default type session, see the

Program Options

window

General Tab.

Right-click a record to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

The first section contains

Session Commands .

Copy to clipboard expands into table column name and All commands. Select a table column name command to copy the selected table column record value to the clipboard. Select All to copy all record values to the clipboard to typically paste them into a help request management system table.

Note: The

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab includes

Advanced Help Service

options.

Remaining commands match Edit Menu commands.

Note: Delete will remove the selected record but not cancel the pending help request.

80

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.6 Recordings Tab

This Tab Panel tab will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab

:

It provides access to Remote Control

session recordings.

Note: To record

Remote Control

sessions, enable recording generally on the

Program Options

window

Recordings Tab or for each connection or Host record on the

Connection Properties

window Record Tab .

The Recordings tab contains an optional left

Tree Pane

and a right

Records Pane .

The

Tree Pane will show the recordings directory structure. To hide/show the Tree Pane

, click the

Toolbar

Tree Window

button or select the

View Menu

Tree Window

command (default: shown).

The

Records Pane will show the

Recording Records in the recordings directory selected in the

Tree Pane .

3.4.4.6.1 Tree Pane

This is the

Recordings Tab tree pane:

It will initially contain only a Recordings root folder.

Right-click in the pane to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

From this menu, you can manage your Recordings directories. You can also manage directory folders by drag and drop.

Commands match Edit Menu commands.

81

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.6.2 Records Pane

This is the

Recordings Tab records pane:

It will show the

Recording Records in the selected

Tree Pane folder as icons or table records according to

the

Toolbar or

View Menu

selection.

Details

will show records in a table with these column contents:

·

Recorded: Recording icon and recording date and time.

· Duration: Duration of recording.

· Guest ID: Remote controlling Guest name.

·

Host ID: Remote controlled Host name.

· Description: Remote controlled Host record Description column value.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Double-click a record to play back the

Remote Control session recording in this window:

This window will initially have the same size as the

Remote Control Display from which the session was

recorded.

The title bar will show the remote controlled Host record Description column value. Title bar window controls

are explained in Window Control

. The window control menu includes playback control commands matching

82

NetOp Guest

the playback control buttons explained below.

The toolbar contains these playback control buttons:

Stop: Click this button to close the window.

Pause: Click this button to make it appear pressed in to pause playback. Click this button appearing pressed in to release it to resume playback.

Play: Click this button to make it appear pressed in to start playback or resume playback when paused. When playback has ended, this button is disabled.

Back: Click this button to return to the beginning of the recording showing a black show area. The

Pause button will appear pressed in and the Play button will be enabled.

Playback Speed: By default, the spin box field will show x1 indicating true speed. Click the up/ down buttons to change the playback speed by a factor x1 to x20 as shown in the spin box field.

The status bar contains a colored blocks progress indicator and a playback time counter.

Right-click a record or multiple selected records to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Playback Recording: Select this command or double-click the record to play back the last clicked recording

record in the Recording Playback window.

Remaining commands match Edit Menu commands.

3.4.4.6.3 Recording Records

If

Remote Control session recording is enabled, each Remote Control

session will create a recording record in the

Recordings Tab

Recordings root folder.

You can copy and move recording records between the Recordings root folder and user-created folders, also by drag and drop.

Recording records are saved as <Date><Time>-<Guest name>-<Host name>.dwr files in the record directory that resides in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User

name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest\record. You can play back recording files only from NetOp Guest.

83

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.7 Script Tab

This Tab Panel tab will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab

:

It provides access to NetOp scripts and the

Script

graphical NetOp Script editor window.

Note:

NetOp Scripts are user-specified command structures that can execute scheduled NetOp actions,

typically file transfers.

The Script tab contains an optional left

Tree Pane and a right

Records Pane .

The

Tree Pane will show the script directory structure. To hide/show the Tree Pane , click the

Toolbar

Tree

Window

button or select the View Menu

Tree Window

command (default: shown).

The

Records Pane will show the Script Records in the script directory selected in the

Tree Pane .

3.4.4.7.1 Tree Pane

This is the

Script Tab

tree pane:

It will initially contain only a Script root folder.

Right-click in the pane to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

From this menu, you can manage your Script directories. You can also manage directory folders by drag and drop.

Commands match Edit Menu commands.

84

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.7.2 Records Pane

This is the

Script Tab

records pane:

It will show the

Script Records in the selected

Tree Pane folder as icons or table records according to the

Toolbar

or

View Menu selection.

Details

will show records in a table with these column contents:

·

Name: Script icon and script file name.

· Status: Status information, e.g. Edit if the script is being edited or Running if the script is running.

·

Size: Script file size in bytes.

· Comment: An optional comment specified in the

Script

window.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Double-click a record to run the record script, see

Test a NetOp Script .

Right-click one or multiple selected records to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Edit: Select this command to open the last selected record script in the

Script

window.

Run/Stop: Select this command to run/stop the last selected record script, see

Test a NetOp Script

.

Remaining commands match Edit Menu commands.

3.4.4.7.3 Script Records

By default, records of new NetOp Scripts

will be placed in the Script Tab Script root folder. You can copy and

move script records between the Script root folder and user-created folders, also by drag and drop.

Script records are typically saved as files with the extension dws in the script directory that resides in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest\script. You can open a

NetOp Script file in a text editor to edit it. To avoid syntax errors, we recommend that you edit NetOp Scripts in the

Script

window.

85

NetOp Guest

3.4.4.8 Inventory Tab

This Tab Panel tab will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab

:

It will show stored Host computer inventories.

It contains a left

Contents Pane and a right

Details Pane .

The

Contents Pane

will show the inventory directory structure. Each inventory directory folder can contain

Host computer inventories that branch out into inventory elements.

The

Details Pane will show details of the inventory directory, Host computer inventory or inventory element

selected in the Contents Pane .

3.4.4.8.1 Contents Pane

This is the

Inventory Tab

contents pane:

It will initially contain only an Inventory root folder.

Right-click a directory folder or a Host computer inventory to show this context menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

From this menu, you can manage your Inventory directories. You can also manage directory folders by drag and drop.

Commands match Edit Menu commands

.

86

NetOp Guest

Select an inventory directory to show summary details of Host computer inventories in it in the

Details Pane .

Select a Host computer inventory to show summary details of it in the

Details Pane

.

Select a Host computer inventory element to show details of it in the Details Pane .

3.4.4.8.2 Details Pane

This is the

Inventory Tab

details pane:

It will show details of the element selected in the Contents Pane .

If an inventory directory is selected, it will show the directory Host computer inventories as records in a table with inventory details specified on the

Program Options

window

Inventory Tab in columns.

If a Host computer inventory or an inventory element is selected, it will show inventory element details as records in a table with the columns Item and Value.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Right-click a Host computer inventory record to show this context command:

Select this command to delete the Host computer inventory. You cannot delete details of a Host computer inventory.

3.4.4.8.3 Host Computer Inventories

Get Host computer inventories from the

Toolbar

Get Inventory

button or the Connection Menu

Get Inventory

command.

New Host computer inventories will be placed in the

Inventory Tab Inventory root folder. A new inventory will

overwrite an older inventory identified by the same Host name. You can copy and move inventories between the Inventory root folder and user-created folders, also by drag and drop.

Host computer inventories will be saved as files with the extension xml in the inventor directory that resides in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest\inventor. You can open xml files in any text editor.

To process Host computer inventory information, specify in the

Program Options

window

Inventory Tab

Advanced Inventory Options

window an inventory processing program.

3.4.5 Status Bar

The

NetOp Guest Window

status bar will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Layout

Tab :

It can show these icons at its right end:

Telephone icon: This icon will be shown if a Communication Profile that uses a

Point-to-Point or Network

87

NetOp Guest

Point-to-Point

Communication Device

( ISDN (CAPI) ,

Serial

,

Windows Modem ,

TCP/IP (TCP) ,

TCP/IP (TCP

IPv6) or

Infrared (IrDA)

) is enabled at Guest loading.

Yellow pages icon: This icon will be shown if when a

Communication Profile

that uses the

TCP/IP

Communication Device is enabled in the

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

window the

Use NetOp Name

Server

box is checked. These symbols can be shown on the icon:

· Nothing: Specified NetOp Name Servers are available.

· Red X: None of the specified NetOp Name Servers is available.

·

Red exclamation mark: One of two specified NetOp Name Servers is available.

Life belt icon: This icon will be shown if a help request is pending, see

Help Request Tab .

When the mouse pointer is over a menu command or

Toolbar button, the status bar will be cleared and a hint

will be shown in it unless disabled on the

Program Options

window

Layout Tab .

3.5 Guest Tools

The

NetOp Guest Window

Tools Menu

contains these commands:

They are explained in these sections:

·

Program Options

·

File Manager Options

·

Log Setup

·

Maintenance Password

·

Communication Profiles

·

Modem Database

·

Check for New Updates

·

Publish New Updates

·

Debug Trace

·

Run Setup Wizard

·

Copy Guest to Removable Media

Guest tool settings will be written to

NetOp Configuration Files

that will typically reside in the directory C:

\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest.

88

3.5.1 Program Options

Select the

Tools Menu Program Options command to show this window:

NetOp Guest

It has these tabs:

·

Layout Tab

·

General Tab

·

Cache Tab

·

Login Tab

·

Host Name Tab

·

Directory Services Tab

·

Remote Control Tab

·

Clipboard Tab

·

Monitor Tab

89

NetOp Guest

·

Audio-Video Chat Tab

·

Remote Printing Tab

·

Recordings Tab

·

Sounds Tab

·

Help Request Tab

·

Run Tab

·

Encryption Tab

·

Inventory Tab

·

Web Update Tab

Note: Some Program Options changes require NetOp Guest to be reloaded to become applied.

3.5.1.1 Layout Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Layout tab:

90

NetOp Guest

It specifies

NetOp Guest Window layout options.

Enable

þ Tool bar: Uncheck this box to remove the

Toolbar (default: checked).

þ Status line: Uncheck this box to remove the

Status Bar (default: checked).

þ Menu hints: Uncheck this box to disable the show of menu command and

Toolbar button hints in the

Status Bar (default: checked).

þ Add Guest icon to tray: Uncheck this box to show no NetOp Guest button in the notification area in the lower right screen corner when NetOp Guest is loaded (default: checked).

þ Hide Guest from taskbar when minimized: This option will be available only if Add Guest icon to tray is checked. Uncheck this box to show the minimized NetOp Guest as a button in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen (default: checked). If checked, the minimized NetOp Guest will be shown only as a NetOp

Guest button in the notification area in the lower right corner of the screen.

¨ Save Guest minimize state on exit: Check this box to load NetOp Guest minimized if minimized when last unloaded (default: unchecked).

¨ Stealth mode (hide Guest when started): Check this box to load NetOp Guest hidden to the computer user

(default: unchecked).

To unhide NetOp Guest when loaded in stealth mode, execute showgst.exe that resides in the directory in which NetOp Guest is installed.

Tab layout

The scrolling pane contains a check boxed list of available

Tab Panel tab names:

þ Phonebook

þ Quick Connect

þ Connections

þ History

þ Help Request

þ Recordings

þ Script

þ Inventory

Uncheck a box to remove this tab from the

Tab Panel

(default: all checked).

Up/Down: The scrolling pane top-to-bottom tab name order controls the Tab Panel

left-to-right tab order.

Select a scrolling pane tab name and click one of these buttons to move it.

Note: The tab order above is the initial tab order. The Quick Connect Tab

will be shown in front.

91

3.5.1.2 General Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window General tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies general connect options.

Host session default mode

Select one of these sessions to start it when you connect to a Host by clicking the Quick Connect Tab

Connect

button or by double-clicking a

Tab Panel tab Host record:

¤ Remote control (default selection)

¡ File transfer

¡ Chat

¡ Audio-video chat

¡ Remote management

Inactivity

Inactivity timeout: [] min. (0 = Unlimited): Specify in this field a number to disconnect if there has been no

92

NetOp Guest

Guest user keyboard or mouse activity within the specified number of minutes (default: 0, range 0-999).

Keep Alive

¨ Send keep alive message: Check this box to send a data packet at intervals while connected to alert the

Guest if the connection has been lost (default: unchecked).

Note: To maintain an

ISDN (CAPI)

connection during short periods of inactivity, do not check this box but

select the ISDN (CAPI) Communication Profile Edit

Short-hold mode option.

Confirm when

¨ Exiting Guest while connected: Check this box to show this warning if you attempt to unload the Guest while being connected to a Host (default: unchecked):

Yes: Click this button to unload the Guest.

No: Click this button to cancel the unload attempt.

Connection

Connection attempts: [] (0: Indefinite): Specify in the field a number in the range 1-999 to automatically make this number of connection attempts to connect to a Host (default: 1).

Auto reconnect: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected reconnect option if a connection is lost. The drop-down box list contains these options:

·

Never: Never reconnect (default selection).

· Abnormal disconnect only: Reconnect only if the connection was lost by an abnormal event.

·

Host disconnect only: Reconnect only if the Host disconnected.

· Always: Always reconnect.

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

93

3.5.1.3 Cache Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Cache tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies

Remote Control

screen image disk cache options.

When the Guest Remote Controls a Host in

Command Mode

, the Guest will store the Host screen image in disk cache memory to transfer only image changes to speed up Host screen image update and save transmission bandwidth.

Select one of these options:

¤ Use separate cache file for each Host: Reserve a disk cache section for each connected and disconnected Host (default selection). If you connect to many different Hosts, a large total disk cache size will be required to achieve high update and reconnect speed.

¡ Use shared cache file for all Hosts: Share the available disk cache among connected and disconnected

Hosts. Total disk cache size demand will typically be lower.

¡ Don’t save cache between sessions: Share the available disk cache only among connected Hosts. Total disk cache demand will be lowest, but reconnects will be slower.

94

NetOp Guest

Limit total disk cache size to: [] KB. (200 - 64000): Specify in the field a number in the range, typically larger than default if regularly running

Command Mode

Remote Control

sessions with many different Hosts

(default: 10000).

3.5.1.4 Login Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Login tab:

It specifies Guest logon and name options.

Guest ID []: The contents of this field specify the name by which the Guest will identify itself when communicating (default: computer name). You can edit the field content. If the field is empty, the Guest will identify itself by its computer address, typically IP address or network card MAC address.

Note: If the Guest runs on a network computer, we recommend naming it by its computer name. If the Guest runs on a terminal server client, we recommend naming it by its user logon name, see the Administrator’s

Manual Advanced Tools chapter NetOp Naming in a TSE section.

Authentication

¨ Cache login passwords: Check this box to store the most recently used logon credentials in cache memory to apply them when connecting (default: unchecked). Cached logon credentials will be lost when

95

NetOp Guest

the Guest is unloaded.

Access Server 6.x/5.x

¨ Use Access Server on Guest side: Check this box to enable Guest side authentication with Hosts that are

Guest side authentication enabled on an older version NetOp Access Server (default: unchecked).

Note: NetOp Security Server (version 7+ only) does not support Guest side authentication.

¨ Ignore if access to Host cannot be authenticated: Check this box to ignore Guest side authentication with Hosts that are not Guest side authentication enabled on a NetOp Access Server (default: unchecked).

3.5.1.5 Host Name Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Host Name tab:

It specifies Host name and NetOp Name Server name space ID options.

Default Host name qualifier

NetOp will interpret a name specified in the

Quick Connect Tab

Host Section Name drop-down box field as a

certain type of name according to this default Host name qualifier or a prefixed Host name qualifier (shown in

96

NetOp Guest

parentheses below). Select one of these options:

¤ Host ID (H::): Will interpret a Host name without a prefix as a Host ID (default selection).

¡ User name (U::): Will interpret a Host name without a prefix as a user name.

¡ DNS name (DNS::): Will interpret a Host name without a prefix as a Domain Name Server name.

¡ LDAP name (LDAP::): Will interpret a Host name without a prefix as a directory services user attribute value, see

Directory Services Tab .

If you specify a Host name qualifier that does not exist, this window will be shown:

Click Help to open the NetOp Guest Help system on the

Default Host Name Qualifier

explanation.

Duplicate names

If connecting by a

Networking

Communication Device

, multiple Hosts may respond by the same name, for instance if the same user is logged on to multiple computers. By default, the Guest will connect to the first responding Host.

¨ Check for duplicate names before connecting: Check this box to wait a few seconds for Host responses and show this window if multiple Hosts have responded (default: unchecked):

The pane will show responding Hosts as records in a table with these column contents:

·

Host ID: Availability icon and Host specified Host ID.

97

NetOp Guest

·

User Name: Host computer Windows or network logon user name, if enabled.

· Communication Profile: Guest

Communication Profile name.

· Information: The record of a responding NetOp Gateway will show (Gateway).

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Double-click a record or select a record and click OK to connect to the record Host.

NetOp Name Server

To connect by

Name Resolution

using NetOp Name Server, use a

Communication Profile that uses the

TCP/

IP

Communication Device

and in its

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

window check the

Use NetOp Name

Server

box and specify the resolving NetOp Name Server addresses. You must also specify the same Name

Space ID as the NetOp modules that you want to connect to, see the Administrator's Manual NetOp Name

Management chapter.

Name Space ID: []: Specify in this field the Name Space ID specified by the NetOp modules that you want to connect to using NetOp Name Server (default: PUBLIC).

98

3.5.1.6 Directory Services Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Directory Services tab:

NetOp Guest

It can specify directory services to enable the Guest to connect and

Browse for Hosts using the LDAP::

Host name qualifier .

General

Directory Server: []: Specify in this field the directory server IP address or DNS name (default: none).

Port: []: Specify in this field the port through which to connect to the directory server (default: 389, the

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) port).

¨ Use secure connection: Check this box to connect to the directory server by a secure connection. The

LDAP secure connection port number is 636.

Base DN: []: Specify in this field the directory services distinguished name from which a search shall start

(default: none).

Credentials Tab

This tab can specify the credentials by which the Guest will log on to the directory server. The credentials

99

NetOp Guest

determine the user rights by which directory services information will be available.

þ Anonymous bind: Leave this box checked to search the directory service with anonymous user rights

(default: checked). Uncheck the box to enable the fields below.

User DN: []: Specify in this field a directory service user distinguished name to search the directory service with the rights of this user.

Password: []: Specify in this field the matching password.

Confirm password: []: Re-specify in this field the password for confirmation.

Settings Tab

Specify on this tab the settings for searching directory services for user attribute values to return matching name and address attribute values. Initially, the fields are empty.

For guidance on filling in the fields, click Default to show this window:

The field of the drop-down box will show the selected directory service name (default: Microsoft Active

Directory). The drop-down box list will contain names of available directory services. Select a directory service name in the list to show it in the field.

Click OK to specify the selected directory service available default settings in the matching Settings tab fields.

User search filter: []: Specify or edit the user search filter designation.

User attribute: []: Specify or edit the user attribute designation.

Name attribute: []: Specify or edit the name attribute designation.

Address attribute: []: Specify or edit the address attribute designation.

Search name prefix: []: Specify or edit any prefix (e.g. cn=) that shall be added before search values.

100

3.5.1.7 Remote Control Tab

This is the Guest Program Options window Remote Control tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies general Remote Control

session options.

Note: You can specify individual

Remote Control

session options for each Tab Panel Host record,

connection from the

Quick Connect Tab or running

Remote Control session in the

Connection Properties

window.

Enable

þ Toolbar: Uncheck this box to hide the Remote Control window toolbar (default: checked).

þ Toolbox in full screen: Uncheck this box to hide the

Remote Control full screen display toolbox (default:

checked).

þ Full screen toolbox roll-up: Uncheck this box to not reduce the full screen show toolbox to its title bar when not in use (default: checked).

þ Status line: Uncheck this box to hide the

Remote Control window status bar (default: checked).

Hot keys assignment

101

NetOp Guest

You can assign hot keys (keystroke combinations) to specified actions. By default, CTRL+Z is assigned to

Zoom in and out (switch between

Remote Control window and full screen). Assign desired hot keys by

checking boxes and specifying a character in the last field.

Remote control window

þ Host window auto scroll: Uncheck this box to disable automatic Host screen image scroll when the mouse pointer approaches

Remote Control window borders (default: checked).

¨ Show full screen as topmost window: Check to show the

Remote Control full screen display in front of any

other window (default: unchecked).

¨ Show full screen on all monitors: Check to show the

Remote Control full screen display on all available

monitors (default: unchecked).

þ Auto take control: Uncheck this box to disable acquiring

Multi Guest Session

keyboard and mouse control by a keystroke or mouse click, see

Multi Guest Session Buttons (default: checked).

Switch to window mode password: []: Specify in this field a password to request this password to switch from full screen to window (default: none). The field will show password characters as dots or asterisks.

Disconnect password: []: Specify in this field a password to request this password to disconnect (default: none). The field will show password characters as dots or asterisks.

102

3.5.1.8 Clipboard Tab

This is the Guest Program Options window Clipboard tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies

Remote Control

clipboard transfer options.

Automatic clipboard transfer

þ Automatically transfer clipboards below [] kb: Leave checked to enable contents placed on the NetOp

Guest computer or NetOp Host computer clipboard during a

Remote Control session to automatically

become the clipboard contents of both computers if smaller than the number of kilobytes specified in the field. Uncheck to disable.

¨ Show progress dialog during transfer: Check to show a small window with a progress bar while clipboard contents are being transferred from one computer to the other.

103

3.5.1.9 Monitor Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Monitor tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies

Monitor options.

Monitor interval: [] s: Specify in this field a number in the range 1 - 999 to switch to the next Host after monitoring a Host for this number of seconds (default: 15).

¨ Start Monitor in full screen: Check this box to initially show monitored Host screen images in full screen mode (default: unchecked). If unchecked, Host screen images will initially be shown in window mode.

104

3.5.1.10 Audio-Video Chat Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Audio-Video Chat tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies audio and video chat options.

Audio-video chat settings

þ Start audio chat when conference is started: Uncheck this box to disable sound transfer at session start

(default: checked). If checked, sound transfer will be enabled at session start.

¨ Start video when conference is started: Check this box to enable image transfer at session start (default: unchecked). If unchecked, image transfer will be disabled at session start.

Audio Chat

General

þ Enable full-duplex audio: Uncheck this box to disable sound transfer in both directions at the same time

(default: checked).

Note: Some computer sound systems do not support full-duplex audio.

105

NetOp Guest

Microphone sensitivity

Silence level: Drag this slide to specify the microphone sound input level below which no sound data shall be transferred (default: second tick from left).

Line hold: Drag this slide to specify the time after the microphone sound input level has dropped below the Silence level in which sound data shall be transferred (default: seventh tick from left).

Note: Try out different Silence level and Line hold settings to optimize sound transfer.

Check sound system: Click this button to check the computer sound system to show a result message.

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

Playback

Preferred device: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the preferred audio playback device

(default: <Use any available device>). The drop-down box list will contain the names of available playback devices. Select a name in the list to show it in the field.

Record

Preferred device: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the preferred audio recording device

(default: <Use any available device>). The drop-down box list will contain the names of available recording devices. Select a name in the list to show it in the field.

Note: If multiple sound devices are connected to the computer, <Use any available device> may select a connected device instead of the computer sound system. In that case, select the computer sound system.

Audio Compression

Try audio compression codecs in the following order: []: This pane will contain a Windows prioritized list of

Guest computer available mono audio compression codecs.

106

NetOp Guest

Up/Down: Select a codec and click a button to move it up or down in the prioritized list.

Use defaults: Click this button to restore the default codec priority.

Note: NetOp will use the highest prioritized Guest computer codec that is also available on the Host computer.

Video

Capture size []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected video capture frame width times height in pixels (default: 160 x 120). The drop-down box list will contain available video capture frame sizes. Select a video capture frame size in the list to show it in the field.

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

Select driver to use: []: If a video camera has been installed on the computer, the field of this drop-down box will show its driver name. The drop-down box list will contain the names of installed video drivers.

Select a driver name in the list to show it in the field.

If a camera that uses the driver whose name is shown in the Select driver to use drop-down box field is enabled, the image frame will show its captured image.

Format: Click this button to show the Windows Video Format window to format the video capture image.

Properties: Click this button to show the Windows Video Source window to specify video source properties.

¨ Disable compression: Check this box to disable video data compression (default: unchecked).

107

3.5.1.11 Remote Printing Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Remote Printing tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies remote NetOp printers and incoming print job redirection.

Remote NetOp printers

The pane will show the names of NetOp printers in the Guest computer Windows Printers folder (initially none).

You can add a NetOp printer on the Guest computer to enable sending a Guest computer print job to a

Host computer printing device (remote printer).

Note: You can also add a NetOp printer on a Host computer to enable sending a Host computer print job to a Guest computer printing device.

Add printer...: Click this button to show this window:

108

NetOp Guest

Follow these guidelines that will remain on the screen while you add a NetOp printer. Click Ready to start adding a NetOp printer.

Note: The NetOp printer and the selected remote printing device driver must be installed on the computer that sends the print job. Special instructions for remote printing from DOS applications are available in the

NetOp KnowledgeBase .

Remove printer: Select a NetOp printer in the pane and click this button to remove it.

If you are connected to multiple Hosts while sending a print job to a NetOp printer, this window will be shown:

Select in the pane the Host to which you want to send the print job.

Redirect print to

You can redirect a print job sent from the Host computer to the Guest computer to any printer specified on the Guest computer. Select one of these options:

¤ Default printer: Redirect the print job to the default Guest computer printer (default selection).

¡ Prompt with a list of available printers: Select this option and click Browse to show this window:

109

NetOp Guest

The pane will show the names of Guest computer printers. Select a name and click OK to specify the printer name in the field to redirect incoming NetOp print jobs to this printer.

110

3.5.1.12 Recording Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Recording tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies

Remote Control

session recording options.

Options

¨ Use compatible mode:

Remote Control session recording was improved in NetOp Remote Control version

8. Older Guest versions cannot play back version 8+ recordings. Check this box to make older version compatible recordings (default: unchecked).

¨ Enforce recording: Check this box to record all

Remote Control sessions even if the

Connection Properties

window Record Tab

Record remote control session box is unchecked (default: unchecked).

¨ Disconnect if recording fails: Check this box to disconnect if recording a

Remote Control

session fails

(default: unchecked).

Recording

Use the following identity: A Recordings Tab record and recording file name will identify the

Remote Control

session Guest. Select one of these options:

111

NetOp Guest

¤ Guest ID: Identify by the Guest ID, see the

Program Options

window

Login Tab

(default selection).

¡ Guest user: Identify by the Guest computer Windows or network logon user name.

3.5.1.13 Sounds Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Sounds tab:

It specifies sounds played upon selected events.

The pane contains these check boxed events:

þ Incoming help request: A help request has arrived (default: checked).

¨ Guest start: The Guest has loaded (default: unchecked).

¨ Guest stop: The Guest has unloaded (default: unchecked).

¨ Session with Host: A Host session has started (default: unchecked).

¨ Disconnect from Host: A Host has been disconnected (default: unchecked).

þ Communication error: There has been a communication error (default: checked).

112

NetOp Guest

þ Keyboard and mouse assigned or revoked: In a

Remote Control

session, the Guest has got or lost keyboard and mouse control (default: checked).

Check a box to play a sound upon the event. Uncheck to suppress playing a sound upon the event.

Select an event and click Select Sound to open a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Sound

Files. Open a sound file with the extension wav to replace the current sound by the sound of the opened sound file and mark the event with (*).

Select an event marked (*) and click Default Sound to reassign the default sound to the event and remove the (*) mark.

Select an event and click Play to play the sound assigned to the event.

3.5.1.14 Help Request Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Help Request tab:

It specifies help request options.

¨ Enable help request: Check this box to enable the Guest to receive help requests (default unchecked).

Note: NetOp on Demand Guest has in addition to the Help Request tab below a Service Tickets tab that

113

NetOp Guest

enables it to service help requests by a service ticket number.

Help Request Tab

þ Enable help services: Uncheck this box to disable the help services specified below (default: checked).

Help service 1-3: []: Specify in these fields the names of the help services that this Guest shall offer.

Note: NetOp Guest can receive NetOp Host help requests only if the Enable help request and Enable help

services boxes are checked, at least one Help service name is specified and Communication Profiles are

enabled at Guest loading. NetOp Host uses the term Help provider for a Help service name.

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

This window can specify actions that shall execute when a help request arrives.

Action: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected action. The drop-down box list contains these options:

· None: No action (default selection).

· Send message: Run a local program if specified and send a message to the Host. The fields below will become enabled.

· Run local program: Run a local program if specified. The fields below except Send message will become enabled.

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

Command line: [] [...]: Specify in this field the command line of a Guest computer program, typically a helpdesk program to register the help request. Click [...] to show a Windows Open window that specifies

Files of type: Programs to select a program file whose command will be shown in the field. You can add these arguments to the command:

· %H: Help request Host name.

·

%T: Help request time.

· %P: Help request problem description.

Note: NetOp does not undertake to supply or recommend helpdesk programs.

Timeout: [] s.: Specify in this field a number (default: 5, range 0-9999, 0 = no timeout) to time out (cancel if unsuccessful) the command specified above after the specified number of seconds.

114

NetOp Guest

Send message: [] [...]: Specify in this field the path and name of an rtf (Rich Text Format) file to send a

NetOp message with the rtf file content to the help requesting Host, see NetOp Message

. Click [...] to show a

Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: RTF to open a rtf file whose path and name will be shown in the field.

¨ Clear help request: Check this box to delete the

Help Request Tab record when the actions specified

above have executed successfully (default: unchecked).

Note: Deleting the

Help Request Tab record will not cancel the help request.

¨ Display a notification message when new help request arrives: Check this box to show this message when a help request arrives (default: unchecked):

This window will show the help request Host name, time and, if specified, problem description.

Yes: Click this button to show the

Help Request Tab

.

No: Click this button to close the window.

115

3.5.1.15 Run Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Run tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies programs to include them in the

Run Program

drop-down menu.

The pane will show specified programs (initially none) as records in a table with these column contents:

· Description: The

Run Program drop-down menu program description.

· Path: Program file path and name.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control.

Note: Table contents will be stored in the runprog.ndb

NetOp Configuration File that will typically reside in the

path C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control

\Guest.

Add…: Click this button to show this window:

116

NetOp Guest

File

Description: []: Specify in this field the description that shall identify the program in the

Run Program

drop-down menu.

File name: []: Specify in this field the program file path and name on the Host computer.

Command line switches: []: Specify in this field any switches that shall be applied to the program command.

Translate: Click this button to replace File name field path elements by available environment variables to facilitate identifying the path on Host computers with different directory names due to e.g. language.

Browse…: Click this button to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Programs to open a Guest computer program file to showits path and name in the File name field.

Note: The Open window will show Guest computer directories and program files. Select All files in the

Files of type drop-down box list to show all file types. You can also run other file types, e.g. text files. To run successfully on the Host computer, the file must be available on the Host computer and identifiable on the Host computer by the File name field specification.

Run

Select one of these options:

¤ Normal: Run the program in a normal size window (default selection).

¡ Maximized: Run the program in a maximized window.

¡ Minimized: Run the program minimized.

OK: Click this button to add the program record to the Run Tab pane.

Properties...: Select a record in the pane and click this button to show its properties in the

Run

window to edit

them.

Delete: Select a record in the pane and click this button to delete it.

117

3.5.1.16 Encryption Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Encryption tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies enabled encryption types.

The communication between NetOp modules is protected by encrypting transmitted data. One encryption type is used by version 6.5- NetOp Remote Control modules. A range of encryption types is available on version 7.0+ NetOp Remote Control modules. Communicating NetOp modules will automatically negotiate to

encrypt communication by an encryption type that is enabled on both modules, see the

Connection

Properties

window Compression/Encryption Tab . NetOp modules on which no common encryption type is

enabled cannot communicate.

The pane shows check boxed available encryption type icons and names. Leave a box checked to enable the encryption type (default: all checked): Uncheck to disable.

þ NetOp 6.x/5.x Compatible: NetOp Remote Control version 6.5- compatible encryption.

þ None: Does not encrypt data but ensures session uniqueness.

þ Data integrity: Verifies data integrity.

118

NetOp Guest

þ Keyboard: Encrypts and verifies keyboard, mouse, logon and password data.

þ Data integrity and Keyboard: Encrypts keyboard, mouse, logon and password data and verifies data integrity.

þ High: Encrypts and verifies integrity of all data at a high security level.

þ Very High: Encrypts and verifies integrity of all data at a very high security level.

Show Details: Select an encryption type and click this button to show encryption details.

3.5.1.17 Inventory Tab

This is the Guest Program Options window Inventory tab:

It specifies

Inventory Tab and advanced inventory options.

Summary view

The pane contains a check boxed list of available inventory details. Check/uncheck boxes to select the inventory details of the

Inventory Tab summary inventory view that will be shown in the

Details Pane when a

folder is selected in the

Contents Pane . The pane top-to-bottom order of checked inventory details will

determine the left-to-right order of Details Pane

columns.

119

Up/Down: Select an inventory detail and click a button to move it up or down in the pane.

Select All: Click this button to check all inventory details.

Deselect All: Click this button to uncheck all inventory details.

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

NetOp Guest

This window specifies inventory processing and custom inventory items.

Run program after inventory scan

You can specify an inventory processing program to automatically process each newly retrieved Host computer inventory. Select one of these options:

¤ Disable: Disable running the program specified below (default selection).

¡ Run for each Host: Run the program specified below when a Host computer inventory has been retrieved.

¡ Run after all scans have completed: Run the program file specified below when a batch of Host computer inventories has been retrieved.

File name: [][Browse...]: Specify in the field an inventory processing program file path and name including required command line switches. Click Browse to show a Windows Open window specifying Files of type:

Programs to open an inventory processing program file the path and name of which will be shown in the field.

Note: NetOp does not undertake to supply or recommend inventory processing programs.

Custom inventory items

The pane will show records of custom inventory items (initially none) in a table with these column contents:

· Name: Inventory item name.

·

Type: Inventory item type.

· Argument: Inventory item argument.

120

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Add...: Click this button to show this window:

NetOp Guest

This window specifies a custom inventory item.

Name: []: Specify in this field the custom inventory item name.

Item type: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected inventory item type. The drop-down box list contains inventory item types that determine the argument fields below:

·

Environment variable: Field: Environment variable (default selection).

· Registry key: Drop-down box: Registry key, field: Sub key.

·

Ini File: Field: File name, field: Section, field: Key.

· File Information: Field: File name.

· DLL: Field: DLL file name, field: DLL argument.

·

ASCII File Content (max 512 bytes): Field: File name.

Select an inventory item type in the list to show it in the field. Specify in the argument fields below the arguments that define the custom inventory item.

OK: Click this button to show the custom inventory item specification as a record in the Custom inventory

items table.

Edit: Select a record in the pane and click this button to show its specification in the Custom Inventory Item window to edit it.

Delete: Select a record in the pane and click this button to delete it.

Note: The pane contents will be stored in the

NetOp Configuration File InvCuItm.xml that will typically reside

in the path C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control

\Guest.

121

3.5.1.18 Smart Card Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Smart Card tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies the Smart Card reader whose reading will be applied to

Smart Card Authentication

.

Select Smart Card reader: []: The field of this drop-down will show the name of the selected Smart Card reader. The drop-down box list will contain Default and the names of connected Smart Card readers found by

Windows. Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

122

3.5.1.19 Web Update Tab

This is the Guest

Program Options

window Web Update tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies web update options to automatically update the NetOp Guest installation.

Update server: []: Specify in this field the web address of the server from which to download Guest update files (default: update.netop.com, the NetOp manufacturer web update server).

Note: To update many NetOp installations in an organization, we recommend to

Publish New Updates to an

internal web update server.

HTTP Proxy: []: Specifying a HTTP proxy is typically not required. Before specifying a HTTP proxy, click

Update now to test the web update connection. If this yields a message indicating connection to the update server, specify no HTTP proxy. If Update now yields no connection, click Detect to make NetOp attempt to detect the HTTP proxy server to show its name and port number in the HTTP Proxy field. Click Update now to test the connection. If unsuccessful, consult with your network/system administrator about what must be specified in the HTTP Proxy field (format: <Server name>:<Port number>).

Update now: Click this button to connect to the update server specified in the Update server field. A Web

Update message will notify you if connection to the update server failed, if no updates are available or if

123

NetOp Guest

updates are available and in the latter case ask you if you want to download and install updates.

Schedule...: Click this button to show this window:

This window specifies a schedule of checks for updates including download and installation of available update files.

Schedule

Select one of these options:

¤ Disabled: Disable automatic web update (default selection). The other sections in the window will be disabled.

¡ Automatic download, prompt before install: Automatically download any update files and prompt the user when downloaded.

¡ Automatic download and install: Automatically download and install any update files.

¨ Allow system restart after install: Check this box to automatically restart the computer after update installation, if required (default: unchecked). Leave unchecked to deny automatic restart to after installation show a message that restart is required to complete the installation.

Run

Select one of these options:

¤ At loading: Check for updates when the Guest is loaded (default selection). The Delay section in the image above will be shown.

Delay

[] minute delay: Specify in this field a number to delay the web update by the specified number of minutes

(default: 0, range 0-99).

¡ Daily: Check for updates on a daily basis. This section will be shown:

124

NetOp Guest

Start at

[] every [] day: In the first field, specify the time of the day (default: 12:00). In the second field, specify by a number an interval in days (default: 1, range 1-99).

¨ Randomize within the hour: Check this box to randomize the update time within the hour following the specified time to avoid crowding (default: unchecked).

Note: If the Guest is not loaded at the scheduled time, web update will run when the Guest is first loaded thereafter.

¡ Weekly: Check for updates on a weekly basis. This section will be shown:

Start at

[] every [] week: In the first field, specify the time of the day (default 12:00). In the second field, specify by a number an interval in weeks (default: 1, range 1-99).

¨ <Weekday>: Check boxes to run scheduled web updates on selected weekdays (default: Monday only checked).

¨ Randomize within the hour: Check this box to randomize the update time within the hour following the specified time to avoid crowding (default: unchecked).

Note: If the Guest is not loaded at the scheduled time, web update will run when the Guest is first loaded thereafter.

¡ Monthly: Check for updates on a monthly basis. This section will be shown:

Start at

[] on the [] day of the month: In the first field, specify the time of the day (default: 12:00). In the second field, specify by a number the day of the month (default: 1, range 1-28).

¨ Randomize within the hour: Check this box to randomize the update time within the hour following the specified time to avoid crowding (default: unchecked).

Note: If the Guest is not loaded at the scheduled time, web update will run when the Guest is first loaded thereafter.

Start date

Year: [] Month: [] Day: []: Select in the drop-down boxes the schedule start date (default: today).

125

NetOp Guest

3.5.2 File Manager Options

Select the

Tools Menu File Manager Options command to show the

NetOp File Manager - Options

window.

3.5.3 Log Setup

Select the

Tools Menu Log Setup command to show the

Log Setup

window.

3.5.4 Maintenance Password

Select the

Tools Menu Maintenance Password command to show this window:

A maintenance password will protect executing Tools Menu

setup commands to prevent unauthorized Guest setup changes.

Old Password: []: Specify in this field the current maintenance password (initially none, the field will be disabled). Keystrokes will show as dots or asterisks.

New Password: []: Specify in this field the new password (maximum 16 characters).

Confirm Password: []: Specify in this field the new password for confirmation.

Note: Disable maintenance password protection by leaving the New Password and Confirm Password fields blank.

If maintenance password protection is applied, selecting any

Tools Menu setup command will show this

window:

Enter password: []: Specify in this field the maintenance password.

If the specified password is wrong, an error message will be shown. There is no limit to the number of maintenance password attempts.

126

3.5.5 Communication Profiles

Select the

Tools Menu Communication Profiles command to show this window:

NetOp Guest

From this window, you can enable/disable, create, edit and delete communication profiles.

Note: A communication profile is a named configuration of a

Communication Device . You can create multiple

communication profiles with different configurations of each

Communication Device .

Communication Profile List []: This pane contains a check boxed list of Guest communication profiles. Check boxes to enable communication profiles at Guest loading (default: all unchecked).

Note: Enable communication profiles at Guest loading only to:

? Enable receiving help requests, see the

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab .

? Connect or Browse for Hosts

by

Unavailable Networking Communication Devices .

?

Browse for Hosts by multiple

Networking

Communication Devices .

? Request the Gateway Device Group List

by multiple

Networking

Communication Devices .

If none of these purposes are relevant to you, you should not enable communication profiles at Guest loading.

New: Click this button to show the

Communication Profile Edit window to create a communication profile.

Edit: Select in the pane a communication profile to highlight it and click this button to show the

Communication Profile Edit window to edit it.

Delete: Select in the pane a communication profile and click this button to delete it.

Note: To apply changes to enabled communication profiles, you must reload the Guest.

3.5.6 Modem Database

Select the

Tools Menu

Modem Database command to show the

Modem

window.

127

NetOp Guest

3.5.7 Check for New Updates

Select the

Tools Menu Check for New Updates command to connect to the web update server specified on

the

Program Options

window

Web Update Tab to check for new updates to the Guest installation.

3.5.8 Publish New Updates

Select the

Tools Menu Publish New Updates command to show a Windows Browse for Folder window.

Select a network folder to copy web update files for the installed version of NetOp Remote Control from the

URL specified on the

Program Options

window

Web Update Tab to the specified network folder to enable

network users to web update their NetOp installation from it.

3.5.9 Debug Trace

Normally, this command is not included in the

Tools Menu . Select the Help Menu

About command to show

the

About NetOp Remote Control Guest

window and press ALT+Z to include the Debug Trace command in

the

Tools Menu . Select Debug Trace to save a debug trace of recent NetOp communication. This window will

be shown:

It shows where the debug trace is saved.

Yes: Click this button to show the content of the debug trace. It is a text file that logs NetOp communication events without logging communicated data. Its interpretation requires NetOp expertise.

No: Click this button to close the window.

Note: A debug trace may be requested by NetOp supporters to troubleshoot communication problems.

3.5.10 Run Setup Wizard

Select the

Tools Menu

Run Setup Wizard command to run the Setup Wizard

.

3.5.11 Copy Guest to Removable Media

Connect a removable data storage device to your computer, e.g. by a USB socket, and select the

Tools

Menu

Copy Guest to Removable Media command to show a Windows Browse For Folder window. Select the removable data storage device to copy your Guest installation including your personal Guest settings to the removable data storage device.

This will enable you to take your NetOp Guest with you to plug the removable data storage device into any compatible Windows computer and run the Guest from there.

A complete NetOp Guest installation will use around 15 MB of data storage space plus the space used by personal Guest settings.

3.6 Guest Sessions

NetOp Guest on one computer can connect to NetOp Host on another computer to run one or multiple session types at the same time, see

Connect Guide

.

These session types are available:

·

Remote Control

·

Monitor

128

NetOp Guest

·

File Transfer

·

Chat

·

Audio-Video Chat

·

Remote Management

·

Demonstrate

:

NetOp Host can on its

Program Options

window General Tab

Allow multiple simultaneous Guest connections

·

Multiple Guests running a

Remote Control session with one Host will run a joint

Multi Guest Session .

· Multiple Guests running a

File Transfer session with one Host will run separate sessions.

· Multiple Guests running a

Chat session with one Host will run a joint

Multi Chat Session .

· Each Guest and each Host can run only one audio session including

Audio-Video Chat

at a time.

· Multiple Guests running a

Remote Management session with one Host will run separate sessions.

3.6.1 Remote Control

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can start a remote control session

with a Host to show the Host computer screen image on the Guest computer.

The Guest can connect to start a remote control session from the

Quick Connect Tab

, from a Phonebook

Tab or

History Tab record or in response to a help request from a

Help Request Tab record.

When connected, the Guest can start and end a remote control session from a

Phonebook Tab

,

Quick

Connect Tab ,

Connections Tab

or

History Tab record or from the

Remote Management

NetOp Sessions

Remote Control command.

Note: If the Host allows multiple simultaneous Guest connections, see

Guest Sessions , multiple remote

control session Guests will run a joint

Multi Guest Session .

An image of the Host computer screen will be shown on the Guest computer screen, typically in this window:

129

NetOp Guest

It contains these elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Toolbar or Toolbox

·

Remote Control Display

·

Status Bar

3.6.1.1 Title Bar

This is the

Remote Control window title bar:

It will show the name or address by which you connected to the Host.

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

The title bar menu contains additional commands:

130

NetOp Guest

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Send Keystrokes: This command expands into these commands:

Note: This command will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and mouse

, see

Allow Guest To

. Using these keystroke combinations from the keyboard can have undesired effects.

Send Ctrl+Esc: Select this command or click the Toolbar or Toolbox

Send Ctrl+Esc

button to send the keystroke combination CTRL+ESC to the Host to show the Start menu on a Windows Host computer or the Window List on an OS/2 Host computer.

Send Ctrl+Alt+Del: Select this command or click the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Send Ctrl+Alt+Del

button to send the keystroke combination CTRL+ALT+DEL to the Host to show the security dialog box on a Windows

2003/XP/2000 Host computer or restart an OS/2 Host computer.

Note: Send Ctrl+Alt+Del is disabled with a Windows ME, 98 or 95 Host computer. Select

Restart Host PC

to restart the Host computer.

Send Alt+Tab: Select this command to send the keystroke combination ALT+TAB to the Host to typically shift the active window clockwise on the Host computer screen.

Send Alt+Shift+Tab: Select this command to send the keystroke combination ALT+SHIFT+TAB to the

Host to typically shift the active window counterclockwise on the Host computer screen.

Send Print Screen: Select this command to send a PRINT SCREEN command to the Host to copy an image of the Host computer screen to the Host computer clipboard.

Send Alt+Print Screen: Select this command to send an ALT+PRINT SCREEN command to the Host to copy an image of the Host computer screen active window to the Host computer clipboard.

Clipboard: This command expands into these commands:

Send to Host: Select this command or click the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Send Clipboard

button to send the

Guest computer clipboard content to the Host computer clipboard.

Note: This command will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Transfer clipboard,

see Allow Guest To .

Retrieve from Host: Select this command or click the Toolbar or Toolbox

Retrieve Clipboard

button to retrieve the Host computer clipboard content to the Guest computer clipboard.

Note: This command will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Transfer clipboard,

see Allow Guest To .

131

NetOp Guest

Save Screen to Clipboard: Select this command or click the Toolbar or Toolbox

Save Screen to Clipboard

button to capture the Host computer screen image to the Guest computer clipboard.

Save Screen to File: Select this command or click the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Save Screen to File

button to capture the Host computer screen image and show a Windows Save As window that suggests the file

name <Host name>-<Date>-<Time>.bmp and the NetOp Configuration Files SnapShot directory. You can

change the file name and directory before saving.

Connection Properties: Select this command or click the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Connection Properties

button to

show the

Connection Properties

window with limited options.

Full Screen: Select this command or click the Toolbar or Toolbox

Full Screen

button to show the Host

computer screen image in full screen.

Note: Press the zoom hot key to toggle between window and full screen. The zoom hot key is CTRL+Z unless modified, see the

Program Options

window

Remote Control Tab

.

Marker Mode: Select this command to check mark it or click the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Marker Mode

button to

make it appear pressed in to start NetOp Marker Utility . Select the check marked command to uncheck it or click the pressed in button to release it to stop NetOp Marker Utility .

Note: This command will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and mouse

, see

Allow Guest To

.

Mouse marker: Select this command to check mark it or click the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Mouse marker

button to

show on the Host computer screen a large red mouse pointer arrow when you click in the Host screen image. Select the check marked command to uncheck it or click the pressed in button to release it to stop

Mouse marker

.

Note: This command will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and mouse

, see

Allow Guest To

.

Restart Host PC: Select this command or click the Toolbar or Toolbox

Restart Host PC

button to show a

confirmation window to confirm restarting the Host computer.

Note: This command will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Execute command

(Restart, ...), see

Allow Guest To .

Lock Keyboard and Mouse: Select this command to check mark it or click the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Lock

Keyboard and Mouse

button to make it appear pressed in to disable the Host computer keyboard and

mouse. Select the check marked command to uncheck it or click the pressed in button to release it to enable the Host computer keyboard and mouse.

Note: This command will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Lock keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

.

Blank Display: Select this command to check mark it or click the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Blank Display

button to make it appear pressed in to make the Host computer screen turn black to the Host computer user. Select the check marked command to uncheck it or click the pressed in button to release it to unblank the Host screen.

Note: This command will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Blank the screen, see

Allow Guest To

. While Blank Display works with most Host computers, the design of some display adapters prevents applying it.

Transfer Sound: Select this command to check mark it or click the Toolbar or Toolbox

Transfer Sound

button

to make it appear pressed in to transfer Host computer application sound. Select the check marked command to uncheck it or click the pressed in button to release it to not transfer sound.

Note: This command will be disabled if the Guest or the Host is engaged in another audio session or if Host

Guest Access Security does not allow Request audio chat and transfer sound, see

Allow Guest To .

Note: For Transfer Sound to work, these conditions must be met:

1. On the Host, the

Advanced Audio Settings window Record section Preferred device drop-down box must

select the computer sound system.

2. The Host computer sound system must support sound mix.

132

NetOp Guest

3. The Host must specify the sound mix recording mode name of the Host computer sound system, see

[AUDIO] Section .

Refresh: Select this command to redraw the Host screen image.

3.6.1.2 Toolbar or Toolbox

The

Remote Control window toolbar or full screen toolbox will be shown unless disabled from the

Program

Options

window

Remote Control Tab .

The window toolbar contains these buttons:

The full screen show toolbox contains the same buttons:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

The toolbox will roll up to show only its title bar unless disabled from the

Program Options

window

Remote

Control Tab .

The toolbar and toolbox contain these button groups:

·

Session Buttons

·

Action Buttons

·

Control Buttons

·

Multi Guest Session Buttons

·

Clipboard Buttons

·

Tool Buttons

3.6.1.2.1 Session Buttons

These are the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox session buttons:

133

NetOp Guest

Remote Control: This button will appear pressed in during a Remote Control session. Click the

pressed in button to release it to end the

Remote Control session.

File Transfer: Click this button to make it appear pressed in to start a File Transfer session. Click the

pressed in button to release it to end the

File Transfer session.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow both of Send files to

Host and Receive files from Host, see Allow Guest To .

Chat: Click this button to make it appear pressed in to start a

Chat session. Click the pressed in button to release it to end the Chat session.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Request chat, see

Allow Guest To

.

Audio-Video Chat: Click this button to make it appear pressed in to start an

Audio-Video Chat

session. Click the pressed in button to release it to end the

Audio-Video Chat session.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Request audio chat

and transfer sound, see Allow Guest To , if the Guest or the Host is engaged in another audio session

or if another Guest has keyboard and mouse control, see

Multi Guest Session Buttons .

Remote Management: Click this button to make it appear pressed in to start a

Remote Management

session. Click the pressed in button to release it to end the

Remote Management session.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Remote manage, see

Allow Guest To .

Demonstrate: Click this button to make it appear pressed in to start a

Demonstrate session. Click the

pressed in button to release it to end the

Demonstrate

session.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Demonstrate, see

Allow Guest To

.

Note: You can also control sessions from the

NetOp Guest Window .

3.6.1.2.2 Action Buttons

These are the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox action buttons:

Run Program: Click this button to show the Run Program

drop-down menu to run a program on the

Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Run programs, see

Allow Guest To

.

Execute Command: Click this button to show the

Execute Command drop-down menu to execute a

command on the Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Execute command

(Restart, ...), see

Allow Guest To .

Send Message: Click this button to show the

NetOp Message window to send a NetOp message to

the Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Send message, see

Allow Guest To

.

Get Inventory: Click this button to Get Inventory from the Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Retrieve inventory, see

Allow Guest To .

Note: You can also execute actions from the

NetOp Guest Window

.

134

NetOp Guest

3.6.1.2.3 Control Buttons

These are the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox control buttons:

Disconnect: Click this button or the

NetOp Guest Window

Toolbar

Disconnect

button or select the

Connection Menu

Disconnect

command to disconnect from the Host.

Connection Properties: Click this button or select the

Remote Control window Title Bar

menu

Connection Properties

command to show the

Connection Properties

window with limited options.

Full Screen: Click this Remote Control window toolbar button or select the Remote Control window

Title Bar menu

Full Screen

command to show the Host computer screen image in full screen, see

Remote Control Display .

Click this

Remote Control

full screen toolbox button to show the Host computer screen image in a window, see

Remote Control Display .

Note: Press the zoom hot key to toggle between window and full screen. The zoom hot key is CTRL

+Z unless modified, see the

Program Options

window

Remote Control Tab .

Send Ctrl+Esc: Click this button or select the Remote Control window Title Bar menu

Send Ctrl+Esc

command to send the keystroke combination CTRL+ESC to the Host to show the Start menu on a

Windows Host computer or the Window List on an OS/2 Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

. Using this keystroke combination from the keyboard can have undesired effects.

Send Ctrl+Alt+Del: Click this button or select the

Remote Control window Title Bar menu

Send Ctrl

+Alt+Del

command to send the keystroke combination CTRL+ALT+DEL to the Host to show the

security dialog box on a Windows 2003/XP/2000/NT Host computer or restart an OS/2 Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

. Using this keystroke combination from the keyboard can have undesired effects. Send Ctrl+Alt+Del will be disabled with Windows ME, 98 and 95 Host computers. Click or select

Restart Host PC

to restart the Host computer.

Restart Host PC: Click this button or select the Remote Control

window

Title Bar menu

Restart Host

PC

command to show a confirmation window to confirm restarting the Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Execute command

(Restart, ...), see

Allow Guest To .

3.6.1.2.4 Multi Guest Session Buttons

These are the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox multi Guest session buttons:

Note: All buttons will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Act as multi Guest session

administrator, see Allow Guest To.

Take Keyboard and Mouse Control: Click this button to take keyboard and mouse control.

Note: This button will be disabled if the Guest has keyboard and mouse control. If on the

Program

Options

window

Remote Control Tab

the Auto take control box is checked, alternatively click in the

Remote Control Display or strike a key to take keyboard and mouse control.

Start Multi Chat: Click this button to start a

Chat

session that will include all Guests connected to the

Host.

Note: This button will be disabled if only one Guest is connected to the Host or if a Multi Chat Session

135

NetOp Guest

is running.

Show Connection List: Click this button to show on the Host computer screen the Connection List window that will show records of connected Guests.

Suspend Further Connections: Click this button to make it appear pressed in to deny further Guest connections. Click the pressed in button to release it to allow further Guest connections.

Note: This button will be disabled if the Host on its Program Options window General tab does not

Allow multiple simultaneous Guest connections.

Disconnect All Guests Except Your Own: Click this button to disconnect other connected Guests.

Note: This button will be disabled if only one Guest is connected to the Host.

3.6.1.2.5 Clipboard Buttons

These are the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox clipboard buttons:

Send Clipboard: Click this button or select the

Remote Control window Title Bar

menu

Send

(Clipboard) to Host

command to send the Guest computer clipboard contents to the Host computer clipboard.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Transfer clipboard, see

Allow Guest To .

Retrieve Clipboard: Click this button or select the

Remote Control window Title Bar

menu

Retrieve

(Clipboard) from Host

command to retrieve the Host computer clipboard contents to the Guest

computer clipboard.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Transfer clipboard, see

Allow Guest To .

Save Screen to Clipboard: Click this button or select the

Remote Control window Title Bar menu

Save

Screen to Clipboard

command to capture the Host computer screen image to the Guest computer

clipboard.

Save Screen to File: Click this button or select the

Remote Control window Title Bar

menu

Save

Screen to File

command to capture the Host computer screen image and show a Windows Save As

window that suggests the file name <Host name>-<Date>-<Time>.bmp and the NetOp Configuration

Files SnapShot directory. You can change the file name and directory before saving.

3.6.1.2.6 Tool Buttons

These are the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox tool buttons:

Marker Mode: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the Remote Control window

Title Bar menu

Marker Mode

command to check mark it to start

NetOp Marker Utility

. Click the pressed in button to release it or select the check marked command to uncheck it to stop

NetOp

Marker Utility .

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

.

Mouse marker: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

Remote Control

window

Title Bar menu

Mouse marker

command to show on the Host computer screen a large red mouse pointer arrow when you click in the Host screen image. Click the pressed in button to release it or

select the check marked command to uncheck it to stop

Mouse marker

.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

.

136

NetOp Guest

Blank Display: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the Remote Control window

Title Bar menu

Blank Display

command to check mark it to make the Host computer screen turn

black to the Host user. Click the pressed in button to release it or select the check marked command to uncheck it to unblank the Host screen.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Blank the screen, see

Allow Guest To . While Blank Display works with most Host computers, the design of some

display adapters prevents applying it.

Lock Keyboard and Mouse: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the Remote

Control window Title Bar

menu

Lock Keyboard and Mouse

command to check mark it to disable the

Host computer keyboard and mouse. Click the pressed in button to release it or select the check marked command to uncheck it to enable the Host computer keyboard and mouse.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Lock keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

.

Transfer Sound: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

Remote Control window

Title Bar menu

Transfer Sound

command to check mark it to transfer Host computer application

sound. Click the pressed in button to release it or select the check marked command to uncheck it to not transfer sound.

Note: This button will be disabled if the Guest or the Host is engaged in another audio session or if

Host Guest Access Security does not allow Request audio chat and transfer sound, see

Allow Guest

To .

Note: For Transfer Sound to work, these conditions must be met:

1. On the Host, the

Advanced Audio Settings

window Record section Preferred device drop-down box must select the computer sound system.

2. The Host computer sound system must support sound mix.

3. The Host must specify the sound mix recording mode name of the Host computer sound system, see

[AUDIO] Section .

137

3.6.1.3 Remote Control Display

The

Remote Control window display panel will show an image of the Host computer screen:

NetOp Guest

In full screen, the Host computer screen image will cover the Guest computer screen, see the

Toolbar or

Toolbox

Full Screen

button or the

Title Bar menu

Full Screen

command.

Specify general

Remote Control session options on the

Program Options

window

Remote Control Tab .

Specify

Remote Control session options for each Host record or session in the

Connection Properties

window.

By default, the Guest user and the Host user can work in the Host computer screen image at the same time.

The Guest user can control Host user access to the Host computer screen image in the

Connection

Properties

window Startup Tab

Actions section and from Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox

Tool Buttons

or

window Title Bar

menu commands.

On the other hand, Host Guest Access Security and other Host tools enable the Host user or system

administrators to limit Guest access and actions on the Host computer, see Host Security Guide .

3.6.1.4 Status Bar

The

Remote Control window status bar will be shown unless hidden from the

Program Options

window

Remote Control Tab :

The left field will show the icon of the encryption type used in the communication between the Guest and the

Host, see the

Connection Properties

window

Compression/Encryption Tab .

The next field with a recording icon will appear if the session is being recorded, see the

Connection

Properties

window Record Tab .

The two next fields will show the Guest mouse and keyboard mode, see the

Connection Properties

window

Keyboard/Mouse Tab .

138

NetOp Guest

The right field will show the duration of the

Remote Control session.

3.6.1.5 Multi Guest Session

If on the Host

Program Options

window

General Tab the

Allow multiple simultaneous Guest connections

box

is checked, multiple Guests can connect to it to run a joint multi Guest

Remote Control session.

Host Guest Access Security specifies which multi Guest session actions are allowed to a Guest, see

Allow

Guest To .

· If the Join multi Guest session box is checked, the Guest can join a

Remote Control session that another

Guest runs with the Host (typically checked).

· If the Act as multi Guest session administrator box is checked, the Guest can manage a multi Guest

session, see Multi Guest Session Buttons

(typically checked).

In a multi Guest

Remote Control session, one Guest at a time can have keyboard and mouse control. The

Guest that has keyboard and mouse control can execute all actions allowed to it. Guests that do not have keyboard and mouse control can execute only a limited range of actions.

The Host window title bar will typically show the name of the Guest that has keyboard and mouse control, see the Host

Program Options

window

Connection Notification Tab . Other connected Guests will be

indicated by +<Number of other connected Guests>.

3.6.2 Monitor

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can monitor Host computers.

The Guest can connect to monitor Host computers from the Quick Connect Tab or from

Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

records, see

Connect Guide

.

Note: The Guest cannot monitor a Host computer with which it runs a

Remote Control session.

Select

Tab Panel

Host records and click the

Toolbar

Monitor

button or select the Connection Menu

Monitor

command to show the

Monitor Toolbox

and start connecting to the first selected record Host.

Note: If required by Host Guest Access Security, the Guest must log on to each Host to monitor it, see Guest

Authentication .

When connected, the Host computer screen image will be shown, typically in this window:

139

NetOp Guest

Window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

This window resembles the

Remote Control

window, but only these

Toolbar or Toolbox buttons and

matching

Title Bar menu commands will be enabled:

Full Screen: Click this window toolbar button to show the Host computer screen image in full screen, see

Remote Control Display .

Click this full screen toolbox button to show the Host computer screen image in a window, see

Remote Control Display .

Note: Press the zoom hot key to toggle between window and full screen. The zoom hot key is CTRL

+Z unless modified, see the

Program Options

window

Remote Control Tab .

Show Connection List: Click this button to show on the Host computer screen the Connection List window that shows records of connected Guests.

Save Screen to Clipboard: Click this button to capture the Host computer screen image to the Guest computer clipboard.

Save Screen to File: Click this button to capture the Host computer screen image to show a

Windows Save As window that suggests the file name <Host name>-<Date>-<Time>.bmp and the

NetOp Configuration Files SnapShot directory. You can change the file name and directory before

saving.

The window Status Bar mouse and keyboard control fields will show No Mouse and No Keyboard to indicate

that monitoring provides no mouse and keyboard control in the Host screen image.

Other Remote Control Display functionalities are available.

When the

Program Options

window

Monitor Tab specified Monitor interval has expired, the Guest will

disconnect and connect to the next selected record Host.

You can control monitoring from the

Monitor Toolbox .

140

NetOp Guest

3.6.2.1 Monitor Toolbox

This is the

Monitor

toolbox:

Its title bar will show:

·

While monitoring: Monitoring: <Host name>, <Number> s., where <Number> will count down from the

Program Options

window

Monitor Tab specified Monitor interval to zero. After countdown, the Guest will

disconnect and connect to the next selected record Host.

· While holding countdown: Holding: <Host name>.

·

While remote controlling: Remote controlling: <Host name>.

It contains these buttons:

End: End monitoring.

Continue: Continue countdown after Hold.

Hold: Hold countdown.

Previous: Monitor previous Host.

Next: Monitor next Host.

Remote Control/Monitor: Switch between monitor and remote control. The button will show a remote control icon in monitor mode and a monitor icon in remote control mode.

Full Screen/Window: Switch between window and full screen. The button will show a window to full screen icon in window mode and a full screen to window icon in full screen mode.

Host List: Show a list of monitored Hosts. Select a Host to monitor it.

Monitor remote control does not enable full Remote Control functionality but enables mouse and keyboard

control and these additional

Toolbar or Toolbox buttons and matching

Title Bar

menu commands:

Connection Properties: Click this button or select the

Title Bar menu

Connection Properties

command

to show the Connection Properties window with a limited tab and option selection.

Send Ctrl+Esc: Click this button or select the Title Bar menu

Send Ctrl+Esc

command to send the

keystroke combination CTRL+ESC to the Host to show the Start menu on a Windows Host computer or the Window List on an OS/2 Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

. Using this keystroke combination from the keyboard can have undesired effects.

Send Ctrl+Alt+Del: Click this button or select the

Title Bar menu

Send Ctrl+Alt+Del

command to send

the keystroke combination CTRL+ALT+DEL to the Host to show the security dialog box on a

Windows 2003/XP/2000/NT Host computer or restart an OS/2 Host computer.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

. Using this keystroke combination from the keyboard can have undesired effects. Send Ctrl+Alt+Del will be disabled with Windows ME, 98 and 95 Host computers.

Send Clipboard: Click this button or select the

Title Bar menu

Send Clipboard to Host

command to

send the Guest computer clipboard contents to the Host computer clipboard.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Transfer clipboard, see

Allow Guest To .

141

NetOp Guest

Retrieve Clipboard: Click this button or select the

Title Bar menu

Retrieve Clipboard from Host

command to retrieve the Host computer clipboard content to the Guest computer clipboard.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Transfer clipboard, see

Allow Guest To .

Marker Mode: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the Title Bar menu

Marker

Mode

command to check mark it to start

NetOp Marker Utility . Click the pressed in button to release it

or select the check marked command to uncheck it to stop

NetOp Marker Utility .

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Use keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

.

Lock Keyboard and Mouse: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the Title Bar

menu

Lock Keyboard and Mouse

command to check mark it to disable the Host computer keyboard and

mouse. Click the pressed in button to release it or select the check marked command to uncheck it to enable the Host computer keyboard and mouse.

Note: This button will be disabled if Host Guest Access Security does not allow Lock keyboard and

mouse, see

Allow Guest To

.

3.6.3 File Transfer

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can start a file transfer session with

a Host to transfer files between the Guest and Host computer.

The Guest can connect to start a file transfer session from the

Quick Connect Tab

, from a

Phonebook Tab

or

History Tab

record or in response to a help request from a

Help Request Tab record.

When connected, the Guest can start and end a file transfer session from a Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect

Tab ,

Connections Tab or

History Tab record or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox

File Transfer

button or the

Remote Management

NetOp Sessions File Transfer command.

Note: If the Host allows multiple simultaneous Guest connections, see

Guest Sessions , multiple file transfer

session Guests will run separate sessions.

This window will be shown on the Guest computer screen:

142

NetOp Guest

No window will be shown on the Host computer screen.

This window contains these main elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Menu Bar

·

Toolbar

· Two

Record Panels for the Guest to the left and for the Host (the Guest in a local file transfer session) to

the right.

3.6.3.1 Title Bar

This is the

NetOp File Manager

window title bar:

It will show the name by which you connected to the Host or Guest in a local file transfer session.

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

3.6.3.2 Menu Bar

This is the

NetOp File Manager

window menu bar:

It contains these menus:

·

File Menu

143

NetOp Guest

·

Edit Menu

·

View Menu

·

Options Menu

·

Help Menu

3.6.3.2.1 File Menu

This is the

NetOp File Manager

window File menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Copy Files: Select

Record Panel records and select this command or the matching Record Panel context

menu command, press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab

, or click the Toolbar

Copy Files

button to show the

Copy

window.

Note: Alternatively, drag records from one

Record Panel to the other and drop them to typically show the

Transfer Status

window.

Move Files: Select

Record Panel records and select this command or the matching Record Panel context

menu command, press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab

, or click the Toolbar

Move Files

button to show the

Move

window.

Sync Files: Select this command or click the Toolbar

Synchronize Files

button to show the

Synchronize

window.

Note: By default, synchronization will transfer directories and files to include directories and files that exist in

either Record Panel

in both

Record Panels replacing older files by newer files. On the

Options

window

Transfer Tab , you can select the

Synchronize

options

Transfer only if file exists

and

Transfer only one way

.

Clone Files: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Clone Files

button to show the

Clone

window.

Note: Cloning will transfer all directories and files in the selected Record Panel to the unselected Record

Panel deleting existing directories and files in it.

New Folder: Select this command, press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab

, or click the

Toolbar

New Folder

button to show this window:

144

Enter name for new folder []: Specify in this field the new folder name.

OK: Click this button to close the window to create the folder in the selected

Record Panel .

Drive Info: Select this command to show this window:

NetOp Guest

Drives: This pane will show icons and letters of the drives found on the selected Record Panel computer.

Select a drive to show information on the drive in the Information section.

Information: This section will show information on the drive selected in the Drives pane:

· Type: Drive type.

· File System: Drive file system.

·

Used Space: Drive used space in bytes.

· Free Space: Drive free space in bytes.

· Capacity: Drive capacity in bytes.

Delete: Select

Record Panel

records and select this command or the matching

Record Panel

context menu command, press the matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab

, or click the Toolbar

Delete

button to

delete selected records. A confirmation window may be shown, see

Confirmation Tab

.

Caution: Deleting a directory will delete directories and files in it.

Rename: Select a Record Panel record and select this command or the matching Record Panel

context menu command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab , to show this window:

Enter new name []: The field highlights the current record name. Edit it to rename the record.

Properties: Select a Record Panel

record and select this command or the matching

Record Panel context

menu command, press the matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab, or click the

Toolbar

Properties

button to show this window:

145

NetOp Guest

It will show the properties of the selected record including attributes that you can change.

Close: Select this command, press any matching keyboard shortcut, see Layout Tab , or use any matching

Window Control to close the

NetOp File Manager

window to end the

File Transfer

session.

Copy/Move/Synchronize/Clone

Selecting any of the

NetOp File Manager

window

File Menu

Copy Files

,

Move Files

,

Sync Files

or

Clone Files

commands or clicking any of the matching

Copy Files

,

Move Files

,

Synchronize Files

or

Clone Files

buttons

will show this window:

Note: For the

File Transfer

operations Copy Files, Move Files, Synchronize Files and Clone Files, this

146

NetOp Guest

window will differ only by its title bar operation name.

This window specifies the File Transfer

operation. A few details can be modified before execution:

From

Computer: Will show the selected Record Panel designation.

Folder/File: Will show the selected

Record Panel selection path, for one selected directory <Directory path>\*.

*, for one selected file <Directory path>\<File name>.

To

Computer: Will show the unselected Record Panel designation.

Folder/File: []: Will highlight the unselected Record Panel current directory path and for one selected

directory *.*, for one selected file <File name>. You can edit the field contents to specify another destination directory and/or file name.

Selected

Folders: Will show the number of selected directories.

Files: Will show the number of selected files.

Options

¨ Include subfolders: Will be enabled and checked if you have selected directories. Leave it checked to transfer also selected directory subdirectories and their file contents. Uncheck it to transfer only selected directories and their file contents.

¨ End session when finished: Check this box to end the

File Transfer session when this file transfer is

finished (default: unchecked).

OK: Click this button to execute the file transfer to show the

Transfer Status window.

Options: Click this button to show the

Options

window to view and optionally change the option selections for this file transfer operation only.

147

NetOp Guest

Transfer Status

This window will be shown after clicking OK in the

Copy/Move/Synchronize/Clone

window or executing a

File

Transfer

by drag and drop:

It contains these tabs:

·

Progress Tab

·

History Tab

·

Session History Tab

Close: This button will be enabled after file transfer. Click it to close the window.

Cancel: This button will be enabled during file transfer. Click it to cancel a file transfer in progress. You cannot undo executed file transfer actions.

148

This is the

File Transfer

Transfer Status

window Progress tab:

NetOp Guest

It contains these sections:

Current Command

Will during file transfer show the command being executed. Will after file transfer show Transfer ended.

Overall Progression

·

Files transmitted: Will show the number of transferred files.

· Total files: Will show the number of selected files.

· Bytes transmitted: Will show the number of transferred bytes.

·

Total bytes: Will show the number of bytes in selected files.

· Elapsed time: Will show the elapsed transfer time.

· Estimated time: Will show the estimated total transfer time.

The overall file transfer progress will be indicated by colored blocks.

Sending/Sent/Receiving/Received

Will during file transfer show the path and name of the file being transferred. Will after file transfer show the path and name of the last transferred file.

The progress of the current or last file transfer will be indicated by colored blocks.

149

NetOp Guest

These values will be shown below the progress indicator:

· Bytes sent/received: Number of bytes sent or received in the current or last file transfer.

· BPS: Transfer speed of the current or last file transfer in bytes per second.

· Total Bytes: Number of bytes in the current or last file transfer.

¨ End session when finished: Check this box to end the

File Transfer session when this file transfer is

finished (default: unchecked).

This is the

File Transfer

Transfer Status

window History tab:

Its pane will graphically show the events of the current or last file transfer like

Script Log events. Click [+]

buttons to expand and [-] buttons to collapse the event structure.

150

This is the

File Transfer

Transfer Status

window Session History tab:

NetOp Guest

Its pane will show the events of this

File Transfer session like

Script Log events. Click [+] buttons to expand

and [-] buttons to collapse the event structure.

3.6.3.2.2 Edit Menu

This is the

NetOp File Manager

window File menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Select All: Select this command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab , to select all

directories and files in the selected Record Panel

.

Select By: Select this command, press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab

, or click the

Toolbar

Select Files

button to show this window:

151

NetOp Guest

Select the files: []: In this field, replace *.* designating all directories and files by a file mask (a file name with wildcard characters like * designating any characters) to select files and directories with common name characters.

OK: Click this button to select unselected directories and files in the selected

Record Panel

by the file mask.

Deselect By: Select this command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab , to show this

window:

Deselect the files: []: In this field, replace *.* designating all directories and files by a file mask (a file name with wildcard characters like * designating any characters) to deselect files and directories with common name characters.

OK: Click this button to deselect selected directories and files in the selected

Record Panel

by the file mask.

Invert Selection: Select this command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see Layout Tab , to make all

selected directories and files unselected and all unselected directories and files selected in the selected

Record Panel .

Clear Selection: Select this command to deselect all directories and files in the selected

Record Panel

.

3.6.3.2.3 View Menu

This is the

NetOp File Manager

window View menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Large Icons: Select this command to check mark it or click the Toolbar

Large Icons

button to make it appear

pressed in to show Record Panel records as horizontal rows of large icons.

Small Icons: Select this command to check mark it or click the

Toolbar

Small Icons

button to make it appear

152

NetOp Guest

pressed in to show Record Panel records as horizontal rows of small icons.

List: Select this command to check mark it or click the

Toolbar

List

button to make it appear pressed in to

show

Record Panel records as vertical columns of small icons.

Details: Select this command to check mark it or click the

Toolbar

Details

button to make it appear pressed

in to show

Record Panel

records in a table with details in columns (default selection).

Local: Select this command to check mark/uncheck it or click the

Toolbar

Local

button to make it appear pressed in/released to switch between remote and local file transfer (default: unchecked/released for remote file transfer).

Arrange Icons: This command expands into these commands:

By Name: Select this command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab, to sort

Record

Panel file records by file name, ascending/descending like the

Details

selection.

By Type: Select this command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see Layout Tab, to sort

Record

Panel file records by extension, ascending/descending like the

Details

selection.

By Size: Select this command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab, to sort

Record

Panel file records by size, ascending/descending like the

Details

selection.

By Date: Select this command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab, to sort

Record

Panel file records by time, ascending/descending like the

Details

selection.

Auto Arrange: Select this command to uncheck/check mark it to disable/enable automatically sorting file records after changes by the current selection (default: check marked for Auto Arrange enabled).

Note: Directory folder records in alphabetically ascending order will always be shown before files. In

Details

, sort file records ascending/descending by clicking column headings.

Refresh: Select this command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab

, to retrieve new information from the computers to refresh

Record Panel contents.

3.6.3.2.4 Options Menu

This is the

NetOp File Manager

window Options menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Options: Select this command, click the

Toolbar

Options

button, click the

Copy/Move/Synchronize/Clone

window

Options

button or select the

NetOp Guest Window

Tools Menu

File Manager Options

command to

show the

Options

window.

View File Manager Log: Select this command or the matching

NetOp Guest Window

View Menu command to

show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Log Files (*.log) to open a

File Transfer log file to

show its contents in this window:

153

NetOp Guest

Its pane will show

File Transfer session events like

Script Log events. Click [+] buttons to expand and [-]

buttons to collapse the event structure.

Open Log...: Click this button to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Log Files (*.

log) to open another File Transfer

log file in the window.

Script: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Script

button to show the

Script

window to create or open a

NetOp Script .

Options

Select the

NetOp File Manager

window

Options Menu

Options

command, click the

Toolbar

Options

button,

click the

Copy/Move/Synchronize/Clone

window

Options

button or select the

NetOp Guest Window

Tools

Menu

File Manager Options

command to show this window.

154

It contains these tabs:

·

Transfer Tab

·

Confirmation Tab

·

Layout Tab

·

Logging Tab

NetOp Guest

155

This is the

Options

window Transfer tab:

NetOp Guest

It contains these sections:

Synchronize

¨ Transfer only if file exists: Check this box to synchronize files only if they exist in the unselected Record

Panel (default: unchecked).

¨ Transfer only one way: Check this box to synchronize files only from the selected

Record Panel

to the unselected

Record Panel (default: unchecked).

General Transfer

þ Include subfolders: Leave this box checked to transfer also the contents of subdirectories of selected directories (default: checked).

þ Use delta file transfer: Leave this box checked to compare source files with matching destination files and transfer only differences between source and destination files to save transmission bandwidth (default: checked).

þ Enable crash recovery: Leave this box checked to transfer files in a way that they can be recovered after a computer or network crash during file transfer (default: checked).

¨ Close dialog when finished: Check this box to close the

Transfer Status

window when a file transfer is

finished (default: unchecked).

¨ End session when finished: Check this box to end the

File Transfer session when a file transfer is finished

(default: unchecked).

Default: Click this button to restore the tab default settings.

156

This is the

Options

window Confirmation tab:

NetOp Guest

It contains this section:

Confirm when…

þ Delete non-empty folders: Leave this box checked to show this confirmation window if you are about to delete a directory that contains directories or files (default: checked):

Skip: Click this button to skip deleting the specified directory.

Delete: Click this button to delete the specified directory.

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

157

NetOp Guest

It will show your Delete confirmation selections to enable you to change them for this file transfer operation before continuing.

Cancel: Click this button to cancel the file transfer at this point. You cannot undo executed file transfer actions.

¨ Overwriting/deleting files: Check this box to show this window or the

Delete

window if you are about to overwrite or delete files (default: unchecked):

Skip: Click this button to skip overwriting the specified file.

Overwrite: Click this button to overwrite the specified file.

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

158

NetOp Guest

Always skip...

Check boxes in this section to skip file transfer in this file transfer operation in case of checked properties (default: all unchecked):

¨ Existing files

¨ Read-only files

¨ Hidden files

¨ System files

¨ On file write error

¨ On file read error

Confirm when...

This section will show your Overwrite/Delete confirmation selections to enable you to change them for this file transfer operation before continuing.

þ Overwriting existing files: Leave this box checked to show the

Overwrite

window if you are about to overwrite existing files (default: checked).

þ Overwriting/deleting read-only files: Leave this box checked to show the relevant confirmation window if you are about to overwrite/delete read-only files (default: checked).

þ Overwriting/deleting hidden files: Leave this box checked to show the relevant confirmation window if you are about to overwrite/delete hidden files (default: checked).

þ Overwriting/deleting system files: Leave this box checked to show the relevant confirmation window if you are about to overwrite/delete system files (default: checked).

þ Overwriting/deleting read-only files: Leave this box checked to show the relevant confirmation window if you are about to overwrite/delete read-only files (default: checked).

þ Overwriting/deleting hidden files: Leave this box checked to show the relevant confirmation window if you are about to overwrite/delete hidden files (default: checked).

159

NetOp Guest

þ Overwriting/deleting system files: Leave this box checked to show the relevant confirmation window if you are about to overwrite/delete system files (default: checked).

¨ Drag and drop (copying files with the mouse): Check this box to show a confirmation window before executing a drag and drop file transfer (default: unchecked).

Default: Click this button to restore the tab default settings.

This is the

Options

window Layout tab:

It contains these sections:

Screen

þ Show toolbar: Leave this box checked to show the

NetOp File Manager

window

Toolbar (default:

checked).

þ Show status bar: Leave this box checked to show a status bar at the bottom of the two

Record Panels

(default: checked).

þ Save session path at exit: Leave this box checked to show the same

Record Panel

contents when starting a

File Transfer session with the same Host next time (default: checked). Uncheck to always show the

system drive contents when starting a

File Transfer session.

Keyboard

Select one of these options:

¤ Use system hotkey layout: Select this option to use the operating system hot key layout, see the table below (default selection).

¡ Use NetOp hotkey layout: Select this option to use the NetOp hot key layout, see the table below.

Function

Copy Files

Move Files

Windows hot key NetOp hot key

F3

F6

160

NetOp Guest

New Folder

Delete

Rename

Close

Properties

Select All

Select by

Deselect by

Invert selection

Arrange Icons By Name

Arrange Icons By Type

Arrange Icons By Size

Arrange Icons By Date

Refresh

Select the left record panel

Select the right record panel

Help

F5

F1

DELETE

F2

ALT+F4

ALT+ENTER

CTRL+A

F7

F8

F10

+

-

SHIFT+F1

*

CTRL+F3

CTRL+F4

CTRL+F6

CTRL+F5

CTRL+R

ALT+F1

ALT+F2

F1

Note: Hot keys will be shown next to menu commands.

Icons

Select one of these options:

¡ Local associated and Host 'exe' icons: Show

Record Panel file icons according to Guest file associations

but show Host exe file icons according to Host file associations.

¤ Local associated icons: Show

Record Panel file icons according to Guest file associations (default

selection, saves transmission bandwidth).

¡ Default icons: Show the same default icon for all

Record Panel files (saves transmission bandwidth and

processor capacity).

Default: Click this button to restore the tab default settings.

161

This is the

Options

window Logging tab:

NetOp Guest

It contains this section:

Log file

þ Generate log file: Leave this box checked to generate a file transfer log file when ending a

File Transfer

session (default: checked).

¨ Append if log file exists: Check this box to append new log entries to an existing log file (default: unchecked). If unchecked, an existing log file will be overwritten.

Filename []: This field will specify the log file (path and) name, by default NFM.LOG that will reside in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest.

Browse: Click this button to show a Windows Save As window to specify a log file path and name that will be shown in the field.

Default: Click this button to restore the tab default settings.

3.6.3.2.5 Help Menu

This is the

NetOp File Manager

window Help menu:

Help Topics F1: Select this command or if the

NetOp File Manager

window is active press F1 to open the

NetOp Guest Help system on the File Transfer topic. The left window pane will contain a graphical table of

contents.

162

NetOp Guest

3.6.3.3 Toolbar

The

NetOp File Manager

window toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

Options

window

Layout Tab :

It contains buttons in these groups:

·

File Transfer Buttons

·

Other Buttons

3.6.3.3.1 File Transfer Buttons

The

NetOp File Manager

window Toolbar

file transfer buttons: include these buttons:

Copy Files: Select

Record Panel records and click this button or select the

File Menu or

Record Panel

context menu

Copy Files

command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab , to

show the

Copy

window.

Note: Alternatively, drag records from one Record Panel to the other and drop them to typically show

the

Transfer Status

window.

Move Files: Select

Record Panel records and click this button or select the

File Menu or

Record

Panel

context menu

Move Files

command or press any matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab ,

to show the

Move

window.

Synchronize Files: Click this button or select the

File Menu

Sync Files

command to show the

Synchronize window.

Note: By default, synchronization will transfer directories and files to include directories and files that

exist in either Record Panel

in both

Record Panels replacing older files by newer files. On the

Options

window Transfer Tab , you can select the

Synchronize

options

Transfer only if file exists

and

Transfer only one way

.

Clone Files: Click this button or select the File Menu

Clone Files

command to show the Clone

window.

Note: Cloning will transfer all directories and files in the selected

Record Panel to the unselected

Record Panel deleting existing directories and files in it.

3.6.3.3.2 Other Buttons

The

NetOp File Manager

window Toolbar

other buttons: include these buttons:

New Folder: Click this button or select the

File Menu

New Folder

command to show the

New Folder

window.

Delete: Select

Record Panel records and click this button, select the

File Menu

or

Record Panel

context menu

Delete

command or press the matching keyboard shortcut, see Layout Tab , to delete

selected records. A confirmation window may be shown, see Confirmation Tab .

Properties: Select a Record Panel record and click this button, select the

File Menu

or

Record Panel

context menu

Properties

command or press the matching keyboard shortcut, see

Layout Tab

, to show the

Properties

window.

163

NetOp Guest

Select By: Click this button or select the Edit Menu

Select By

command or press any matching

keyboard shortcut, see Layout Tab , to showthe

Select

window.

Options: Click this button or select the

Options Menu

Options

command to show the

Options

window.

Script: Click this button or select the

Options Menu

Script

command to show the

Script

window to open or create a NetOp Script .

Local: Click this button to make it appear pressed in/released or select the

View Menu

Local

command to check mark/uncheck it to switch between remote file transfer and local file transfer

(default: released/unchecked for remote file transfer).

Large Icons: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

View Menu

Large Icons

command to check mark it to show

Record Panel

records as horizontal rows of large icons.

Small Icons: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the View Menu

Small Icons

command to check mark it to show

Record Panel

records as horizontal rows of small icons.

List: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

View Menu

List

command to check

mark it to show

Record Panel records as vertical columns of small icons.

Details: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the View Menu

Details

command to check mark it to show

Record Panel

records in a table with details in columns (default selection).

3.6.3.4 Record Panel

The two

NetOp File Manager

window record panels have identical layout:

The top title bars show <Guest> in the left record panel and the Host name in the right record panel. In a local file transfer session, the right record panel will show Guest.

The selected record panel title bar will have a strong color and the unselected record panel title bar will have

a dimmed color. Click in a record panel or press a keyboard shortcut, see Layout Tab

, to select it. Press TAB to switch the record panel selection. Record panels will remain equally sized.

164

NetOp Guest

The directory bar below contains a left drive drop-down box and a right directory drop-down box.

The field of the drive drop-down box shows the selected drive icon and letter. The drop-down box list will contain the icon, letter and name of local and mapped network drives. Select a drive in the list to show it in the field.

The field of the directory drop-down box will show the path of the selected directory. The drop-down box list will contain the paths of up to 30 directories that have been selected during the current

File Transfer session.

Select a directory path in the list to show it in the field to show its contents in the records pane below.

Alternatively, specify a directory path in the drop-down box field and press ENTER to select the directory.

The records pane below will contain records of directories and files in the selected directory as

Large Icons

,

Small Icons

,

List

or

Details

. Change the display from the

Toolbar

or the

View Menu

. Directory records in

alphabetically ascending order are shown before file records. Sort file records by clicking

Details

column

headings or by pressing a keyboard shortcut, see Layout Tab

.

Details

will show record details in a table with these column contents:

·

Name: Record name.

· Ext: <DIR> for directory, file extension for file.

· Size: File size in bytes. Directory size is 0 bytes.

·

Date: Date and time of last record change.

· Attrib: First letters of record attributes:

· r: Read-only

·

a: Archive

· h: Hidden

· s: System

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Double-click a directory record to select this directory to show its path in the directory bar and its contents in the records pane.

Double-click a records pane top directory record with two period characters (..) to move one step up in the directory tree structure.

The bottom status bar will show the number of bytes in the number of selected record files. Bytes in files in selected directory record directories are not included in the byte count.

Execute file transfers and manage records from Toolbar buttons and menu commands.

Right-click a record or multiple selected records to show this context menu:

Top section commands that may be different with different file selections and computer setups are similar to

Windows Explorer right-click context menu commands.

Lower sections commands match

File Menu

commands.

Drag selected records in one record pane to the other record pane and drop them to copy them to a record directory, if highlighted, or to the directory whose records are shown in the pane.

Press the right mouse button and drag selected records in one record pane to the other record pane and

165

NetOp Guest

drop them to show this context menu:

Copy here: Select this command to copy selected records to a record directory, if highlighted, or to the directory whose records are shown in the pane.

Move here: Select this command to move selected records to a record directory, if highlighted, or to the directory whose records are shown in the pane.

Cancel: Select this command to cancel the attempted file transfer.

3.6.4 Chat

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can start a chat session with a

Host to enable typed text communication between the Guest computer user and the Host computer user.

The Guest can connect to start a chat session from the

Quick Connect Tab

, from a Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

record or in response to a help request from a

Help Request Tab record.

When connected, the Guest can start and end a chat session from a

Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab

,

Connections Tab

or History Tab record or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox

Chat

button or the

Remote Management

NetOp Sessions

Chat command.

The Host can start and end a chat session with a Guest that is connected to it, see also Multi Chat Session

.

Note: If the Host allows multiple simultaneous Guest connections, see

Guest Sessions , multiple chat session

Guests will run a joint

Multi Chat Session with the Host.

This window will be shown on the Guest computer screen and a similar window will be shown on the Host computer screen:

166

NetOp Guest

Its title bar will show the name of the Host.

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

Dialog: []: This pane will show the chat dialog with the name of the sender preceding each contribution. When the chat dialog exceeds the pane, the pane will get a vertical scroll bar.

Enter Chat contribution and click Send: []: Specify your chat contribution in this pane from the keyboard if the

Chat window is active or by pasting text. Edit your chat contribution by the keyboard shortcuts CTRL+X (Cut),

CTRL+C (Copy), CTRL+V (Paste) and DEL (Delete).

Send: Click this button to move your chat contribution from the Enter... pane to the Dialog pane where it will be visible to the chat session participants.

Font…: Click this button to show the Windows Font window to format your chat contribution.

End chat: Click this button or apply a

Window Control Close control to close the window to end the session.

Save...: Click this button to show a Windows Save As window that will suggest saving the chat dialog in a file named Chat <Date> <Time>.rtf in your personal computer directory. You can edit the file path and name before saving.

3.6.4.1 Multi Chat Session

If NetOp Host allows multiple simultaneous Guest connections, see

Guest Sessions , NetOp Guest can start

a

Chat session to join a Chat session that runs between another Guest and the Host to run a multi Chat

session.

If multiple Guests are connected to a Host, the Host can start a multi

Chat session with all connected Guests or a Chat

session with a selected connected Guest.

167

NetOp Guest

A Guest that Host Guest Access Security allows to Act as multi Guest session administrator, see Allow Guest

To

, can

Start Multi Chat with the Host and all connected Guests from a

Remote Control

Multi Guest Session

.

A Guest that ends a multi

Chat

session will leave the session. The session will end when the Host or the last session Guest ends the session.

3.6.5 Audio-Video Chat

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can start an audio-video chat

session with a Host to enable sound and live image communication between the Guest computer user and the Host computer user.

The Guest can connect to start an audio-video chat session from the Quick Connect Tab , from a

Phonebook

Tab or

History Tab record or in response to a help request from a

Help Request Tab record.

When connected, the Guest can start and end an audio-video chat session from a Phonebook Tab ,

Quick

Connect Tab ,

Connections Tab

or

History Tab record or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox

Audio-

Video Chat

button or the

Remote Management

NetOp Sessions Audio-Video Chat command.

The Host can start an audio-video chat session only with a connected Guest that has keyboard and mouse control.

Note: Each Guest and each Host can run only one audio session including

Transfer Sound

at a time.

This window will be shown on the Guest computer screen:

A similar window without the toolbar will be shown on the Host computer screen.

The title bar will show the Host name.

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

The toolbar contains these buttons:

Audio: Typically, this button will appear pressed in to indicate that audio communication is enabled.

Click the button to disable/enable audio communication.

Video: Typically, this button will appear released in to indicate that video communication is disabled.

Click the button to enable/disable video communication.

168

NetOp Guest

Note: If Host Guest Access Security does not allow Request video, see Allow Guest To , you cannot

enable video communication.

Large: Click this button to resize the Guest and Host

Audio-Video Chat

window to accommodate a large Remote video frame.

Medium: Click this button to resize the Guest and Host

Audio-Video Chat window to accommodate a

medium Remote video frame.

Small: Click this button to resize the Guest and Host

Audio-Video Chat window to accommodate a

small Remote video frame (default selection).

End Session: Click this button or apply a

Window Control Close control to close the window to end

the audio-video chat session.

In the Remote section, the video frame will show the remote computer video camera image. If the toolbar

Video button is released, the frame will show No Video. If no camera runs on the remote computer, the frame will show No Camera.

In the Local section, the video frame will show the local computer video camera image. If the toolbar Video button is released, the frame will show No Video. If no camera runs on the local computer, the frame will show No Camera.

The lower right Volume section has two slides and a pane:

· Drag the left loudspeaker slide to adjust the playback volume (default: maximum).

· Drag the middle microphone slide to adjust the recording volume (default: medium).

· The right microphone pane will monitor the recording volume. The pane should remain empty while not talking. Colored blocks should partly but not completely fill the pane while talking.

Specify audio and video options on the

Program Options

window

Audio-Video Chat Tab .

3.6.6 Remote Management

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can start a remote management

session with a Host to access Host computer management tools.

The Guest can connect to start a remote management session from the Quick Connect Tab , from a

Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

record or in response to a help request from a Help Request Tab

record.

When connected, the Guest can start and end a remote management session from a Phonebook Tab ,

Quick

Connect Tab ,

Connections Tab or

History Tab record or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox

Remote Management

button.

Note: If the Host allows multiple simultaneous Guest connections, see

Guest Sessions , multiple remote

management session Guests will run separate sessions.

This window will be shown on the Guest computer screen:

169

NetOp Guest

No window will be shown on the Host computer screen.

This window provides remote access to a range of Host computer management tools. It contains these main elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Menu Bar

·

Toolbar

· Work panel with a left

Navigation Panel and a right

Display Panel

·

Status Bar

Remote management tools are explained in Management

.

NetOp session tools are explained in

NetOp Sessions

.

Host computer details are explained in

Details .

170

NetOp Guest

3.6.6.1 Title Bar

This is the

Remote Management

window title bar:

It will show the name of the session Host and of any selected

Management

tool.

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

3.6.6.2 Menu Bar

This is the

Remote Management

window menu bar:

It contains these menus:

·

File Menu

·

View Menu

·

Management Menu

·

Help Menu

·

<Management tool> Menu

Note: The <Management tool> menu will be available only if a

Management tool is selected. The red NetOp

kite at the right end of the menu bar will move while remote management information is retrieved from the

Host computer.

3.6.6.2.1 File Menu

This is the

Remote Management

window File menu:

NetOp Sessions: This command expands into commands that match the Navigation Panel

NetOp Sessions

section commands.

Exit: Select this command or apply a Window Control

Close control to close the

Remote Management

window to end the session.

3.6.6.2.2 View Menu

This is the

Remote Management

window View menu:

Toolbar: Select this command to uncheck/check mark it to hide/show the

Toolbar

(default: check marked to show the

Toolbar ).

Status Bar: Select this command to uncheck/check mark it to hide/show the Status Bar (default: check

171

NetOp Guest

marked to show the

Status Bar ).

Navigation Panel: Select this command to uncheck/check mark it to hide/show the

Navigation Panel (default:

check marked to show the

Navigation Panel

).

Note: You can also hide/show the

Navigation Panel from its left/right pointer button.

3.6.6.2.3 Management Menu

This is the

Remote Management

window Management menu:

It contains these commands that match Navigation Panel

Management

section commands:

Disk Drives: Select this command to show Host computer disk drives information in the Display Panel

.

Note: Accessing Host computer

Disk Drives requires certain rights on the Host computer, see

Management .

Event Viewer: Select this command to show Host computer event viewer information in the

Display Panel .

Note: Accessing the Host computer

Event Viewer requires certain rights on the Host computer, see

Management .

.

Task Manager: Select this command to display Host computer task manager information in the Display Panel

Registry: Select this command to show Host computer registry information in the Display Panel .

Services: Select this command to show Host computer services information in the Display Panel .

Note: Accessing Host computer

Services requires certain rights on the Host computer, see

Management

.

.

Shared Folders: Select this command to show Host computer shared folders information in the

Display Panel

Note: Accessing Host computer

Shared Folders requires certain rights on the Host computer, see

Management .

Inventory: Select this command to show Host computer inventory information in the Display Panel .

Command Console: Select this command to show a Host computer command window in the Display Panel .

System Control: Select this command to show a Host computer system control window in the Display Panel .

3.6.6.2.4 Help Menu

This is the

Remote Management

window Help menu:

Help Index: Select this command to open the NetOp Guest Help system on the

Remote Management

topic.

The left pane will contain a graphical table of contents.

172

NetOp Guest

3.6.6.2.5 <Management tool> Menu

This

Remote Management

window menu will be available only if a

Management tool is selected. It will have

the name of the selected

Management tool, e.g.:

This menu will have different contents with different

Management

tools.

3.6.6.3 Toolbar

The

Remote Management

window toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

View Menu

Toolbar

command if a

Management tool is selected, e.g.:

The toolbar will contain different buttons with different Management tools as explained with each

Management tool.

173

NetOp Guest

3.6.6.4 Navigation Panel

The

Remote Management

window work panel left navigation panel will be shown unless hidden from the

View Menu

Navigation Panel

command or the navigation panel left/right button:

This Management section contains

Management commands.

This NetOp Sessions section contains

NetOp Sessions

commands.

This Details section contains Details information.

Click the navigation panel left/right button or select the View Menu

Navigation Panel

command to hide/show

the navigation panel.

Click a section up/down button to collapse/expand it.

174

3.6.6.5 Display Panel

The

Remote Management

window work panel right display panel:

NetOp Guest

- will initially show Select a management tool in the left pane.

Select a

Management Menu command or a

Navigation Panel

Management

section command to show

selected Management tool information in the display panel.

Note: While management information is being retrieved from the Host, the red NetOp kite at the right end of the

Menu Bar

will move.

3.6.6.6 Status Bar

This

Remote Management

window status bar will be shown unless hidden from the

View Menu

Status Bar

command:

It will contain three fields if a

Management tool is selected.

The left field can contain information on a selected

Management tool object.

The middle field will show In progress… while information is being retrieved from the session Host. When information has been retrieved successfully, it will show Success.

The right field will show <Retrieved number of records>/<Total number of records>.

3.6.6.7 Management

To start a remote management task, select in the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section one of these commands:

·

Disk Drives

·

Event Viewer

·

Task Manager

·

Registry

·

Services

175

NetOp Guest

·

Shared Folders

·

Inventory

·

Command Console

·

System Control

Note: Accessing Host computer

Disk Drives ,

Event Viewer

,

Services and

Shared Folders requires certain

rights on the Host computer. Generally, a

Remote Management session acquires the rights of the Host that

acquires the rights of the user logged on to the Host computer. To assign required rights to a

Remote

Management session with a Host on a computer to which no user or a user with insufficient rights is logged

on, run the Host as a user with required rights, see the Host

Program Options

window

Run As Tab .

3.6.6.7.1 Disk Drives

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

Disk Drives

command to show Host

computer disk drive information in the Display Panel :

Note: This command will be disabled if the Host does not have the right to show Host computer disk drive information. To assign required rights to the Host, run it as a user with required rights, see

Management .

Host computer disk drive information will be shown as icons or table records according to the Disk Drives

Menu

or

Disk Drives Toolbar selection.

Details

will show table records with these column contents:

· Name: Disk drive icon and name.

·

Type: Disk drive type.

· Total Size: Disk drive total size in bytes.

· Free Space: Disk drive free space in bytes.

·

File System: Disk drive file system.

· Total Used: Disk drive used space in bytes.

· Free %: Disk drive free space in percent of total space.

·

Used %: Disk drive used space in percent of total space.

176

NetOp Guest

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

This section includes these sections:

·

Disk Drives Menu

·

Disk Drives Toolbar

·

Disk Drive Types

Disk Drives Menu

If the

Disk Drives

management tool is selected, in the Menu Bar

, press ALT+D or right-click in the

Display

Panel to show this menu:

View: Select this command or click the

Disk Drives Toolbar

View

button to expand into these commands:

¨ Large Icons: Select this command to dot mark it to show records as horizontal rows of large icons.

¨ Small Icons: Select this command to dot mark it to show records as horizontal rows of small icons.

¨ List: Select this command to dot mark it to show records as vertical columns of small icons.

þ Details: Select this command to dot mark it to show records in a table with details in columns (default selection).

þ Show in Groups: On a Windows 2003 or XP computer, select this command to uncheck/check mark it to ungroup/group records by drive type (default: check marked to group).

Refresh F5: Select this command, press F5 or click the Disk Drives Toolbar

Refresh

button to retrieve new

data from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel

contents.

Properties: Select a record and select this command or click the

Disk Drives Toolbar

Properties

button to show this window:

177

NetOp Guest

This window will show the selected record disk drive properties.

Disk Drives Toolbar

If the

Disk Drives

management tool is selected, this

Toolbar

will be shown unless hidden from the View Menu

Toolbar

command:

View: Click this button or select the matching

Disk Drives Menu

View

command to show the

View

submenu.

Refresh: Click this button, select the Disk Drives Menu

Refresh

command or press F5 to retrieve new data from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel

contents.

Properties: Select a record and click this button or select the

Disk Drives Menu

Properties

command

to show record disk drive properties in the

Properties

window.

When a disk drive record is selected, the left Status Bar field will show Free Space: <Bytes of free space>

Total Space: <Bytes of total space>.

178

NetOp Guest

Disk Drive Types

In the

Disk Drives

management tool

Display Panel , these disk drive types can be shown:

·

<Size> Floppy Disk: Host computer diskette drive.

· Local Disk: Host computer hard disk or partition.

· Compact Disk: Host computer CD drive.

·

RAM disk: Part of Host computer memory allocated to file storage.

· Removable Disk: Removable file storage device.

· Mounted Disk: Drive attached to an empty folder in an NTFS volume.

·

Network Drive: Network computer hard disk, partition or directory.

3.6.6.7.2 Event Viewer

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

Event Viewer

command to show

Host computer Windows event logs in the

Display Panel

:

Note: Only Windows NT+ (2003, XP, 2000 and NT) computers record events. The

Event Viewer

command

will be enabled only if the Host computer runs on a Windows NT+ operating system. The

Event Viewer

command will be disabled if the Host does not have the right to show Host computer events. To assign required rights to the Host, run it as a user with required rights, see

Management .

The

Display Panel will contain tabs named Application, Security and System like the Windows Event Viewer.

The fourth File tab can show a saved event log. Each tab will show Host computer event records in a table with this column content:

·

Type: Event type icon and description.

· Date: Event date.

· Time: Event time.

·

Source: Event source.

179

NetOp Guest

·

Category: Event category, if applicable.

· Event: Event ID.

· User: Event user name or N/A if not a user event.

·

Computer: Event computer name.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

This section includes these sections:

·

Event Viewer Menu

·

Event Viewer Toolbar

Event Viewer Menu

If the

Event Viewer

management tool is selected, in the Menu Bar

select Event Viewer, press ALT+E or right-

click in the Display Panel

to show this menu:

Open Ctrl+O: Select this command, press CTRL+O or click the

Event Viewer Toolbar

Open

button to show

this window:

It will open a saved event log file on the Event Viewer File tab.

File resides on: Select one of these options:

¤ Guest computer: Open a saved event log that resides on the Guest computer (default selection).

¡ Host computer: Open a saved event log that resides on the Host computer.

File path and name: []: Specify in this field the saved event log file path and name.

Log type: []: The field of this drop-down box will show (Unspecified). The drop-down box list contains the options (Unspecified), Application, Security and System. Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

180

NetOp Guest

Note: Opening a saved event log will overwrite the current File tab contents.

Save Ctrl+S: Select this command, press CTRL+S or click the

Event Viewer Toolbar

Save

button to show

this window:

It will save the shown event log in a file.

Save file on: Select one of these options:

¤ Guest computer: Save the event log file on the Guest computer (default selection)

¡ Host computer: Save the event log file on the Host computer.

File path and name: []: Specify in this field the file path and name.

Note: Event binary data in the Event Properties window Data section will be available only if you save the event log file with the default extension evt.

Clear: Select this command or click the Event Viewer Toolbar

Clear

button to show this window:

Yes: Click this button to show the

Save Event Log

window to save the contents of the shown event log in a file before clearing it. When closing the

Save Event Log

window, all events in the shown event log will be

cleared.

No: Click this button to clear all events in the shown event log.

Cancel: Click this button to abandon clearing the shown event log.

Refresh F5: Select this command, press F5 or click the Event Viewer Toolbar

Refresh

button to retrieve new

data from the Host computer to refresh the tab contents.

Log Properties: Select this command or click the

Event Viewer Toolbar

Properties

button to show a

Properties window like the Windows <Log type> Properties window with a similar functionality.

Event Properties: Select a tab record and select this command or double-click a tab record to show an Event

Properties window like the Windows <Event Type> Properties window with a similar functionality.

Event Viewer Toolbar

If the

Event Viewer

management tool is selected, this

Toolbar

will be shown unless hidden from the View

Menu

Toolbar

command:

181

NetOp Guest

Save: Click this button, select the Event Viewer Menu

Save

command or press CTRL+S to show the

Save Event Log

window.

Open: Click this button, select the

Event Viewer Menu

Open

command or press CTRL+O to show the

Open Saved Event Log

window.

Clear: Click this button or select the Event Viewer Menu

Clear

command to show the

Clear Event Log

window.

Refresh: Click this button, select the Event Viewer Menu

Refresh

command or press F5 to retrieve new data from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel content.

Properties: Click this button or select the

Event Viewer Menu

Log Properties

command to show a

Properties window like the Windows <Log type> Properties window with a similar functionality.

Stop: Click this button to stop retrieving information from the Host computer. Retrieved information will be shown.

3.6.6.7.3 Task Manager

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

Task Manager

command to show

Host computer running applications and processes in the Display Panel :

The

Display Panel will contain

Applications

and

Processes

tabs.

The

Applications

tab will contain records of applications running on the Host computer like the Windows NT+

(Windows 2003, XP, 2000 and NT) computer Task Manager window Applications tab in a table with these column contents:

·

Task: Windows icon and application description.

· Status: Will show Running if the application is running on the Host computer.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

The

Processes

tab has an upper and a lower pane:

The upper pane will contain records of processes running on the Host computer like the Windows NT+

(Windows 2003, XP, 2000 and NT) computer Task Manager window Processes tab in a table with these

182

NetOp Guest

column contents:

· Image Name: Process or executable file name.

· PID: Process identification number.

·

CPU Usage: Percent of the currently used central processing unit (CPU) resources used by this process.

· Time: Time that the process has run in the format HH:MM:SS:TTT (H=Hour digit, M=Minute digit,

S=Second digit, T=Thousands fraction of a second digit).

· Kernel Time: Percent of time running in kernel mode.

· User Time: Percent of time running in user mode.

·

Threads: Number of threads running in the process.

· Mem Usage: Bytes of memory used by the process.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

The lower pane will contain records of threads run by the process selected in the upper pane in a table with these column contents:

· ID: Thread identification number.

·

Time: Time that the thread has run in the format HH:MM:SS:TTT (H=Hour digit, M=Minute digit, S=Second digit, T=Thousands fraction of a second digit).

·

Kernel Time: Percent of time running in kernel mode.

·

User Time: Percent of time running in user mode.

· Priority: Priority ranking number (a high number means high priority for CPU resources).

This section includes these sections:

·

Task Manager Menu

·

Task Manager Toolbar

Task Manager Menu

If the

Task Manager

management tool is selected, in the

Menu Bar select Task Manager, press ALT+T or

right-click in the

Display Panel to show this menu:

New Task (Run…): Select this command or click the Task Manager Toolbar

Create Task

button to show this

window:

Specify path and name of the program: []: Specify in the drop-down box field the Host computer path and name of the executable program file of the application that shall run on the Host computer. The drop-down

183

NetOp Guest

box list will contain file paths and names that have been specified before. Select a file path and name in the list to show it in the field.

Note: Like in the Windows Run… window, a path is not required for files that reside in the Host computer system directory (Windows or WINNT). A path from the system directory or a full path is required for other file locations. The path can contain environment variables.

End Task/Process: Select an application or a process in the Display Panel and select this command or click

the

Task Manager Toolbar

End Task/Process

button to end the application or process on the Host computer.

Caution: If you end an application, unsaved application data will be lost. If you end a process, the application or system of which it is a part may not function properly.

Refresh F5: Select this command, press F5 or click the Task Manager Toolbar

Refresh

button to retrieve new information from the Host computer to show it in the

Display Panel .

Task Manager Toolbar

If the

Task Manager

management tool is selected, this

Toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

View

Menu Toolbar

command:

Create Task: Click this button, select the

Task Manager Menu

New Task

command or press CTRL+S to show the

Create New Task

window.

End Task/Process: Select a task or process and click this button or select the

Task Manager Menu

End Task/Process

command to end the selected task or process.

Refresh: Click this button, select the Task Manager Menu

Refresh command or press F5 to retrieve new data from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel contents.

Note: When the

Task Manager

management tool is selected or refreshed, the left

Status Bar

field will show

Processes: <Number of processes> / CPU Usage <Percent CPU usage>%.

3.6.6.7.4 Registry

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

Registry

command to show the Host

computer Windows registry like in the Windows Registry Editor window in the

Display Panel :

Caution: Typical computer users should never attempt to edit the Windows registry, as even minor mistakes can have disastrous effects on the operation of the computer. Computer users that are aware of the pitfalls can edit the registry to clean up the computer and modify its Windows configuration. However, always take suitable safety precautions including backing up the registry to avoid ending up in a deadlock.

The Windows registry stores the configuration of the Windows operating system in a structured database. It is created when Windows is installed on the computer and is automatically modified when applications are installed and used and when users create or change personal settings.

The Windows registry is organized into five predefined sub trees:

Sub tree Description

HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT

Specifies file and data associations that point to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE

\Software\Classes keys. Its keys determine how applications load and associate with data files.

HKEY_CURRENT_USER

Specifies the profile of the user currently logged on to the computer. Its keys

184

NetOp Guest

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE

Specifies the Windows configuration on the computer and determines how

Windows loads.

HKEY_USERS

that are part of the logged on user’s keys in HKEY_USERS take precedence over HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE keys for duplicated data.

Contains a DEFAULT sub tree that specifies the user profile when no user is logged on to the computer and a sub tree that specifies the user profile of the user currently logged on to the computer.

HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG Specifies the hardware profile that determines how the installed software uses available hardware. It specifies associations between

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software keys and HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE

\System keys.

Each sub tree expands into a tree structure of keys. This image shows the Display Panel with an expanded

Host computer Windows registry:

The left

keys pane contains registry keys and the right values pane will contain value records of the key selected in the keys pane.

Keys Pane

This pane contains an expandable tree structure of keys shown as named folders. Click [+] buttons to expand and [-] buttons to collapse keys. Double-click a key folder to expand/collapse it. Click a key folder to open it and show its value records in the

values pane.

A key folder that has not been opened will be gray. A key folder that has been opened will be yellow.

Values Pane

Select a key in the keys pane to show in this pane its values as records in a table with these column

contents:

· Name: Value type icon and value name. The name of the first value is always (Default).

·

Type: Type designation, see the table below.

· Data: Value data in the required format, see the table below. The first value is always (value not set).

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

185

NetOp Guest

Value Type

String Value

Binary Value

DWORD Value

Multi-String Value

Type Designation Value Data Format

REG_SZ One value that must be a string of characters.

REG_BINARY

REG_DWORD

One value that must be a string of hexadecimal digit pairs.

Each hexadecimal digit pair is interpreted as a byte value.

One value that must be a string of 1-8 hexadecimal or decimal digits.

REG_MULTI_SZ Multiple values that must be strings of characters separated by a null character.

Expandable String Value REG_EXPAND_SZ One value that must be a string of characters that can include replaceable environment variables.

This section includes these sections:

·

Registry Menu

·

Registry Toolbar

Registry Menu

If the

Registry

management tool is selected, in the Menu Bar select Registry or press ALT+R to open this

menu:

New: This command expands into these commands:

Key: Select this command to create a

keys pane key as a sub key of the selected key. Replace the

highlighted default key name by the desired key name by typing or pasting from the clipboard (CTRL+V).

String Value: Select this command to create a values pane string value record for the keys pane selected

key. Replace the highlighted default value name by the desired value name by typing or pasting from the clipboard (CTRL+V). Right-click the record and select Modify to show this window:

186

NetOp Guest

Value Name: []: This disabled field will show the value name.

Value Data: []: Specify in this field the value data as a string of characters.

Binary Value: Select this command to create a

values pane binary value record for the keys pane selected

key. Replace the highlighted default value name by the desired value name by typing or pasting from the clipboard (CTRL+V). Right-click the record and select Modify to show this window:

Value Name: []: This disabled field will show the value name.

Value Data: []: Specify in this pane the value data as a string of hexadecimal digit pairs.

DWORD Value: Select this command to create a

values pane DWORD value record for the keys pane

selected key. Replace the highlighted default value name by the desired value name by typing or pasting from the clipboard (CTRL+V). Right-click the record and select Modify to show this window:

187

NetOp Guest

Value Name: []: This disabled field will show the value name.

Value Data: []: Specify in this field the value data as a string of 1-8 digits according to the selected base, see below.

Base: Select one of these options:

¤ Hexadecimal: Select this option to interpret digits as hexadecimal (default selection).

¡ Decimal: Select this option to interpret digits as decimal.

Multi-String Value: Select this command to create a

values pane multi-string value record for the keys

pane selected key. Replace the highlighted default value name by the desired value name by typing or pasting from the clipboard (CTRL+V). Right-click the record and select Modify to show this window:

Value Name: []: This disabled field will show the value name.

Value Data: []: Specify in this pane the value data as strings of characters separated by a null character.

Expandable String Value: Select this command to create a

values

pane expandable string value record for the

keys pane selected key. Replace the highlighted default value name by the desired value name by

typing or pasting from the clipboard (CTRL+V). Right-click the value record and select Modify to show the

Edit String

window to specify the value data.

Find… Ctrl+F: Select this command, press CTRL+F or click the Registry Toolbar

Find

button to show this

window:

188

NetOp Guest

Find What: []: Specify in this field the string of characters that shall be searched for.

Look at: Uncheck boxes to not search for these types of elements:

þ Keys: Leave this box checked to find keys whose name contains the specified string of characters

(default: checked).

þ Values: Leave this box checked to find value records whose name contains the specified string of characters (default: checked).

þ Data: Leave this box checked to find value data that contain the specified string of characters (default: checked).

¨ Match Whole String Only: Check this box to find only elements that exactly match the specified string of characters (default: unchecked).

Find Next: Click this button or press F3 to start or continue the search from the selected key or value downwards.

Find Next F3: Select this command or press F3 to search for the next occurrence of the character string specified in the

Find

window.

Delete Del: Select a

keys pane key folder or values pane value record and select this command, press

DELETE or click the

Registry Toolbar

Delete

button to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting the

selected key or value. You cannot delete predefined sub trees and (default) value records.

Caution: Deleting a key will delete all of its sub keys.

Rename: Select a keys pane key or values pane value record and select this command to highlight and

frame the selected key or value name to change it. You cannot rename predefined sub trees and (default) value names.

Import…: Select this command or click the Registry Toolbar

Import

button to show an Import Registry File window like a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Registration Files (*.reg) to open a registration file to import its contents into the Host computer registry.

Extreme Caution: Importing a registration file will overwrite any matching keys and value records. If imported keys and value records and other keys and value records mismatch, the registry will become corrupted to make the Host computer unusable.

Export…: Select a

keys pane key and select this command or click the

Registry Toolbar

Export

button to

show an Export Registry File window like a Windows Save As window that specifies Files of type:

Registration Files (*.reg) to specify the path and name of a file that will contain the keys and value records of the selected key branch.

Modify: Select a

values pane value record and select this command or click the

Registry Toolbar

Modify

button to show the value type matching Edit <Value type> window, see above, to modify value data. You cannot modify the (default) value record (value not set) data.

Copy Key Name: Select a

keys pane key and select this command or click the

Registry Toolbar

Copy Key

Name

button to copy the registry path and name of the selected key to the clipboard.

Refresh F5: Select this command, press F5 or click the Registry Toolbar

Refresh

button to retrieve new data

189

from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel contents.

Organize Favorites…: Select this command to show this window:

NetOp Guest

The pane will show your favorites in the

Registry Toolbar right drop-down box list (initially none).

Delete: Select a favorite in the pane and click this button to delete it.

Add To Favorites: Select a

keys pane key and select this command or click the

Registry Toolbar

Add To

Favorites

button to show this window:

Favorite Name: []: This field will show the name of the selected key. You can edit the field contents to name the added favorite as desired. Click OK to add the key to your favorites.

Note: Your favorites will be available in the

Registry Toolbar right favorites drop-down box list.

Right-click a

keys

pane folder to show this menu:

Expand/Collapse: Select this bolded command or double-click the key to expand/collapse the key folder.

Other menu commands are explained above.

Right-click a

values

pane record to show this menu:

Menu commands are explained above.

190

NetOp Guest

Registry Toolbar

If the

Registry

management tool is selected, this

Toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

View Menu

Toolbar

command:

New: Click this button or select the Registry Menu

New

command to show the

New

submenu.

Delete: Select a

keys pane key folder or a values pane value record and click this button or

select the

Registry Menu

Delete

command to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting the selected key or value record. You cannot delete predefined sub trees and

(default) value records.

Caution: Deleting a key will delete all of its sub keys.

Find: Click this button or select the

Registry Menu

Find

command to show the

Find

window.

Import: Click this button or select the

Registry Menu

Import

command to show an Import

Registry File window like a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Registration

Files (*.reg) to open a registration file to import the registration file specifications into the

Host computer registry.

Extreme Caution: Importing a registration file will overwrite any matching registry keys and value records. If imported keys and value records and other keys and value records mismatch, the registry will become corrupted to make the Host computer unusable.

Export: Select a

keys pane key and click this button or select the

Registry Menu

Export

command to show an Export Registry File window like a Windows Save As window that specifies Files of type: Registration Files (*.reg) to specify the path and name of a file that will contain the keys and value records of the selected key branch.

Modify: Select a

values pane value record and click this button or select the

Registry Menu

Modify

command to show the value type matching Edit <Value type> window to modify

value data. You cannot modify the (default) value record (value not set) value data.

Copy Key Name: Select a keys pane key and click this button or select the

Registry Menu

Copy Key Name

command to copy the registry path and name of the selected key to the clipboard.

Refresh: Click this button, select the Registry Menu

Refresh

command or press F5 to

retrieve new data from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel content.

Add to Favorites: Select a key and click this button or select the

Registry Menu

Add to

Favorites

command to show the

Add to Favorites

window.

<Favorites>: By default, the field of this drop-down box will be empty. The drop-down box list will contain your favorite keys (initially none). Select a favorite key in the list to show it in the field to show this favorite key in the

keys

pane.

191

NetOp Guest

3.6.6.7.5 Services

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

Services

command to show Host

computer services in the

Display Panel :

Note: You can manage services only on Windows NT+ (2003, XP, 2000 and NT) computers. The

Services

command will be enabled only if the Host computer runs on a Windows NT+ operating system. The

Services

command will be disabled if the Host does not have the right to manage Host computer services. To assign required rights to the Host, run it as a user with required rights, see

Management .

The

Extended

tab will in a left column show the selected service name, hotspots that enable its available

actions and its description. The alternative

Standard

tab will show only the table:

The table will contain records of available services with these column contents:

192

NetOp Guest

·

Name: Service icon and name.

· Description: Service description.

· Status: Started, Stopped or Paused.

·

Startup Type: Automatic, Manual or Disabled.

· Log On As: LocalSystem, NT AUTHORITY/LocalService, NT AUTHORITY/NetworkService or <User name>.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

This section includes these sections:

·

Services Menu

·

Services Toolbar

·

Service Installation

·

Service Properties

Services Menu

If the

Services

management tool is selected, in the

Menu Bar select Services, press ALT+S or right-click in

the

Display Panel to show this menu:

Add... Ctrl+N: Select this command, press CTRL+N or click the Services Toolbar

Add

button to show the

Service Installation wizard.

Remove Del: Select a record and select this command, press DELETE or click the

Services Toolbar

Remove

button to show a confirmation window to confirm removing it.

Caution: Removing a service may affect dependent services, see

Dependencies Tab . If you remove a

service of a running application, the service will become Stopped and Disabled. When the application is unloaded, the record will be removed.

Start: Select this command or click the

Services Toolbar

Start/Resume

button to start the selected service.

Stop: Select this command or click the

Services Toolbar

Stop

button to stop the selected service.

Caution: Stopping a service may affect dependent services, see

Dependencies Tab .

Pause: Select this command or click the Services Toolbar

Pause

button to pause the selected service.

Caution: Pausing a service may affect dependent services, see

Dependencies Tab

.

Resume: Select this command or click the Services Toolbar

Start/Resume

button to resume the selected

service.

193

NetOp Guest

Restart: Select this command or click the Services Toolbar

Restart

button to stop and start the selected service.

Caution: Restarting a service may affect dependent services, see Dependencies Tab .

Refresh: Select this command or click the

Services Toolbar Refresh button to retrieve new information from

the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel contents.

Properties: Select a record and select this command or double-click a record to show the service

Properties

window.

Services Toolbar

If the

Services

management tool is selected, this

Toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

View Menu

Toolbar

command:

Add: Click this button, select the

Services Menu

Add

command or press CTRL+N to show the

Service

Installation

wizard.

Remove: Select a record and click this button, select the Services Menu

Remove

command or press

DELETE to show a confirmation window to confirm removing the record.

Caution: Removing a service may affect dependent services, see

Dependencies Tab

. If you remove a service of a running application, the service will become Stopped and Disabled. When the application is unloaded, the record will be removed.

Start/Resume: Click this button or select the

Services Menu

Start

or

Resume

command to start or resume the selected service.

Stop: Click this button or select the

Services Menu

Stop

command to stop the selected service.

Caution: Stopping a service may affect dependent services, see Dependencies Tab .

Pause: Click this button or select the

Services Menu

Pause

command to pause the selected service.

Caution: Pausing a service may affect dependent services, see

Dependencies Tab

.

Restart: Click this button or select the

Services Menu

Restart

command to stop and start the selected

service.

Caution: Restarting a service may affect dependent services, see Dependencies Tab .

Refresh: Click this button, select the Services Menu

Refresh

command or press F5 to retrieve new

data from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel

contents.

194

NetOp Guest

Service Installation

If the

Services

management tool is selected, click the Services Toolbar

Add

button or select the

Services

Menu

Add

command to show this first Service Installation wizard window:

Service Name: []: Specify in this field the service name.

Service Display Name: []: Specify in this field the name by which the service shall be displayed.

Click Next to show this window:

Service Executable File Location: []: Specify in this field the Host computer path and name of the service executable file.

Click Next to show this window:

195

NetOp Guest

The options in this window are explained for the

Properties window

Log On Tab .

Click Next to show this window:

Select one of these options:

¤ Automatic: Start this service automatically, typically when the operating system starts (default selection).

¡ Manual: Start this service manually.

¡ Disabled: Disable starting this service.

þ Start service after installation: Leave this box checked to start this service after its installation (default: checked). If Disabled is selected above, the service will not start.

Finish: Click this button to install the service on the Host computer to show its record in the

Display Panel

.

196

NetOp Guest

Service Properties

If the

Services

management tool is selected, double-click a service record or select a service record and

select the Services Menu

Properties

command to show this window:

It enables viewing and changing Host computer service properties on these tabs:

·

General Tab

·

Log On Tab

·

Dependencies Tab

After making changes on the tabs, click OK to apply changes.

Caution: Do not change Host computer service properties unless you know the consequences of the changes. Keep notes of changes to enable restoring service properties if changes cause an unexpected Host computer behaviour.

197

This is the

Service Properties

window General tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies the general properties of the selected record Host computer service.

Service Name: Will show the service name.

Display Name: []: Will show the name by which the service is shown.

Description: []: Will show any description of the service.

Path to Executable: []: Will show the Host computer path to the service executable file.

Startup Type: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected service startup type. The drop-down box list contains the options Automatic, Manual and Disabled. Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

Note: If you select Disabled, a Started service will keep running. If Disabled, you can Resume a Paused service but you cannot Start a Stopped service.

Service Status: Will show the service status (Started, Paused or Stopped).

Start: If enabled, click this button to start the service.

Stop: If enabled, click this button to stop the service.

Pause: If enabled, click this button to pause the service.

Resume: If enabled, click this button to resume the service.

Caution: Stopping or pausing a service may affect dependent services, see

Dependencies Tab .

Start Parameters: []: This field will be enabled if the service is Stopped. Specify in this field any command line parameters that shall apply when starting the service.

198

NetOp Guest

Note: Specified Start Parameters will not be saved. One backslash (\) will be interpreted as an ESCAPE character. Specify two backslashes for each parameter backslash.

This is the

Service Properties

window Log On tab:

It specifies the log on properties of the selected record Host computer service.

Log On As: Select one of these options:

¤ Local System Account: Select this option to make the selected record Host computer service log on as a local system account that has extensive rights on the Host computer but no rights on other computers

(typically the default selection).

þ Allow Service to Interact with the Desktop: Leave this box checked to allow the service to show user interaction windows on the desktop (typically checked).

¡ This Account: [][Browse...]: Select this option to make the selected Host computer service log on as a user account. Click Browse to show this window:

199

NetOp Guest

List Names From: []: The list of this drop-down box will contain the names of domains recognized by the

Host computer. Select a name in the list to show it in the field.

Groups and Users: []: This pane will show records of users recognized by the domain shown in the List

Names From drop-down box field in a table with these column contents:

·

User Name: Windows logon user name.

· Full Name: Windows user full name, if available.

· Description: Windows user description, if available.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Double-click a record to add it to the Added Users pane below.

Added Users: []: This pane can contain only one record. To remove it from the pane, double-click it.

Click OK to close the window to specify the Added Users pane record user name in the Service Properties

window Log On tab This Account field.

Alternatively, specify the user name in the This Account field.

Password: []: Specify in this field the password that shall be used with the user name specified in the This

Account field. Keyboard entries will show as asterisks (*):

Confirm Password: []: Re-specify the password in this field for confirmation.

Note: To use the Local Service account, in the This Account field specify NT AUTHORITY\LocalService. To use the Network Service account, in the This Account field specify NT AUTHORITY\NetworkService. Do not specify a password for these accounts.

200

This is the

Service Properties

window Dependencies tab:

NetOp Guest

It shows in the upper pane Host computer system components on which the selected record service depends and in the lower pane Host computer system components that depend on the selected record service. If there are dependencies, the pane background will be white, otherwise gray. You cannot change dependencies on this tab.

Caution: If system components depend on the selected record service, the Host computer may not function properly if the properties of the service are changed.

3.6.6.7.6 Shared Folders

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

Shared Folders

command to show

Host computer shares, sessions and open files in the

Display Panel :

Note: The

Shared Folders

command will be disabled if the Host does not have the right to manage Host

computer shared folders. To assign required rights to the Host, run it as a user with required rights, see

Management .

201

NetOp Guest

This section includes these sections:

·

Shared Folders Menu

·

Shared Folders Toolbar

·

Shares Tab

·

Sessions Tab

·

Open Files Tab

·

Share a Folder

·

Share Properties

Shared Folders Menu

If the

Shared Folders

management tool is selected, in the

Menu Bar select Shared Folders, press ALT+S or

right-click in the

Display Panel to show this menu:

Add... Ctrl+N: Showing the

Shares Tab

, select this command, press CTRL+N or click the Shared Folders

Toolbar

Add

button to

Share a Folder .

Remove Del: Select a record and select this command, press DELETE or click the

Shared Folders Toolbar

Remove

button to show a confirmation window to confirm removing the record share or disconnecting the

session or file user.

Note: Remove may cause loss of data to session or file users. Typically, you should not remove

Special

Shares

.

Refresh F5: Select this command, click the

Shared Folders Toolbar

Refresh

button or press F5 to retrieve

new information from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel contents.

Properties: Showing the

Shares Tab

, select a record and select this command, click the

Shared Folders

Toolbar

Properties

button or double-click a record to show the selected record share

Properties

window.

Shared Folders Toolbar

If the

Shared Folders

management tool is selected, this

Toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

View

Menu Toolbar command:

Add: Showing the

Shares Tab , click this button, select the

Shared Folders Menu

Add

command or press CTRL+N to

Share a Folder .

Remove: Select a record and click this button, select the Shared Folders Menu

Remove

command or

press DELETE to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting the record.

Note: Remove may cause loss of data to session or file users. Typically, you should not remove

Special Shares .

Refresh: Click this button, select the Shared Folders Menu

Refresh

command or press F5 to retrieve

new data from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel contents.

202

NetOp Guest

Properties: Showing the

Shares Tab , select a record and click this button, select the

Shared Folders

Menu

Properties

command or double-click the record to show the selected record share

Properties

window.

Shares Tab

This is the

Shared Folders Shares tab:

It shows Host computer shared resources as table records with these column contents:

· Share Name: Shared resource icon and name.

·

Folder Path: Directory path or resource description, if available.

· Type: Unknown or resource type name.

·

# Client Connections: Number of current connections from remote computers.

· Description: Shared resource description, if available.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

You can manage shared resources from the Shared Folders Menu and Shared Folders Toolbar .

Special Shares

For administrative and system use, the operating system automatically creates special shares as hidden resources, typically with $ as the last character in the share name.

Note: Typically, you should not delete or change special shares. If you delete or change special shares, they may become restored when the server service or the computer is restarted.

These special shares can be shown on the Shares tab:

<Drive letter>$: Enables administrators to connect to the root directory of a drive.

ADMIN$: Enables remote administration of a computer. Its path is always the path of the system root directory.

IPC$: Enables inter program communication by named pipes during remote administration and when viewing a computer's shared resources. It cannot be deleted.

NETLOGON: Required on domain controllers. If you remove it, domain client computers will lose functionality.

SYSVOL: Required on domain controllers. If you remove it, domain client computers will lose functionality.

PRINT$: Used during remote administration of printers.

FAX$: A server folder that stores temporary telefax files and telefax cover pages. It is used by clients when sending a telefax.

203

NetOp Guest

Sessions Tab

This is the

Shared Folders Sessions tab:

It will show Host computer shared folder sessions as table records with these column contents:

· User: Session user icon and Windows logon name.

· Computer: Session computer name or address.

·

Type: Session computer operating system type.

· Transport: Session communication device specification.

· # Open Files: Number of session open files.

·

Connected Time: Session time in format HH:MM:SS (H=Hour digit, M=Minute digit, S=Second digit).

· Idle Time: Time since last session user action in format HH:MM:SS (H=Hour digit, M=Minute digit,

S=Second digit).

· Guest: Will show Yes if the session user is logged on to Windows by a Guest account with typically very limited rights. Will show No if not.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

You can manage sessions from the

Shared Folders Menu and Shared Folders Toolbar

.

Open Files Tab

This is the

Shared Folders Open Files tab:

It will show Host computer shared folder open files as table records with these column contents:

· Open File: File icon, path and name.

· Accessed By: File session user Windows logon name.

·

# Locks: File number of locks.

· Mode: File permission type.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

You can manage open files from the

Shared Folders Menu and Shared Folders Toolbar .

204

NetOp Guest

Share a Folder

If the

Shared Folders

management tool is selected, showing the

Shares Tab

click the

Shared Folders

Toolbar

Add

button, select the Shared Folders Menu

Add

command or press CTRL+N or to show this window:

Click Next to show this window:

Computer name: []: Will show the name of the Host computer.

Folder path: []: Specify in this field the Host computer path of a folder that shall be shared.

Click Next to show this window:

205

NetOp Guest

Share name: []: Will show the share name, by default the folder name specified in the previous wizard window. You can edit the share name.

Note: If you use $ as the last character of the share name, the shared folder will be hidden to not appear to a browsing network user. Network users can map a drive to a hidden shared folder.

Share path: []: Will show the share path as specified in the previous wizard window.

Description: In this field, you can specify a share description that will be shown in the Description column on the

Shares Tab .

Finish: Click this button to end the Share a Folder Wizard to add the share record on the

Shares Tab .

Tip: To create share permissions, double-click the record to show the Properties

window.

Share Properties

If the

Shared Folders

management tool is selected, showing the

Shares Tab

double-click a record or select a record and click the

Shared Folders Toolbar

Properties

button or select the

Shared Folders Menu

Properties

command to show this window:

206

NetOp Guest

It contains a

General

tab and, if permissions can be assigned to the share, a Share Permissions tab.

This

General

tab specifies general share properties.

207

NetOp Guest

Share name: []: Will show the share name that you cannot change in this window.

Folder path: []: Will show the share path or resource specification that you cannot change in this window.

Description: []: Will show the share description that will be disabled with certain Special Shares

. If enabled, you can change the field contents.

User limit: For some shares, the options in this section are disabled. If enabled, select one of these options:

¤ Maximum allowed: Allow the maximum available number of simultaneous users of the share (default selection).

¡ Allow this number of users: []: Select this option to limit the number of simultaneous users of the share.

The spin box will show the allowed number of users (default: 1). Click the up/down buttons to adjust the number or specify the number in the spin box.

Note: The maximum available number of users may be limited by the applicable software license.

This

Share Permissions

tab specifies share permissions.

Group or user names: []: This pane will show groups and users as table records with these column contents:

· User Name: Group or user icon and name.

· Full Name: User full name, if available.

·

Description: Group or user description, if available.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Add…: Click this button to show the Select Users window to add groups and/or users.

Remove: Select a record in the pane and click this button to remove it.

Permissions: This section will specify the permissions of the group or user selected in the pane above.

Check boxes in the Allow column to grant permissions. Check boxes in the Deny column to deny permissions even if granted on the file system level:

208

NetOp Guest

·

Full Control: Change permissions and change file system level permissions.

· Change: Read permissions and add files and sub folders, change data in files and delete subfolders and files.

·

Read: View file and sub folder names, view data in files and run program files.

Note: Checking an upper box will check lower boxes. Share permissions apply only to network users. They do not apply to users that log on locally including terminal server users. Preferably, assign permissions to groups and add users to groups rather than assign identical permissions to multiple users. If you change

permissions for Special Shares

, the original permissions may be restored when the server service or the computer is restarted.

3.6.6.7.7 Inventory

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

Inventory

command to show the

Host computer inventory in the Display Panel :

Note: The

Inventory

command will be disabled if the Host computer does not run on a Windows operating system.

The Host computer inventory will be displayed like on the

NetOp Guest Window

Tab Panel

Inventory Tab

.

However, in

Remote Management the Host computer inventory information will not be stored on the Guest

computer and cannot be processed.

In the Menu Bar , select Inventory or press ALT+I to show this menu:

Refresh F5: Select this command, click the

Inventory Toolbar

Refresh

button or press F5 to retrieve new information from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel

contents.

This Toolbar

will be shown unless hidden from the View Menu

Toolbar

command:

Refresh: Click this button, select the Inventory Menu

Refresh

command or press F5 to retrieve new information from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel

contents.

209

NetOp Guest

3.6.6.7.8 Command Console

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

Command Console

command to show this window:

Select one of these options:

¤ Use Host account: Open the

Command Console with the rights of the Host (default selection).

Note: The Host will typically have the rights of the user logged on to the Host computer. The Host can

have the rights of another user specified on the Host

Program Options

window

Run As Tab

.

¡ Use this account information: Open the

Command Console with the rights of the account with these

computer logon credentials:

Logon Name: []: Specify in this field a Host computer domain recognized user name.

Password: []: Specify in this field the matching password. Characters will show as asterisks.

Domain: []: Specify in this field the matching domain name.

þ Load user profile: Leave this box checked to load the user profile of the specified account on the Host computer (default: checked).

Click OK to show the Host computer Command Prompt window in the

Display Panel

:

210

NetOp Guest

This enables you to specify commands that will execute on the Host computer.

In the Menu Bar , select Command Console or press ALT+C to show this menu:

Restart: Select this command or click the Command Console Toolbar

Restart

button to restart Command

Console to show the

Startup Information

window.

This Toolbar

will be shown unless hidden from the View Menu

Toolbar

command.

Restart: Click this button or select the Command Console Menu

Restart

command to restart Command

Console to show the

Startup Information

window.

3.6.6.7.9 System Control

Select the

Management Menu

or

Navigation Panel

Management

section

System Control

command to show these

Display Panel

contents:

They enable you to control the Host computer system status.

Current Host state

This section shows the Host computer user logon status:

Logged off/Logged on <Logged on user name>: Logged off indicates that no user is logged on to the Host computer. Logged on <Logged on user name> specifies the name of the user logged on to the Host computer.

Note: You can log on to the Host computer from a

Remote Control

session.

Action to perform

Select one of these actions to execute it when you click the

Display Panel

or

System Control Toolbar

Send

211

NetOp Guest

button or select the

System Control Menu

Send

command:

¤ Lock computer (Windows NT, 2000, XP only): Lock the Host computer (default selection, works only with

Windows 2003, XP, 2000 or NT Host computers).

¡ Log off user: Log off the Host computer user.

¡ Restart computer: Restart the Host computer.

¡ Shut down computer: Shut down the Host computer.

Options

In this section, you can specify a message to the Host computer user:

¨ Prompt user Timeout for prompt: [] seconds: Check the box to send a message to the Host computer user and enable the other section elements (default: unchecked). Specify in the spin box the number of seconds after showing the message the action shall execute (default: 1, range 1- 999).

Message to display: []: Specify in this pane up to four lines of message text.

¨ Allow user to cancel: Check this box to enable an Abort button by which the Host computer user can cancel the action (default: unchecked).

¨ Close open programs without saving data: Check this box to close open Host computer programs without saving data when executing the action (default: unchecked). If unchecked, Host computer programs will keep running if the Host computer is locked or the Host computer user is logged off.

Send: Click this button or the

System Control Toolbar

Send

button or select the System Control Menu

Send

command to execute the action specified in the

Action to perform section with the options specified in the

Options section and below.

If the Prompt user box is checked, a message like this will be shown on the Host computer screen:

The Time: display in format HH:MM:SS (H=Hour digit, M=Minute digit, S=Second digit) will count down to

00:00:00 before the action executes.

Note: You cannot cancel a sent System Control command. However, if the Host user message Abort button

is enabled, you can click it in a Remote Control session to cancel the action.

This section includes these sections:

·

System Control Menu

·

System Control Toolbar

212

NetOp Guest

System Control Menu

If the

System Control

management tool is selected, in the

Menu Bar select System Control, press ALT+S or

right-click in the

Display Panel to show this menu:

Refresh F5: Select this command, click the

System Control Toolbar

Refresh

button or press F5 to retrieve

new information from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel contents.

Send: Select this command or click the System Control Toolbar

Send

button or

Display Panel

Send

button to

execute the action specified in the

Display Panel .

System Control Toolbar

If the

System Control

management tool is selected, this

Toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

View

Menu

Toolbar

command:

Refresh: Click this button, select the

System Control Menu

Refresh

command or press F5 to

retrieve new data from the Host computer to refresh the

Display Panel contents.

Send: Click this button or the

Display Panel

Send

button or select the System Control Menu

Send

command to execute the action specified in the

Display Panel

.

3.6.6.8 NetOp Sessions

In the Navigation Panel NetOp Sessions section:

or in the

File Menu NetOp Sessions submenu:

- select a NetOp Session command to start or stop another NetOp session with the remote managed Host.

Navigation Panel command icons will show a red X if a session is running.

File Menu

commands will begin with Start if no session is running or Stop if a session is running.

If Host Guest Access Security does not allow the Guest to start a type of session, the command will be disabled, see

Allow Guest To

.

Start Audio Chat will be disabled if the Guest and Host computers are not both interactive audio enabled or if any of them is running another audio session including

Transfer Sound

.

213

NetOp Guest

3.6.6.9 Details

The

Navigation Panel Details section:

will show these details:

· Host ID

· Host computer IP or MAC address

· Guest communication profile name

·

Encryption type icon and name

·

Host computer operating system name

·

Remote Management

session duration in format HH:MM:SS (H=hour digit, M=Minute digit, S=Second digit)

You cannot execute any actions from this section.

3.6.7 Demonstrate

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can start a

Demonstrate

session

with a Host to show the Guest computer screen image on the Host computer.

The Guest can connect to start a

Demonstrate

session from the

Quick Connect Tab or from a

Phonebook

Tab or

History Tab record.

When connected, the Guest can start and end a

Demonstrate

session from a

Phonebook Tab

,

Quick

Connect Tab ,

Connections Tab

or

History Tab record or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox

Demonstrate

button.

This

Mask windows

window will be shown:

214

NetOp Guest

It enables you to mask Guest computer screen elements so that they will be shown as black rectangles in the

Host computer screen NetOp Demonstration window Guest computer screen image.

The Loaded applications pane will contain Guest computer loaded application elements that expand into application screen elements. All Guest computer screen elements except the Windows taskbar will be represented by an application screen element.

Note: The Guest computer screen desktop surface with icons is represented by the explorer.exe application

Program Manager item.

To mask/unmask a screen element, select it in the pane and click to mask and to unmask.

A masked element will be indicated by . If an application is masked, its unmasked screen elements will be masked as indicated by .

¨ New screen window warning: Check to show this

New window

window if a new screen element that does not belong to a masked application element will open on the Guest computer screen:

Click one of these buttons:

· Mask window: Click to open the screen element masking it.

·

Mask application: Click to open the screen element masking its application element.

· Do not mask: Click to open the screen element without masking.

Refresh: Click to refresh the pane contents with the changes that happened while the

Mask windows

window was shown.

OK: Click to apply closing the window and showing the NetOp Demonstration window on the selected Host

215

computer screen.

During a

Demonstrate

session, this toolbox will be shown on the Guest computer screen:

NetOp Guest

It has these buttons:

Stop demonstrate: Click or having selected a

Tab panel

Host record click the record context menu or

Connection

menu check marked

Demonstrate

command or the

Toolbar

orange background

Demonstrate

button to stop the

Demonstrate

session.

Mask windows: Click to show the

Mask windows

window.

3.7 Session Tools

This section explains these session tools:

·

Connection Properties

·

NetOp Marker Utility

·

NetOp Script

·

NetOp Screen Video

216

3.7.1 Connection Properties

This is the Guest Connection Properties window:

NetOp Guest

It specifies a range of properties that can be applied individually to Host connections to optimize them according to user preferences. It contains these tabs:

·

Connect Tab

·

Login Tab

·

Protect Item Tab

·

Startup Tab

·

Display Tab

·

Keyboard/Mouse Tab

·

Compression/Encryption Tab

·

Desktop Tab

·

Record Tab

·

Custom Tab

You can show the Connection Properties window from Tab Panel

tabs and the

Remote Control display:

·

Showing the

Phonebook Tab

, select the

Edit Menu or

Records Pane context menu

New Phonebook Entry

217

NetOp Guest

command or click the Toolbar

Phonebook Entry

button to show the all tabs Connection Properties window

with default selections to create a Phonebook Record

.

·

Showing the

Phonebook Tab

or History Tab , select a Host record and select the

Edit Menu

or record

context menu

Connection Properties

command or click the

Toolbar

Connection Properties

button to show

the all tabs Connection Properties window to view or edit the Host record connection properties.

·

Showing the

Quick Connect Tab , click the

Connection Properties

button to show a limited tabs Connection

Properties window that specifies the properties that apply to connections from the

Quick Connect Tab

to view or edit them.

· Showing the

Help Request Tab , select a Host record and select the

Edit Menu

or record context menu

Connection Properties

command or click the

Toolbar

Connection Properties

button to show a limited tabs

Connection Properties window to view or edit the Host record connection properties.

·

In the

Remote Control display, select the window

Title Bar menu

Connection Properties

command or click

the

Toolbar or Toolbox

Connection Properties

button to show a limited tabs Connection Properties window

in which you can change certain properties while the session runs.

3.7.1.1 Connect Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Connect tab:

It will be included only if you show the

Connection Properties

window from the

Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

. It specifies the connect properties of a Host record.

Host PC Information

Description: []: The contents of this field identifies the Host record. If you showed the

Connection Properties

218

NetOp Guest

window from

New Phonebook Entry

, the field will be empty. You can leave the field empty to automatically

specify the applicable Host

Name

or

Phone number/IP address

field contents in it when creating the Host

record. You can edit the field contents.

Phone number/IP address: []: This field will be included if the communication profile selected in the

Communication

section

Communication profile

drop-down box uses a

Point-to-Point or Gateway

or Network

Point-to-Point communication device. It must specify the Host telephone number or IP address if connecting

directly to the Host, otherwise the Host network connecting NetOp Gateway telephone number or IP address.

Name [(optional with Gateway)]: []: If the field label does not include (optional with Gateway), this field must

specify the name by which the Host will respond, see Networking

. If the field label includes (optional with

Gateway), this field can be empty to

Browse for Hosts , see

Gateway Connection , or specify the name by

which the Host will respond.

Comments: []: This field can specify a comment that will be shown in the

Tab Panel

tab records pane

Details

view

Comment

column (default: empty).

Communication

Communication profile: []: The field of this drop-down box list specifies the selected communication profile name (default: TCP/IP). The drop-down box list will contain available Guest

Communication Profiles

. Select a name in the list to specify it in the field.

Wake on LAN MAC address: []: In this field, you can specify the MAC address of the Host computer network card if Wake on LAN enabled to enable starting the Host computer by connecting to the Host, see

Execute

Command (default: empty).

219

3.7.1.2 Login Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Login tab:

NetOp Guest

It will be included unless you show the

Connection Properties

window from the

Remote Control display. It

specifies Host and Host network connecting Gateway logon credentials to connect without being prompted for logon credentials.

It has two tabs with identical contents:

Host login/Gateway login

Login name: []: Specify in this field the logon name, if required (default: empty).

Login password: []: Specify in this field the matching logon password, if required (default: empty).

Login domain: []: Specify in this field the name of the authenticating Windows domain or the name of the directory server on which user credentials are stored, if required (default: empty).

¨ Use current login credentials for Windows Security authentication: Check this box to log on by the

Windows logon user name, password and domain of the Guest computer user (default: unchecked).

220

3.7.1.3 Protect Item Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Protect Item tab:

NetOp Guest

It will be included only if you show the

Connection Properties

window from the

Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

. It enables you to protect a Host record and file by a password.

Password: []: Specify in this field a password (default: empty).

Confirm password: []: Re-specify in this field the password for confirmation (default: empty).

Note: Password characters will show as asterisks or dots. Leave fields empty to disable password protection.

If a Host record is password protected, this window will be shown when accessing it:

Specify the required password in the field. There is no limit to the number of password attempts.

221

3.7.1.4 Startup Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Startup tab:

NetOp Guest

It will be included unless you show the

Connection Properties

window from the

Remote Control display. It specifies Remote Control

session startup properties.

Host window startup size

Select one of these options:

¤ Windowed: Show the Host screen image in a

Remote Control window (default selection). If the Host

screen image has less pixels than the display panel, the Host screen image will be surrounded by black borders. If the Host screen image has more pixels than the display panel, the display panel will have scrollbars. If on the

Display Tab the option Fit window to Host screen is selected, the window may resize

up until its maximized size.

¡ Full screen: Show the Host screen image in

Remote Control full screen to cover the entire Guest computer

screen. If the Host screen image has less pixels than the Guest computer screen, the Host screen image will be surrounded by black borders. If the Host screen image has more pixels than the Guest computer screen, the Guest computer screen will have scrollbars.

¡ Maximized: Show the Host screen image in a maximized

Remote Control

window that covers the entire

Guest computer screen except the Windows taskbar. If the Host screen image has less pixels than the display panel, the Host screen image will be surrounded by black borders. If the Host screen image has more pixels than the display panel, the display panel will have scrollbars.

¡ Minimized: Show the

Remote Control window as a button in the Windows taskbar.

222

NetOp Guest

Remote control window startup size

¨ Enable: Check this box to enable this section’s elements and apply their values. Leave unchecked to apply the last shown

Remote Control window position and size (default: unchecked).

x: []: Specify in this field the horizontal pixels offset of the startup

Remote Control window upper left corner

from the Guest computer screen upper left corner (default: 0).

y: []: Specify in this field the vertical pixels offset of the startup Remote Control

window upper left corner from the Guest computer screen upper left corner (default: 0).

Width: []: Specify in this field the pixels width of the startup

Remote Control window (default: 0).

Height: []: Specify in this field the pixels height of the startup Remote Control

window (default: 0).

Actions

¨ Lock Host keyboard and mouse: Check this box to disable the Host computer keyboard and mouse at

startup, see also

Lock Keyboard and Mouse

button and

Lock Keyboard and Mouse

command (default:

unchecked).

¨ Blank Host display: Check this box to make the Host computer screen appear black to the Host user at

startup, see also

Blank Display

button and

Blank Display

command (default: unchecked).

¨ Transfer sound: Check this box to transfer Host computer application sound at startup, see also

Transfer

Sound

button and

Transfer Sound

command (default: unchecked).

¨ Suspend other Guests from connecting to Host: Check this box to deny further Guest connections to the

Host at startup, see also

Suspend Further Connections

button (default: unchecked).

223

3.7.1.5 Display Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Display tab:

NetOp Guest

It will always be included in the

Connection Properties

window. It specifies

Remote Control session Host

screen image display properties.

Host Window Fit

Select one of these options:

¤ Fit window to Host screen: Resize the

Remote Control window to fit the 1:1 scale Host screen image within its display panel. If the Host screen image has more pixels than the maximized Remote Control

window display panel, the display panel will have scrollbars (default selection).

¡ Fit Host screen to window: Scale the Host screen image to fit within the

Remote Control window display

panel.

¡ Do not fit: Display the part of the 1:1 scale Host screen image that will fit within the Remote Control

window display panel. If the Host screen image has less pixels than the display panel, it will be surrounded by black borders. If the Host screen image has more pixels than the display area, the display panel will have scrollbars.

Limit number of colors in bitmap mode

Note: This section will be disabled if the

Connection Properties

window is shown from the

Remote Control

display.

Select one of these options:

224

NetOp Guest

¤ No, use actual number of colors: Shows true colors, consumes most transmission bandwidth (default selection)

¡ Max 256 colors: Shows reduced palette colors, consumes less transmission bandwidth.

¡ Max 16 colors: Shows crude colors, consumes little transmission bandwidth.

¡ Max 2 colors: Shows black and white colors, consumes minimum transmission bandwidth.

DOS Box Font

In

Command Mode , command prompt window characters will by default be shown using the Guest computer

system default font.

þ System default: Uncheck this box to enable selecting another font (default: checked).

Select Font...: Click this button to show the Windows Font window to select the command prompt window font.

3.7.1.6 Keyboard/Mouse Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Keyboard/Mouse tab:

It will always be included in the

Connection Properties

window. It specifies

Remote Control session keyboard

and mouse control properties.

Keyboard

Select one of these options:

¤ Remote keyboard (Send all keystrokes to Host): Send all Guest computer keystrokes to the Host

225

NetOp Guest

computer (default selection).

¡ Local keyboard (Don’t send special keystrokes): Send Guest computer keystrokes except

Send

Keystrokes

keystroke combinations to the Host computer. Send

Send Keystrokes

keystroke combinations

to the Guest computer.

¡ No keyboard control: Send all Guest computer keystrokes to the Guest computer.

¨ Use Guest keyboard layout: If Guest and Host computer keyboard layouts are different, some Guest computer keystrokes may come out wrong on the Host computer. To avoid this, check this box (default: unchecked).

¨ Don’t transfer Host Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Insert and Caps Lock: With some display adapters, enabling these Host computer keyboard options may cause the Guest computer keyboard lights to flash. To avoid this, check this box (default: unchecked).

Mouse

Select one of these options:

¤ Remote mouse (send all mouse events): Send all Guest computer mouse events (clicks, drags and moves) to the Host computer (default selection).

¡ Local mouse (Only send clicks and drags): Send only Guest computer mouse clicks and drags to the Host computer to save transmission bandwidth.

¡ No mouse control: Send no Guest computer mouse events to the Host.

¨ Display Host mouse movements: Check this box to move the Guest computer mouse pointer in concert with Host computer mouse pointer movements (default: unchecked).

Note: To suppress Host computer induced Guest computer mouse pointer movements, press CTRL.

226

3.7.1.7 Compression/Encryption Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Compression/Encryption tab:

NetOp Guest

It will always be included in the

Connection Properties

window. It specifies data transmission properties.

Compression level

NetOp can compress transmitted data to speed up transmission across slow communication links. However, data compression takes time.

Select one of these options:

¤ Automatic: Selects compression based on the properties of the used

Communication Profile . In most

cases, this will provide the fastest transmission (default selection).

¡ No compression: Typical selection for fast communication links.

¡ Low: Typical selection for medium fast communication links.

¡ High: Typical selection for slow communication links.

Host screen transfer

Note: This section will be disabled if the

Connection Properties

window is shown from the

Remote Control

display.

Select one of these options:

¤ Transfer Host screen as commands: Typically faster, but with some Host computer display adapters some

Host screen image details may be lost or corrupted (default selection).

227

NetOp Guest

¡ Transfer Host screen as bitmap: Typically slower, but transfers Host screen image details correctly.

¨ Disable accelerated bitmap transfer: Accelerated bitmap transfer is by default used between version 7.6

+ NetOp modules. Check this box to disable accelerated bitmap transfer in the unlikely event that it causes problems (default: unchecked).

Cache

Note: This section will be disabled if the

Connection Properties

window is shown from the

Remote Control

display. Total NetOp cache memory sharing and size is specified on the

Program Options

window

Cache

Tab.

Command Mode Host screen transfer stores the screen image in cache memory and transfers only image

changes to save transmission bandwidth and optimize update speed.

Cache size: []: The field of this drop-down box shows the selected cache memory size option (default:

Automatic). The drop-down box list contains the options Automatic and values from None to 10240 kb.

Automatic will select the cache memory size based on the properties of the used

Communication Profile . In

most cases, this will provide the optimum. Select another option in the list to show it in the field.

Preferred Encryption Type []: The field of this drop-down box will show the encryption type preferred by the

Guest (default: NetOp 6.x/5.x Compatible). The drop-down box list contains the names of available encryption types, see the

Program Options

window

Encryption Tab . Select an encryption type in the list to

show it in the field to prefer it.

If the preferred encryption type is enabled on Guest and Host, it will be applied.

If NetOp 6.x/5.x Compatible is preferred and not enabled on Guest and Host, this message will be shown when connecting:

In this case, select another preferred encryption type.

If another encryption type is preferred and this encryption type is not enabled on the Host, an encryption type that is enabled on both of Guest and Host will be applied.

If no common encryption type is enabled on Guest and Host, this message will be shown:

In this case, enable additional encryption types on the

Program Options

window

Encryption Tab to achieve a

match.

Note: The icon of the encryption type used in a Remote Control

session will be shown in the window

Status

Bar

.

228

3.7.1.8 Desktop Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Desktop tab:

NetOp Guest

It will always be included in the

Connection Properties

window. It specifies

Remote Control session Host

computer desktop features transfer properties.

Optimize screen transfer

Advanced Host computer desktop features will slow down Command Mode Host screen transfer and are

typically unimportant to the Guest user. Therefore, NetOp by default transfers the Host screen image without advanced desktop features. If unacceptable, select which advanced desktop features to transfer.

Select one of these options:

¤ Always: Always transfer without advanced desktop features (default selection).

¡ Only when high compression: Transfer without advanced desktop features only with high compression,

see Compression/Encryption Tab .

¡ Never: Never transfer without advanced desktop features.

Optimization parameters

Select one of these options:

¤ Full optimization: Transfer without the desktop features listed below (default selection).

¡ Custom optimization: Enable the Custom options section below to uncheck selected boxes to enable transfer of selected advanced desktop features.

229

Custom options

þ Disable wallpaper

þ Disable screen saver

þ Disable animation gimmicks

þ Disable full window drag

þ Disable Active Desktop

By default, all boxes are checked.

3.7.1.9 Record Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Record tab:

NetOp Guest

It will always be included in the

Connection Properties

window. It selects

Remote Control

session recording.

¨ Record remote control session: Check this box to record a

Remote Control

session (default: unchecked).

Note: This section will be disabled if the

Connection Properties

window is shown from the

Remote Control

display. Recording a

Remote Control session will create a record on the

Recordings Tab . Checking the

Program Options

window

Recording Tab

Enforce recording box will record Remote Control sessions

regardless of the selection on this tab. Recording will reduce

Remote Control session transfer speed.

230

3.7.1.10 Custom Tab

This is the Guest

Connection Properties

window Custom tab:

NetOp Guest

It will be included only if you show the

Connection Properties

window from the

Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

. It specifies the properties of a custom application command.

Description []: Specify in this field a custom application name that will be added as an command to the Host record context menu (default: empty).

Command line [][Browse...]: Specify in this field the custom application command line (program file path, name and switches, default: empty). Click Browse to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of

type: Programs to open a program file to specify its path and name in the field.

3.7.2 NetOp Marker Utility

NetOp Marker Utility enables creating figure and text markers on top of the NetOp Host computer screen image and magnifying a section of the screen image.

Note: The NetOp Marker Utility program VITAWRAP.EXE resides on the NetOp Host computer and marks and magnifies on top of the NetOp Host computer screen.

To load NetOp Marker Utility from NetOp Guest, click the

Remote Control

display

Toolbar or Toolbox

Marker

Mode

button to make it appear pressed in or select the Remote Control window

Title Bar

menu

Marker Mode

command to check mark it.

To unload NetOp Marker Utility from NetOp Guest, click the

Remote Control

display

Toolbar or Toolbox

Marker Mode

button to release it or select the check marked

Remote Control window

Title Bar

menu

Marker

231

NetOp Guest

Mode

command to uncheck it.

To load NetOp Marker Utility from NetOp Host, run (double-click) the VITAWRAP.EXE file that resides in the directory where NetOp Host is installed.

To unload NetOp Marker Utility from NetOp Host, use Windows Task Manager.

Loading NetOp Marker Utility will show this window on top of the NetOp Host computer screen:

It contains these elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Upper Toolbar

·

Lower Toolbar

·

Status Bar

3.7.2.1 Title Bar

This is the

NetOp Marker Utility

window title bar:

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

Click the title bar icon or right-click in the title bar to show this menu:

232

NetOp Guest

The top section contains window control commands, see Window Control . The other sections contain these

types of

NetOp Marker Utility

commands:

·

Figure marker commands, see Figure Markers

·

Text marker command, see Text Marker

· Magnifier command, see

NetOp Magnifier

·

Undo and Clear All commands, see Delete Markers

· Properties and Help commands, see

Marker Properties and Help

Select Minimize to minimize the NetOp Marker Utility window into this Host computer screen notification area

button:

Behind the pencil, the most recently enabled marker tool symbol will be shown.

Right-click this button to show this menu:

233

NetOp Guest

It contains a Restore command that will restore the

NetOp Marker Utility window and the same

NetOp

Marker Utility

commands as the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu .

3.7.2.2 Upper Toolbar

This is the

NetOp Marker Utility

window upper toolbar:

It contains these buttons:

Draw Ellipse: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Ellipse command to enable the ellipse tool, see

Figure

Markers .

Draw Rectangle: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Rectangle command to enable the rectangle tool, see

Figure Markers

.

Draw Arrow: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar

Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu

Arrow command to enable the arrow tool, see

Figure

Markers .

Draw Lines (Stop=MB2): Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

NetOp Marker

Utility Title Bar Menu

or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Line command to enable the sectioned line

tool, see

Figure Markers

.

Draw Freehand: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Freehand command to enable the freehand tool, see

Figure Markers

.

Show Free Text: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Text command to enable the

Text Marker

tool.

Show Magnifier: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu

Magnifier command to show the NetOp Magnifier

window.

Undo: Click this button or select the NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility

Button Menu

Undo command to delete the most recently selected marker, see Delete Markers .

234

NetOp Guest

Clear All: Click this button or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility

Button Menu Clear All command to delete all markers, see

Delete Markers .

3.7.2.3 Lower Toolbar

This is the

NetOp Marker Utility

window lower toolbar:

It contains these buttons:

Select Font: Click this button or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker

Utility Button Menu

Font command to show the Windows Font window to select a text marker

font, see Marker Properties and Help .

Select Color: Click this button or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker

Utility Button Menu

Color command to show the Windows Color window to select a marker color, see

Marker Properties and Help .

Select Pen Thickness: Click this button to show a line width drop-down box or select the NetOp

Marker Utility Title Bar Menu

or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Line Width command to select

a figure marker or text marker frame line width, see Marker Properties and Help .

Help: Click this button or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility

Button Menu

Help command to open NetOp Host Help on the NetOp Marker Utility topic, see

Marker Properties and Help .

3.7.2.4 Status Bar

This is the

NetOp Marker Utility

window status bar:

It will show a hint to the mouse pointer position button or highlighted menu command.

3.7.2.5 Figure Markers

To select a figure marker tool with the mouse, in the Upper Toolbar

click the figure marker button to make it appear pressed in or in the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu

select the figure marker command to change the mouse pointer into a pencil with the figure marker shape.

To enable a figure marker tool from the keyboard, place the mouse pointer on the active

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar figure marker button and press F9 to change the mouse pointer into a pencil with the

figure marker shape. Alternatively, while the

NetOp Marker Utility

window is active press ALT+SPACE to

show the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu and press the figure marker command first character keyboard

key or highlight the figure marker command and press ENTER.

To create a figure marker with the mouse, drag (sectioned line: click). To end a sectioned line, right-click.

To draw a figure marker from the keyboard, move the figure marker with the arrow keys. Press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage or section a line. To end a sectioned line, press F10.

To move a marker or change its appearance, move the mouse pointer to it to show an arrow-pointed +.

To move, drag or press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage.

To change appearance, right-click or press F10 to show this menu:

235

NetOp Guest

Color: Select this command or click the marker and click the Lower Toolbar Select Color button to show the

Windows Color window to change the marker color selection (default: Red).

Line Width: Select this command to expand it into a selection of numbers of pixels or click the marker and click the

Lower Toolbar Select Pen Thickness button to show a drop-down box with a selection of line widths

to change the marker line width selection (default: 2 pixels).

Undo: Select this command to delete the selected marker.

Clear All: Select this command to delete all markers.

Click outside the menu or press F10 to close the menu.

To change figure marker tool properties, right-click or press F10 to show this menu:

This menu is similar to the Figure Marker Menu but has Unselect instead of Undo.

Unselect: Select this command, press ESCAPE, click the

Upper Toolbar pressed in figure marker button to

release it or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu

figure marker command to unselect the figure marker tool to restore the normal mouse pointer.

Note: Selecting another marker tool will unselect the selected marker tool.

3.7.2.6 Text Marker

To select the text marker tool with the mouse, in the

Upper Toolbar

click the

Show Free Text

button to make

it appear pressed in or in the NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu

or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu select

Text to change the mouse pointer into an angle that indicates a text marker box corner.

To select the text marker tool from the keyboard, place the mouse pointer on the active

NetOp Marker Utility

window Upper Toolbar

Show Free Text

button and press F9 to make the button appear pressed in and

change the mouse pointer into an angle that indicates a text marker box corner.

Alternatively, while the

NetOp Marker Utility

window is active press ALT+SPACE to show the

NetOp Marker

Utility Title Bar Menu and press the T key or highlight the Text command and press ENTER.

To unselect the text marker tool, press ESCAPE or use one of the selection procedures explained above to release the Show Free Text button and restore the normal mouse pointer.

Note: Selecting another marker tool will unselect the selected marker tool.

When the text marker tool is selected:

·

To create a text marker with the mouse, drag a dotted rectangle to show the

Text Marker window.

236

NetOp Guest

·

To create a text marker from the keyboard, move the text marker tool with the arrow keys. Press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys to create a dotted rectangle and press INSERT to disengage and show this window:

This window specifies the text marker contents and appearance.

In the pane, specify the text marker text. Right-click to show an edit menu.

Use frame: []: The field of this drop-down box will by default show No to create no frame around the text marker. The drop-down box list contains No and a selection of frame line widths. Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

Font: Click this button to show the Windows Font window to change the text marker font and color selection

(default: Arial Bold 30pt Red).

OK: Click this button to close the Text Marker window to show the text marker.

To move a marker or change its appearance, move the mouse pointer to it to show an arrow-pointed +.

To move, drag or press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage.

To change appearance, right-click or press F10 to show this menu:

This menu is similar to the Figure Marker Menu but has Font instead of Color.

Font: Select this command to show the Windows Font window to change the text marker font and color selection (default: Arial Bold 30pt Red).

Note: This menu will include a Line Width command only if a framed text marker is selected.

3.7.2.7 NetOp Magnifier

To show the

NetOp Magnifier

window with the mouse, in the

Upper Toolbar

click the

Show Magnifier

button to make it appear pressed in or in the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button

Menu

select Magnifier.

To show the

NetOp Magnifier

window from the keyboard, place the mouse pointer on the active

NetOp

Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

Show Magnifier

button and press F9 to make the button appear pressed

in.

237

NetOp Guest

Alternatively, while the

NetOp Marker Utility window is active press ALT+SPACE to show the

NetOp Marker

Utility Title Bar Menu and press M or highlight the Magnifier command and press ENTER.

If the mouse pointer is outside this window, the window pane will show a magnified image of the mouse pointer surroundings.

To move the window, drag its title bar or place the mouse pointer in the title bar, press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage.

To resize the window, drag its sides or corners or position the mouse pointer on a side or corner to show a double arrow, press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage.

To change the pane image magnification, drag the right side scroll bar button or place the mouse pointer above or below it and press F9. Its top position will show a 1:1 scale image.

Right-click in the window or place the mouse pointer in the window and press F10 to show this menu:

Close: Select this command or click the

Upper Toolbar

Show Magnifier

button appearing pressed in to release it to close the NetOp Magnifier window.

Copy Ctrl+C: Select this command or press CTRL+C to copy the pane contents to the clipboard.

Refresh F5: The pane image will refresh when the mouse pointer is moved but by default not refresh if the mouse pointer is not moved. Select this command or press F5 to refresh the pane image.

Refresh Rate…: Select this command to show this window:

¨ Enable refresh timer: Check this box to refresh the pane image if the mouse pointer is not moved (default: unchecked).

Interval (tenths of seconds): []: Specify in this field a number to refresh at the specified interval (default: 20).

3.7.2.8 Delete Markers

To delete markers, click one of these

Upper Toolbar buttons or select the matching

NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu command:

Undo

: Delete the most recently selected marker.

Clear All

: Delete all markers.

Note: When NetOp Marker Utility is unloaded, all markers and any

NetOp Magnifier

window will disappear.

238

NetOp Guest

3.7.2.9 Marker Properties and Help

Specify marker properties and show help from the Lower Toolbar buttons or the matching

NetOp Marker

Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu commands:

Select Font

/Font: Click this button or select this command to show the Windows Font window to select a

Text

Marker font and color (default: Arial Bold 30pt Red).

Select Color

/Color: Click this button or select this command to show the Windows Color window to select a

figure marker color (default: Red).

Select Pen Thickness

/Line Width: Click this button to show a line width drop-down box or select this command to expand it into a selection of numbers of pixels to select a figure marker or text marker frame line width (default: 2 pixels).

Help

: Click this button or select this command to open the NetOp Host Help system on the NetOp Marker

Utility topic.

3.7.3 NetOp Script

A NetOp script is a user specified command structure that can execute a NetOp task, typically an unattended scheduled file transfer.

To create a NetOp script, in the

Edit Menu or the

Script Tab

Records Pane context menu select

New Script

or in the

NetOp File Manager window

Toolbar click the

Script

button or select the NetOp File Manager

window Options Menu Script

command to show the

Script

window.

To view or edit an existing NetOp script, on the

Script Tab select the script record and select the

Edit Menu

or Records Pane

context menu

Edit Script

command to show the script in the

Script

window:

It creates and edits a NetOp script in a graphical structure.

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

239

NetOp Guest

Script File

Filename []: This field will show the script file path and name (default: empty). To create a NetOp script, specify the script file name in the field. If you do not specify a file extension and a path, the script file will get the extension dws and reside in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\

<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest\script. If you create a new script, you will be prompted for confirmation. Click Yes to show the

Global Settings

window.

Open Script: Click this button to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: NetOp Script

Files (*.dws) to open a NetOp script file in the window to show its path and name in the Filename field.

Comment []: This field can contain a comment that will be shown in the Script Tab

Records Pane Comment

column.

Save Script: Click this button to save a new or edited script.

If a script is opened in the window, the upper pane will show the script contents in an expandable graphical tree structure, see

Test a NetOp Script

(default: empty).

If a script is opened in the window, the lower pane will show debug messages, see

Test a NetOp Script

(default: empty).

Add: Click this button to add a script command in the upper pane under the selected script command, see

Commands

.

Edit: Select a script command In the upper pane and click this button to show the matching editing window,

see Commands .

Run Script: Click this button to run the script, see

Test a NetOp Script

.

Delete: Select a script command in the upper pane and click this button to delete it and the command sub tree under it.

3.7.3.1 Global Settings

This is the Guest NetOp Script Global Settings window:

It specifies the

NetOp Script

global settings that will apply as default settings for the following script

Commands

.

240

NetOp Guest

It will be shown when you create a

NetOp Script . To edit the global settings of an opened NetOp Script , in

the

Script

window upper pane select the Global Settings element and click

Edit

. The window has these tabs:

·

General Tab

·

Transfer Tab

·

Overwrite/Delete Tab

·

Advanced Tab

Note:

Global Settings in the Script File

explains how global settings will appear in the script file.

3.7.3.1.1 General Tab

This is the Guest NetOp Script

Global Settings

window General tab:

It specifies the global file transfer direction.

From: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the global source NetOp module name (default: Guest).

The drop-down box list contains the options Guest and Host. Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

To: []: This disabled field will show the From drop-down box unselected NetOp module name.

241

3.7.3.1.2 Transfer Tab

This is the Guest NetOp Script

Global Settings

window Transfer tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies global file transfer settings.

þ Use delta file transfer: Leave this box checked to compare source files with destination files and transfer only the difference between source files and destination files to save transmission bandwidth (default: checked).

þ Enable crash recovery: Leave this box checked to transfer files in a way that they can be recovered after a computer or network crash during transfer (default: checked).

242

3.7.3.1.3 Overwrite/Delete Tab

This is the Guest NetOp Script

Global Settings

window Overwrite/Delete tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies global overwrite and delete settings.

þ Allow overwriting/deleting existing files/folders: Leave this box checked to allow overwriting and deleting files and folders on the destination computer (default: checked).

þ Allow overwriting/deleting system files: Leave this box checked to allow overwriting and deleting system files on the destination computer (default: checked).

þ Allow overwriting/deleting read-only files: Leave this box checked to allow overwriting and deleting readonly files on the destination computer (default: checked).

þ Allow overwriting/deleting hidden files: Leave this box checked to allow overwriting and deleting hidden files on the destination computer (default: checked).

243

3.7.3.1.4 Advanced Tab

This is the Guest NetOp Script

Global Settings

window Advanced tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies global error handling and log file settings.

Error Handling

On communication error []: The field of this drop-down box specifies the action in case of a communication error. The drop-down box list contains these options:

·

Exit: End the script.

· Next Host: Proceed to the next Host specified in the script (default selection).

·

Retry 1 time: Retry the failed command once.

· Retry 2 times: Retry the failed command twice.

· etc.

· Retry 9 times: Retry the failed command 9 times.

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

On transfer error []: The field of this drop-down box specifies the action in case of a file transfer error. The drop-down box list contains these options:

·

Exit: End the script.

· Next Host: Proceed to the next Host specified in the script.

· Next File: Proceed to the next file specified in the script (default selection).

·

Retry 1 time: Retry the failed command once.

· Retry 2 times: Retry the failed command twice.

· etc.

·

Retry 9 times: Retry the failed command 9 times.

244

NetOp Guest

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

Log File

þ Generate log file: Leave this box checked to generate a log file when running the script (default: checked).

¨ Append if log exists: Check this box to append the log to an existing log file with the specified name

(default: unchecked). Leave unchecked to overwrite.

[<Log file path and name>][Browse]: This field will specify the log file path and name (default: SCRIPT.LOG).

Click Browse to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Log Files (*.log) to open a log file

to specify its path and name in the field. If no path is specified, the log file will reside in the NetOp

Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware

Data\NetOp Remote Control\Guest\.

Note: The script log file is explained in

Script Log

.

¨ Restart script when finished: Check this box to restart the script at script end (default: unchecked).

¨ Close Guest when finished: Check this box to unload NetOp Guest at script end (default: unchecked).

3.7.3.1.5 Global Settings in the Script File

NetOp Script

Global Settings will appear in the script file as explained in this table:

Setting

SET Copy=

SET Delta=

Value

G_H

H_G

No

SET CrashRecovery=

Yes

No

Yes

SET OverwriteExisting= No

Yes

SET OverwriteSystem= No

SET

OverwriteReadOnly=

Yes

No

Yes

SET OverwriteHidden= No

SET OnComError=

Overwrite/delete existing files.

Do not overwrite/delete system files.

Overwrite/delete system files.

Do not overwrite/delete read-only files.

Yes

Exit

Overwrite/delete read-only files.

Do not overwrite/delete hidden files.

Overwrite/delete hidden file.

On a communication error, end the script.

NextHost On a communication error, proceed to the next Host in the script.

<Number> On a communication error, retry connecting <Number> times (1 to 9).

SET OnError= Exit On a transfer error, end the script.

NextHost On a transfer error, proceed to the next Host in the script.

NextFile On a transfer error, proceed to the next file in the script.

<Number> On a transfer error, retry transferring <Number> times (1 to 9).

SET LogAppend=

SET Log=

SET AtEnd=

SET CloseGuest=

No

Yes

None

“<Log file path and name>”

None

Restart

No

Yes

Description

Transfer from Guest to Host.

Transfer from Host to Guest.

Do not use Delta file transfer.

Use Delta file transfer.

Do not enable crash recovery.

Enable crash recovery.

Do not overwrite/delete existing files.

Do not append a log in an existing log file.

Append a log in an existing log file.

Do not generate a script log.

Generate a script log in the specified log file.

Do not restart the script at script end.

Restart the script at script end.

Do not unload NetOp Guest at script end.

Unload NetOp Guest at script end.

245

NetOp Guest

3.7.3.2 Commands

To specify the first command of a

NetOp Script , in the Script window upper pane select the Global Settings

element and click

Add

to show this drop-down menu:

This menu contains script commands that can execute on the Guest:

Connect: Select this command to show the

Connect to Host

window to add a

Connect Command that will

connect to a Host.

Wait: Select this command to show the

Wait Dialog

window to add a

Wait Command that will delay script

execution.

Run: Select this command to show the

Run Program

window to add a Run Command that will run a program

on the Guest computer.

A

Connect

command will branch the script into commands that execute with or on the connected Host

computer or in case of a local

Connect

command on the Guest computer.

In the upper pane, click the [+] button before a Connect command to expand it and select the expanded

Connect command or a command below it and click

Add

to show this menu:

This menu contains script commands that can execute with a connected Host or a Guest connected locally to itself:

Copy to Delete: Select one of these commands to show a <File transfer> window to add a File Transfer

Command .

Wait: Select this command to show the

Wait Dialog

window to add a

Wait Command to delay script

execution.

Run: Select this command to show the

Run Program

window to add a Run Command to run a program on

the connected to computer.

Logoff to Send Message: Select one of these commands to add an

Action Command to execute an action on

the connected to computer.

Note:

Commands in the Script File

explains how commands will appear in the script file.

3.7.3.2.1 Connect Command

To add a Connect command to a

NetOp Script , in the

Script

window upper pane select Global Settings or the

command unbranched under Global Settings after which you want to connect to a Host or locally to the Guest

and click

Add

. In the

Guest Commands drop-down menu select

Connect

to show the

Connect to Host

246

NetOp Guest

window.

To edit a Connect command of an opened

NetOp Script , in the

Script

window upper pane select a Connect

command and click

Edit

to show the

Connect to Host

window:

This window adds or edits a Connect command.

Connect using: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected connect option. The drop-down box list contains these options:

·

Phonebook file: Connect to a Host by its NetOp phonebook file (default selection).

· Communication profile: Connect to a Host by a communication profile and a Host name and/or a Host computer telephone number or IP address.

·

Local: Connect locally to the Guest computer.

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

If you select Phonebook file, this will be shown below:

Phonebook file: [] [Browse]: Click Browse to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type:

NetOp Phonebook Files (*.dwc) to open a phonebook file to show its path and name in the field.

Alternatively, specify the path and name in the field.

If you select Communication profile, this will be shown below:

247

NetOp Guest

Communication profile []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected communication profile

(default: TCP/IP). The drop-down box list will contain available Guest Communication Profiles . Select one

in the list to show it in the field.

<Host connect information>: []: Specify Host connect information in one or two fields according to the communication profile selection above, see

Host Section

(default: empty). In a field in which you can specify an IP address, you can also specify an IP address range, e.g. 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.5, to connect to multiple Host computers from one script.

Logon name: []: Specify in this field any logon name required by the Host (default: empty).

Logon password: []: Specify in this field the matching password (default: empty).

Logon domain: []: Specify in this field the matching domain or directory server (default: empty).

¨ Use current logon credentials for Windows Security authentication: Check this box to log on to the Host by the Windows logon user credentials of the Guest computer user (default: unchecked).

If you select Local, no further specification is required.

Click OK to specify the added or edited Connect command in the

Script

window upper pane.

Note:

Commands in the Script File

explains how commands will appear in the script file.

3.7.3.2.2 Wait Command

To add a Wait command to a

NetOp Script , in the

Script

window upper pane select the command after which

you want to wait before continuing script execution and click

Add

. Select

Wait

to show the

Wait Dialog

window.

To edit a Wait command in an opened NetOp Script , in the

Script

window upper pane select a WAIT

command and click

Edit

to show the

Wait Dialog window:

248

NetOp Guest

This window adds or edits a Wait command.

Type: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected wait type. The drop-down box list contains these wait types:

·

Delay: Delay script execution for a specified time.

· Wait until: Wait until a specified date and time to continue script execution (default selection).

·

Repeat daily: Repeat script execution daily at a specified time.

· Repeat weekly on day: Repeat script execution weekly at a specified time on specified weekdays.

· Repeat monthly on day: Repeat script execution monthly at a specified time on specified weekdays.

·

Repeat monthly on date: Repeat script execution monthly at a specified time on specified dates.

Select a wait type in the list to show it in the field.

If you select Delay, this section will be shown below:

Delay: HH[]-MM[]-SS[]: Specify a delay between 00-00-00 and 23-59-59 (default: 12-00-00).

If you select Wait until, this section will be shown below:

Time: HH[]-MM[]-SS[] [AM/PM]: Specify a time of day between 00-00-00 AM and 11-59-59 PM (default:

12:00:00 AM).

Date: MM[]-DD[]-YYYY[]: Optionally, specify a date between 01-01-1900 and 12-31-2200 (default:

<Current date>).

Note: If you clear the Date fields, script execution will wait until the next occurrence of the time of day specified in the Time fields.

If you select one of the remaining wait types, this section will be shown below:

249

NetOp Guest

Time: HH[]-MM[]-SS[] [AM/PM]: Specify a time of day between 00-00-00 AM and 11-59-59 PM (default:

12:00:00 AM).

Select days...: This button will not be not included if you selected Repeat daily in the

Type

drop-down box.

Click this button to show one of these windows:

If you selected Repeat weekly on day in the Type drop-down box:

If you selected Repeat monthly on day in the

Type

drop-down box:

If you selected Repeat monthly on date in the

Type

drop-down box:

250

NetOp Guest

Click days or dates to give them a white frame to select them (default: (first) Monday or 1).

Note:

Commands in the Script File

explains how commands will appear in the script file.

3.7.3.2.3 Run Command

To add a Run command to a NetOp Script , in the

Script

window upper pane select the command after which

you want to run a program and click

Add

. Select

Run

to show the

Run Program

window.

Note: A Run command unbranched under Global Settings or under a local Connect command will execute on the Guest computer. A Run command under a Connect command other than a local Connect command will execute on the Host computer. The specified program file must reside on the computer on which it shall run.

To edit a Run command in an opened NetOp Script , in the

Script

window upper pane select a RUN

command and click

Edit

to show the

Run Program

window:

This window adds or edits a Run command.

If you are adding a Run command, the field will be empty. If you are editing a Run command, the field will show the program path and command. Specify or edit the program path and command. You can include command line switches.

Browse: Click this button to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Exe files (*.exe) to open an exe file to show its path and name in the field above.

Note: See also Run Program .

Timeout []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected timeout (default: 1 Min). The drop-down box

251

NetOp Guest

list contains timeouts from None to Never with from 5 Sec to 10 Min in between. None will cause script execution to proceed without waiting for program execution to complete. A specific timeout will cause a script error if program execution has not completed within the specified timeout. Never will cause script execution to wait for program execution to complete before proceeding.

Note: An invalid command specification will cause a script error, see

Test a NetOp Script .

Note:

Commands in the Script File

explains how commands will appear in the script file.

3.7.3.2.4 File Transfer Commands

To add a file transfer command to a

NetOp Script

, in the

Script

window upper pane select the command after

which you want to add a file transfer command and click

Add

. In the

Host Commands drop-down menu

select Copy, Move, Synchronize, Clone or Delete to show the matching <File transfer> window.

To edit a file transfer command in an opened NetOp Script

, in the upper pane select a file transfer command

and click

Edit

to show the matching <File transfer> window.

The Copy Dialog, Move Dialog, Synchronize Dialog and Clone Dialog windows have the same contents:

They have General, Transfer, Copy, Overwrite/Delete and Advanced tabs.

The Transfer, Overwrite/Delete and Advanced tabs have the same contents as the

Global Settings

window

Transfer

,

Overwrite/Delete

and

Advanced

tabs. On these tabs, you can modify the

Global Settings for each

file transfer command. The

Log File

section and the

Restart script when finished

and

Unload Guest when finished

check boxes are disabled.

These tabs have different contents:

·

General Tab

·

Copy Tab

The Delete window has different contents:

·

Delete

Note:

Commands in the Script File

explains how commands will appear in the script file.

252

General Tab

This is the

Copy Dialog

window General tab:

NetOp Guest

It specifies which folders and files shall be copied, moved, synchronized or cloned by a File Transfer

Command .

From

(Upper drop-down box) []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected source NetOp module name

(default: the

Global Settings

window

General Tab

From

section selection). The drop-down box list contains

the options Guest and Host. Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

(Lower field) []: If you are adding a file transfer command, this field will be empty. If you are editing a file transfer command, the field will show the source specification. Specify or edit the source. Use a file mask (a file name with wildcard characters like * signifying any characters) to specify multiple file names with common characters. The file mask *.* specifies a directory.

Note: A Synchronize or Clone command must specify a source directory.

Browse

Note: This section will be enabled only if the

From

section upper drop-down box field shows Guest.

Folders...: Click this button to show a Windows Browse for Folder window to select a source directory whose path and name (ending with *.*) will be shown in the lower field.

Files...: This button will be disabled if you are specifying a Synchronize or Clone command. Click it to show a

Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: All Files (*.*) to open a source file whose path and name will be shown in the lower field.

To

(Upper field) []: This disabled field will always show the

From

section upper drop-down box unselected option.

(Lower field) []: If you are adding a file transfer command, this field will be empty. If you are editing a file transfer command, the field will show the destination specification. Specify or edit the destination that will typically be a directory path ending with *.*. To rename a single transferred file, specify a destination file name.

253

NetOp Guest

Note: A Synchronize or Clone command must specify a destination directory.

Browse

Note: This section will be enabled only if the

From

section upper drop-down box field shows Host.

Folders...: Click this button to show a Windows Browse for Folder window to select a destination directory whose path ending with *.* will be shown in the lower field. Existing files in the destination directory with the same location and name as transferred files will be overwritten by transferred files, except in the case of unmodified synchronization where source and destination directory older files will be overwritten by newer files in either directory.

Files...: This button will be disabled if you are specifying a Synchronize or Clone command. Click it to show a

Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: All Files (*.*) to open a destination file whose path and name will be shown in the lower field to rename a single transferred file into this name overwriting the existing file.

Note: An invalid file transfer specification will cause a script error, see Test a NetOp Script

.

Copy Tab

This is the

Copy Dialog

window Copy tab:

It specifies special File Transfer Command parameters.

¨ Copy files newer than: []: Check this box and specify a date in the fields to transfer only files newer than the specified date (default: unchecked).

¨ Include subfolders: Check this box to transfer files in subdirectories of a specified directory (default: unchecked). Leave unchecked to transfer only specified directory files.

þ Copy hidden and system files: Leave this box checked to transfer hidden and system files (default: checked). Uncheck to not transfer hidden and system files.

¨ Copy only if file exists on target: Leave this box unchecked to transfer all specified files (default: unchecked). Check this box to transfer only files that exist on the destination computer in the specified location.

¨ Transfer only one way: This option will be enabled only with a Synchronize command. Check the box to

254

NetOp Guest

transfer files only from the source computer to the destination computer (default: unchecked).

Note: With a Clone command, all options except Include subfolders will be disabled.

Delete

This is the

File Transfer Command

Delete window.

It specifies which directory or files to delete and associated options.

From

(Upper drop-down box) []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected NetOp module name

(default: the

Global Settings

window

General Tab

From

section unselected option). The drop-down box list

contains the options Guest and Host. Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

(Lower field) []: Specify a directory or file path and name. Use a file mask (a file name with wildcard characters like * signifying any characters) to specify multiple file names with common characters. The file mask *.* specifies a directory.

Options

¨ Include subfolders: Check this box to delete a specified directory, its subdirectories and files in them

(default: unchecked). Leave unchecked to delete only files in a specified directory.

þ Delete hidden and system files: Leave this box checked to delete hidden and system files (default: checked). Uncheck to not delete hidden and system files.

¨ Delete read only files: Check this box to delete read-only files (default: unchecked). Leave unchecked to not delete read-only files.

3.7.3.2.5 Action Commands

NetOp Script action commands include the simple commands Logoff, Restart, Poweroff and Lock and the

composite commands Inventory and Send Message.

Note: Action commands will work only with a connected Host, not if connected locally to the Guest.

To add an action command to a

NetOp Script , in the

Script

window upper pane select the command after

which you want to execute it. Click

Add

and in the drop-down menu select one of these commands:

· Logoff: Add a command that will log off the Host computer user from Windows.

· Restart: Add a command that will restart Windows on the Host computer.

·

Poweroff: Add a command that will close down and power off the Host computer.

255

NetOp Guest

·

Lock: Add a command that will lock the Host computer.

· Inventory: Show this window:

Inventory step: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected Inventory step option. The dropdown box list contains these options:

· One Step: Generate, retrieve, copy and complete a Host computer inventory.

· Generate: Generate inventory on the Host computer.

·

Retrieve: Save the generated inventory into the Host computer %TEMP%\si_out.xml file.

Note: To make the retrieved inventory available for completion on the Guest computer, it must be copied by a Copy

File Transfer Command from the Host computer to the Guest computer, typically to

the %TEMP% directory.

·

Complete: Move a Host computer inventory file copied to the Guest computer to the inventor directory to enable showing it on the

Inventory Tab . The inventor directory resides in the

NetOp Configuration Files

directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp

Remote Control\Guest\inventor.

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

Inventory file path: This field will be enabled only if Complete is shown in the Inventory step drop-down box field. Specify the Guest computer path and name of the inventory file that shall be completed.

Send Message: Show this window:

Send Message step: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected Send Message step option.

The drop-down box list contains these options:

·

One Step: Copy a Guest computer

NetOp Message file to the Host computer Messages directory and

show it in a

Message

window on the Host computer screen.

Note: Create and save the

NetOp Message file in the

NetOp Message

window.

· Display Message: Show a

NetOp Message

file that resides in the Host computer Messages directory in a

Message

window on the Host computer screen.

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

Message path: [][Browse...]: Specify in this field the Guest computer (One Step) or Host computer (Display

Message) path and name of the NetOp Message

file that shall be (copied and) shown. Click Browse to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Rtf Files (*.rtf) to open a Guest computer

NetOp Message file to show its path and name in the field.

256

NetOp Guest

Note: The Host computer Messages directory that resides in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory,

typically C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control

\Host\Messages is identified by the environment variable %RootConfig%Messages. To show in the

Message

window on the Host computer screen, the

NetOp Message file name must use the syntax

<Date>T<Time>;<Sender>.rtf with the date format YYYY-MM-DD and the time format HH-MM-SS.

Note:

Commands in the Script File

explains how commands will appear in the script file.

3.7.3.2.6 Commands in the Script File

Script commands will appear in the

NetOp Script file as explained in this table:

Command/Setting

Run <Drive>:\<Path>

\<File>

Arguments/Value

[<Any command line switch>]

Description

Connect /Mode=Phonebook <Drive>:\<Path>\<File> Connect to the Host of the phonebook file

<Drive>:\<Path>\<File>.

Connect /

Mode=CommProfile

Connect /Mode=Guest

/

Profile=”<Communication profile>”

/Name=<Host name or IP address range>

/Loginname=<Login name>

/

Loginpassword=<Password

(encrypted)>

/Logindomain=<Domain or directory service name>

/LoginCredentials=<Yes/

No>

Connect using the communication profile

<Communication profile> to <Host name or

IP address range> logging on to the Host by

<Login name>, <Password> and <Domain or directory service name> or current

Windows credentials <Yes/No>.

Connect locally to the Guest.

WAIT /Mode=Delay

WAIT /Mode=Until

WAIT /Mode=Repeat

HH:MM:SS

Wait for HH:MM:SS before proceeding.

HH:MM:SS [MM-DD-YYYY]

Wait until HH:MM:SS (hours), if specified on MM-DD-YYYY, otherwise next, before proceeding.

HH:MM:SS

Repeat daily at HH:MM:SS (hours).

WAIT /Mode=WeekDay /Days=”<n1>,<n2>,...”

HH:MM:SS

Repeat weekly on days number <n1>, <n2> and others specified (1=Monday,

2=Tuesday, etc.) at HH:MM:SS (hours).

WAIT /Mode=MonthDay /Days=”<n1>,<n2>,...”

HH:MM:SS

Repeat monthly on days number <n1>,

<n2> and others specified (1=Monday of first week, 8=Monday of second week,

29=Monday of last week) at HH:MM:SS

(hours).

WAIT /Mode=MonthDate /Days=”<n1>,<n2>,...”

HH:MM:SS

Repeat monthly on dates number <n1>,

<n2> and others specified at HH:MM:SS

(hours).

Run the program <drive>:\<path>\<file>.

Command line switches can be added.

/Guest

Run the program <drive>:\<path>\<file> on the Guest.

/TimeOut=0

Run the program <drive>:\<path>\<file> and proceed immediately without waiting for its execution to end.

/TimeOut=<n>

Run the program <drive>:\<path>\<file> and proceed when its execution has ended.

After n seconds (0<n<1000), proceed even if execution has not ended and report an error.

/TimeOut=1000

Run the program <drive>:\<path>\<file> and wait for its execution to end.

257

NetOp Guest

COPY <Source>

<Destination>

MOVE <Source>

<Destination>

SYNC <Source>

<Destination>

CLONE <Source>

<Destination>

LOGOFF

RESTART

POWEROFF

LOCKWORKSTATION

Copy the <Source> folders or files on the source computer to the <Destination> folder or file on the destination computer.

/<Setting without SET > Apply the specified setting to the file transfer. If unspecified,

Global Settings in the Script File will apply.

/D=YYYY-MM-DD

Copy files newer than Year-Month-Date.

/S

Include subfolders.

/H

Copy hidden and system files.

/U

Copy only if file exists in the destination directory.

Move the <Source> folder(s) or file(s) on the source computer to the <Destination> folder or file on the destination computer.

/<Setting without SET > Apply the specified setting to the file transfer. If unspecified,

Global Settings in the Script File will apply.

/D=YYYY-MM-DD

Move files newer than YYYY-MM-DD.

/S

Include subfolders.

/H

Move hidden and system files.

/U

Move only if file exists in the destination directory.

Synchronize the <Source> folder on the source computer with the <Destination> folder on the destination computer.

/<Setting without SET > Apply the specified setting to the file transfer. If unspecified,

Global Settings in the Script File will apply.

/D=YYYY-MM-DD

Synchronize files newer than Year-Month-

Date.

/S

Synchronize subfolders.

/H

Synchronize hidden and system files.

/U

Synchronize only files that already exist in the destination directory.

/OneWay=Yes

Transfer files only from the source computer.

Clone the <Source> folder on the source computer to the <Destination> directory on the destination computer.

/<Setting without SET > Apply the specified setting to the file transfer. If unspecified,

Global Settings in the Script File will apply.

/S

Clone subfolders.

Log off the Host computer user from

Windows.

Restart Windows on the Host computer.

USERCMD “GET_INVENTORY=SI_ONESTEP”

USERCMD “GET_INVENTORY=SI_GENERATE”

USERCMD “GET_INVENTORY=SI_RETRIEVE”

Close down and power off the Host computer.

Lock the Host computer.

Create a Host computer inventory on the

Guest.

Generate an inventory on the Host computer.

Save a generated Host computer inventory

258

NetOp Guest

USERCMD “GET_INVENTORY=SI_COMPLETE <Inventory file path>”

USERCMD “SHOWMSG=<Host computer message file path>” to an inventory file on the Host computer.

Move an inventory file in the Guest computer <Inventory file path> to the

inventor directory.

Show a

NetOp Message file in <Host

computer message file path> in a

Message

window on the Host computer screen.

3.7.3.3 Script File

Below is an example of a

NetOp Script file. The script file is shown to the left and explanations to each line to

the right. You can save a script file as a *.dws or *.txt file.

Script file

;This is my new script

;*************************

Script

SET Copy=G_H

SET Delta=Yes

SET CrashRecovery=Yes

SET OverwriteExisting=Yes

SET OverwriteSystem=Yes

SET OverwriteReadOnly=Yes

SET OverwriteHidden=Yes

SET OnComError=NextHost

SET OnError=NextFile

SET AtEnd=None

SET CloseGuest=No

SET AppendLog=No

SET Log=”SCRIPT.LOG”

Connect Mode=Phonebook “C:

\Documents and Settings

\User1\Application Data

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote

Control\Guest\PhBook\Host1.

dwc

COPY “C:\test.txt” C: /H

ConnectEnd

ScriptEnd

Explanation

The script must start with a semicolon (;) followed by an optional comment.

Start the script.

Global settings:

Transfer files from Guest to Host.

Use delta file transfer.

Enable crash recovery.

Allow overwriting/deleting existing files/folders.

Allow overwriting/deleting system files.

Allow overwriting/deleting read-only files.

Allow overwriting/deleting hidden files.

On a communication error, proceed to the next Host.

On a transfer error, proceed to the next file.

Do not restart the script at script end.

Do not unload the Guest at script end.

Do not append an existing log in the log file.

Create a log in the file SCRIPT.LOG.

Commands:

Connect to the Host of the phonebook file Host1.dwc in the default phonebook directory of the computer user User1.

Copy the file C:\test.txt on the source computer (in this case Guest) to the C: folder on the destination computer (in this case Host).

Disconnect.

End the script.

259

3.7.3.4 Test a NetOp Script

A completed

NetOp Script may look like this in the

Script

window:

NetOp Guest

Note: This is the script example in

Script File .

While creating and editing a script in the

Script

window, the lower debug messages pane will report any syntax errors.

These syntax errors can be shown:

205

206

207

208

209

300

301

302

303

Error Description

101 Unterminated string, e.g. "test.txt (no end quotes).

102

103

More than 512 characters in a line.

Invalid character, e.g. drive specification É:.

201

202

203

204

Invalid boolean parameter value, e.g. SET OverwriteHidden=True.

A line starting without a command.

Too many commands.

Unknown command.

Invalid enumeration parameter value, e.g. SET OnComError=11.

Out of range integer parameter value, e.g. /TimeOut=1500.

Too many parameters.

Unknown parameter name, e.g. SET ComErr=5.

Syntax error, e.g. SET OverwriteSystem=5.

A SET command occurs before a Script command.

The script ends without a ScriptEnd command.

A file transfer command occurs before a Connect command.

A Connect command occurs before the previous connection was ended.

260

NetOp Guest

Note: You can avoid most of these syntax errors by creating the script in the

Script

window.

A script will execute from its beginning to its end, in the

Script

window from top to bottom, completing each

Connect branch before proceeding to the next Connect branch.

To test a script shown in the

Script

window, click the

Run Script

button and see if the script executes its

actions and if it reports any execution errors in the debug messages pane. If the script fails, edit it and re-run it until it executes as intended.

You can view script errors in a Script Log .

3.7.3.5 Script Log

Running a

NetOp Script will generate a script log if selected on the

Global Settings

window

Advanced Tab .

By default, the script log file named SCRIPT.LOG will reside in the NetOp Configuration Files directory,

typically C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control

\Guest.

To view the script log graphically, in the View Menu

select

View File Manager Log

to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Log Files (*.log) to open the script log in this window:

The

NFM Log Viewer

window is explained in

Options Menu .

The graphical script log shows script execution like the

Script

window. Script errors are indicated by red

exclamation marks and are explained in clear text.

Open the script log file in a text editor like Notepad to show a textual log:

261

NetOp Guest

The textual log contains lines of logged events like a table of records with the columns Date, Time, Error

code, Extended error code, Action code, Action specification.

The script log can show these error codes:

15

16

17

32

33

34

35

11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

03

04

05

06

Error Code Description

0 No error

01

02

Syntax error

Invalid command

Memory error

Script busy

Command canceled

Script not initialized

Internal Error - no control handler

Internal Error - no copy handler

Internal Error - invalid state

Error opening log file

Error writing log file

Invalid log version

Internal error

User does not have read rights

User does not have write rights

Program timeout

Command not supported by Host

Internal error

Folder not empty

Path does not exist

File does not exist

262

NetOp Guest

44

45

46

47

48

80

81

160

255

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

File already exists

File is marked Read only

File is marked Hidden

File is marked System

Skipped due to time stamp

Same time stamp and name, different attributes

Error opening file for read

Error opening file for write

Skipped due to date

Skipped due to attribute

Skipping file

File is locked

Disk full

I/O error

Communication error

Verify failure

Unknown error

Among many others, the script log can show these action codes:

Action Code

FILE ROPEN

Description

File opened for reading

FILE WOPEN File opened for writing

FILERCLOSE File closed after reading

FILEWCLOSE File closed after writing

FILE DEL File deleted

DIR DEL

LOG OPEN

Directory deleted

Log file opened

LOG CLOSE

ERROR

CALL

CALLEND

Log file closed

Error during transfer

Connected to Host

Disconnected from Host

Note: Advanced NetOp scripting is explained in the Administrator’s Manual Advanced Tools chapter

NetOp Scripting ActiveX Control section.

3.7.4 NetOp Screen Video

If NetOp Guest is installed, click Start > All Programs > NetOp Remote Control > Tools > Screen video or run the ScreenCapture.exe file in the Screen Video subdirectory of the directory in which NetOp Guest is installed to show this window:

How to record a screen video

1. Load NetOp screen video as explained above.

2. Click the

Toolbar Record

button (red dot), select the

File

menu

Record

command or press the

Record/

Pause

keyboard shortcut (initially F8) to show a rectangular frame mouse pointer that will outline the screen area of which a video will be recorded.

3. Position the frame as desired and click to start recording. While recording, colored flashing corners will

263

NetOp Guest

indicate the frame.

4. Click the

Toolbar Stop

button (blue square), select the

File

menu

Stop

command or press the

Stop

keyboard shortcut (initially F9) to stop recording to show a Windows Save As window.

5. Specify a file name and click Save to save the recording as an avi file, by default in the NetOp

ScreenCaptures directory in your My Documents directory.

The NetOp Screen Video window contains these elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Menu Bar

·

Toolbar

3.7.4.1 Title Bar

This is the

NetOp Screen Video

window title bar:

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

While

pausing recording, the title will flash Paused.

3.7.4.2 Menu Bar

This is the

NetOp Screen Video

window menu bar:

It contains these menus:

·

File

·

Region

·

Options

·

About

3.7.4.2.1 File Menu

This is the

NetOp Screen Video

window File menu:

It contains these commands:

·

Record: Select, click the

Toolbar Record

button or press the

Record/Pause

keyboard shortcut (initially F8) to start recording a screen video. Recording region options are explained in the

Region Menu

section.

Other options are explained in

Options Menu

section.

·

Stop: Select, click the

Toolbar Stop

button or press the

Stop

keyboard shortcut (initially F9) to stop recording.

·

Pause: Select, click the

Toolbar Pause

button or press the

Record/Pause

keyboard shortcut (initially F8) to

pause recording. While pausing, the

Title bar

title will flash Paused. To resume recording, select

Record

.

·

Exit: Select or select the

Title bar

Window control

menu Close command, click the Title bar

Close button or press ALT+F4 to close the

NetOp Screen Video

window to unload

NetOp Screen Video

264

NetOp Guest

3.7.4.2.2 Region Menu

This is the

NetOp Screen Video

window Region menu:

It selects which screen region will be recorded in these commands:

· Dragged region: Select to check mark this command as the selected region option to show cross hairs to

drag a region when clicking the Toolbar

Record button, selecting the

File menu Record command or

pressing the Record/Pause keyboard shortcut (initially F8).

· Specified region...: Select to check mark this command as the selected region option (initial selection) to show a specified region when clicking the

Toolbar

Record button, selecting the

File menu Record

command or pressing the Record/Pause keyboard shortcut (initially F8). When selected, this window will be shown:

It specifies a region in these elements:

·

Specify: Click to change the mouse pointer into pencil cross hairs. Drag a rectangular frame to specify its pixels dimensions in the enabled fields below.

·

Width []: Specifies the region pixels width (initially 320).

· Height []: Specifies the region pixels height (initially 240).

·

¨ Fixed left top corner: Check to enable the fields below to specify the region top left corner offset from the screen top left corner (initially unchecked).

Note: If unchecked, clicking the

Toolbar

Record button, selecting the

File menu Record command or

pressing the Record/Pause keyboard shortcut will show the region that you can drag to the desired position and click to start recording. If checked, clicking the

Toolbar

Record button, selecting the File

menu Record command or pressing the Record/Pause keyboard shortcut will start recording immediately.

· Left offset []: Specify the region left border pixels distance from the screen left border (initially 100).

·

Top offset []: Specify the region top border pixels distance from the screen top border (initially 100).

· Full screen: Select to check mark this command it as the selected region option to record the entire

265

computer screen.

3.7.4.2.3 Options Menu

This is the

NetOp Screen Video

window Options menu:

It specifies recording options from these commands:

· Video options...: Select to show this window:

NetOp Guest

It specifies video options in these elements:

·

Video codec: [] [About] [Configure]: Selects one of the video codecs that are available on the computer

(typically Microsoft Video 1, if available). Click [About] to show information on the selected video codec.

[Configure] will be enabled if a configurable video codec is selected. Click it to show the matching configuration window.

266

NetOp Guest

·

Quality: Drag the slide to select the video quality between 1 to the left and 100 to the right (initially 70).

· You can auto adjust or specify frame rates. Initially, the Auto adjust box will be checked to disable the fields and enable the bottom frame rate slide. Its left Max frame rate end represents recording 200 frames per second and its right end represents recording 1 frame per minute. It will automatically specify field numbers in two ranges:

Recording frame rate Set key frames every Capture frame every Playback rate

200 - 1 frames/second Second 0.005 - 1 second Recording frame rate

60 - 1 frames/minute 20 frames 1 - 60 seconds 20 frames/second

Uncheck the Auto adjust box to disable the bottom frame rate slide and enable the fields to specify numbers in these ranges:

· Set key frames every [] frames: 1 - 200 (initially 200).

Note: Playback will synchronize at each key frame.

·

Capture frame every [] milliseconds: 1 - 7200000 (2 hours) (initially 5).

· Playback rate [] frames/second: 1 - 200 (initially 200).

·

Cursor Options...: Select to show this window:

It specifies cursor options in these elements:

Cursor display

· Select one of these options:

¡ Hide cursor: Exclude the cursor from the recording.

¤

Show cursor: Include the cursor in the recording (initial selection).

If Show cursor is selected, select one of these options:

¤ Use default cursor: Use the current screen cursor.

¡ Use custom cursor []: Selects one of the cursors that are available on the computer to replace the current screen cursor (initially CONTEXTHELP).

¡ Use cursor from file []: Click

to select a cursor from the Windows Cursors directory to replace

267

NetOp Guest

the current screen cursor.

Note: The selected cursor will be shown in the upper right part of the section.

Cursor highlight

·

¨ Highlight cursor: Check to show a highlight around the cursor (initially unchecked).

· Size []: Drag the slide to change the size of the cursor highlight (initially midsize). Its half size will be shown to the right.

· Shape [] [Color]: Selects the shape (initially Circle) and color (initially light yellow) of the highlight. You can change the shape from the drop-down box and the color from the [Color] button that will show a

Color window.

·

Record audio: Select to check mark/uncheck the command (initially unchecked). If checked, sound playing on and input to the computer will be recorded.

·

Audio options...: Select to show this window:

It specifies cursor options in these elements:

· Audio capture device []: Selects an audio capture device that is available on the computer.

·

Recording format []: Selects a recording format that is available with the selected audio capture device.

· Compression format [] [] [Choose compression format]: Selects a compression format that is available on the computer and shows it in the two fields. Click Choose compression format to show this window:

268

NetOp Guest

It specifies an audio compression format in these elements:

·

Name [] [Save As...] [Remove]: Specifies, saves and removes an audio compression format name.

· Format []: Selects an available audio compression format type (initially MPEG Layer-3).

· Attributes []: Selects an available set of audio compression format attributes (initially 56 kBit/s, 22,050

Hz, Stereo 6 kb/sec).

Interleave video and audio

·

þ Interleave every [] ¡

Frames/¤ Milliseconds: Leave checked to interleave video and audio (initially checked). Specify a number in the field (initially 100). Select Frames or Milliseconds (initial selection).

·

Enable autopan: Select to check mark this command to automatically move the recording region in concert with the mouse pointer (initially unchecked). Select the check marked command to uncheck it.

·

Autopan speed...: Select to show this window:

Drag the slide to specify the maximum autopan speed in the range 1 - 200 as shown below right (initially

20).

· Program options: Expands into:

·

Minimize upon recording: Select to check mark/uncheck the command (initially unchecked). If checked, the

NetOp Screen Video

window will be minimized to the Windows taskbar while recording.

·

Suppress flashing frame: Select to check mark/uncheck the command (initially unchecked). If checked, the flashing region frame will be suppressed.

·

Recording thread priority: Expands into:

· Normal: Select to check mark to assign normal priority to the recording thread (initial selection).

· Above normal: Select to check mark to assign above normal priority to the recording thread.

·

Highest: Select to check mark to assign highest priority to the recording thread.

· Time critical: Select to check mark to assign time critical priority to the recording thread.

· Keyboard shortcuts...: Select to show this window:

269

NetOp Guest

It specifies keyboard shortcuts in these elements:

·

Record/Pause key []: Selects the Record/Pause keyboard shortcut (initially F8).

· Stop key []: Selects the Stop keyboard shortcut (initially F9).

· Cancel recording key []: Selects the Cancel recording keyboard shortcut (initially ESCAPE).

3.7.4.2.4 About Menu

This is the

NetOp Screen Video

window About menu:

It shows

NetOp Screen Video

properties from this command:

·

About...: Select to show this window:

270

NetOp Guest

It shows the NetOp Screen Video

version number and other properties.

3.7.4.3 Toolbar

This is the

NetOp Screen Video

window toolbar:

It contains these buttons:

Record: Click, press the

Record/Pause

keyboard shortcut (initially F8) or select the

File

menu

Record

command to start recording a screen video. Recording region options are explained in the

Region

Menu

section. Other options are explained in the

Options Menu

section.

Pause: Click, press the

Record/Pause

keyboard shortcut (initially F8) or select the

File

menu

Pause

command to pause recording. While pausing, the

Title bar

title will flash Paused. To resume

recording, click

Record

.

Stop: Click, press the

Stop

keyboard shortcut (initially F9) or select the

File

menu

Stop

command to

stop recording.

3.8 Guest Actions

NetOp Guest on one computer can connect to NetOp Host on another computer to execute an action, see

Connect Guide .

These action types are available:

·

Run Program

·

Execute Command

·

NetOp Message

·

Get Inventory

3.8.1 Run Program

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can run a program on Host

computers.

The Guest can connect to run a program from the

Quick Connect Tab

or from

Phonebook Tab

or

History Tab

records, see Connect Guide .

When connected, the Guest can run a program from

Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab

,

Connections Tab

or History Tab records or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox .

Click the

Run Program

button or select the

Connection Menu or record context menu

Run Program

command to show this menu:

It will contain Browse and commands of programs that have been specified on the

Program Options

window

Run Tab .

Select Browse to show the

Run Program Browse

Run

window to specify a program and run it on selected

Host computers.

Select a program command to run the program on selected Host computers.

Note: The program file must be available on the Host computer in the location specified in the

Run Program

Browse

Run

window or on the

Run Tab

.

271

Executing a Run Program command, this window will be shown:

NetOp Guest

<Run Program icon> Run program: Will show the program file path and name.

The pane will show selected Host records in a table with these column contents:

· Description: Progress indicator and Host connect name or address or Host record

Description

column

value. These progress indicators can be shown:

Command execution in progress

Command executed successfully

Command execution failed

·

Name: Host name, if applicable.

· Phone number: Host or connecting NetOp Gateway modem telephone number or IP address, if applicable.

· Communication Profile: Guest communication profile.

·

Status: Textual progress indicator.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

The command will execute sequentially on multiple computers as indicated by the progress indicators and

Status column contents.

¨ Close this dialog box on successful completion: Check this box to close the window when the command has executed successfully on all selected Hosts (default: unchecked).

Cancel/Close: During progress, this button will show Cancel. Click it to cancel the command on the computer where it is executing or attempting to execute and proceed to the next Host record. After completion, this button will show Close. Click it to close the window.

272

3.8.1.1 Run Program Browse

Select the

Run Program Menu Browse command to show this window:

NetOp Guest

This window specifies a program and its run properties to run it on selected Host computers.

Program path: [][Browse...]: The field of this drop-down box will show the program file path and name

(default: none). The drop-down box list will contain paths and names of files that have been run from this window before. Select a path and name in the list to show it in the field. : Click Browse to show a Windows

Open window that specifies Files of type: Programs to open a Guest computer program file to show its path and name in the field. You can also specify a program file path and name in the field.

Note: The Open window will by default show only program type files. You can also run other types of files, e.

g. text files. Select All files in the lower drop-down box list to show all types of files. To run successfully, the file must be available and identifiable on the Host computer by the Program Path field specification.

Command line switches: []: The field of this drop-down box will show switches that will be applied to the command specified in the Program path drop-down box field (default: none). The drop-down box list will contain switches that have been used in this window before. Select switches in the list to show them in the field or specify in the field the switches that shall be used with the specified file.

Translate: Click this button to replace Program path field path elements by available environment variables to facilitate identifying the path on Host computers with different directory names due to e.g. language.

Run

Select one of these options:

¤ Normal: Run the program in a normal size window (default selection).

¡ Maximized: Run the program in a maximized window.

¡ Minimized: Run the program minimized.

Click OK to run the specified program on selected Host computers to show the

Command Progress Status

window.

3.8.2 Execute Command

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can execute a system control

command on Host computers.

The Guest can connect to execute a system control command from the

Quick Connect Tab or from

Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

records, see

Connect Guide .

When connected, the Guest can execute a system control command from

Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect

Tab ,

Connections Tab or

History Tab records or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox

.

273

NetOp Guest

Click the

Execute Command

button or select the Connection Menu

or record context menu

Execute

Command

command to show this menu:

Log Off: Select this command to log off the user from Windows on selected Host computers.

Restart: Select this command to restart selected Host computers.

Shut Down: Select this command to shut down selected Host computers.

Lock Workstation: Select this command to lock selected Host computers.

Note: You can lock only Host computers that run on a Windows NT+ (2003, XP, 2000 or NT) operating system.

Wake on LAN: Select this command to start selected Host computers whose

Wake on LAN MAC Address

is specified on the

Connection Properties

window

Connect Tab .

The

Command Progress Status

window will show command execution.

3.8.3 NetOp Message

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can send a NetOp message to

Host computers.

The Guest can connect to send a NetOp message from the

Quick Connect Tab

or from Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

records, see

Connect Guide

.

When connected, the Guest can send a NetOp message from

Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab

,

Connections Tab

or History Tab records or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox .

Click the

Send Message

button or select the

Connection Menu or record context menu

Send Message

command to show this window:

In this window, you can create, edit and send a NetOp message that will show on the Host computer screen like this:

274

NetOp Guest

The

NetOp Message

window contains these elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Menu Bar

·

Toolbar

·

Message Pane

·

Status Bar

3.8.3.1 Title Bar

This is the

NetOp Message window title bar:

Initially, it will show Untitled. If the message has been saved in a file, its path and name will be shown.

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

3.8.3.2 Menu Bar

This is the

NetOp Message window menu bar:

It contains these menus:

·

File Menu

·

Edit Menu

·

Search Menu

·

Format Menu

275

NetOp Guest

3.8.3.2.1 File Menu

This is the

NetOp Message window File menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control.

Send Message: Select this command or click the Toolbar

Send

button to send the message to selected

Hosts. The

Command Progress Status

window will show command execution.

Note: If Host Guest Access Security does not allow Send Message, the command will not execute, see Allow

Guest To .

New: Select this command or click the Toolbar

New

button to empty the

Message Pane

to create a message. You will be prompted to save any unsaved current message changes.

Open: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Open

button to show a Windows Open window that

specifies Files of type: Rtf Files (*.rtf) to open the contents of a rich text format file in the window. You will be prompted to save any unsaved current message changes.

Save: This command will be enabled only if a file path and name has been specified for the window

message. Select it or click the Toolbar

Save

button to save the window message in its specified file.

Save As...: Select this command to show a Windows Save As window that specifies Files of type: Rtf Files (*.

rtf) to save the window message with a specified name and extension in a selected directory.

Note: On the Guest computer, a new message is not automatically named, provided with an extension and saved, but when received on a Host computer it is automatically named, provided with an extension and saved.

Print: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Print

button to show a Windows Print window to print the

Message Pane contents.

Close Ctrl+F4: Select this command or apply the matching Window Control to close the

NetOp Message

window. You will be prompted to save any unsaved current message changes.

3.8.3.2.2 Edit Menu

This is the

NetOp Message window Edit menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Undo Ctrl+Z: Select this command, press CTRL+Z or click the

Toolbar

Undo/Redo

button to undo/redo the

276

NetOp Guest

last

Message Pane action.

Cut Ctrl+X: Select

Message Pane text and select this command, press CTRL+X or click the

Toolbar

Cut

button to remove the selected text and place it on the clipboard.

Copy Ctrl+C: Select

Message Pane

text and select this command, press CTRL+C or click the

Toolbar

Copy

button to copy selected text to the clipboard.

Paste Ctrl+V: Select this command, press CTRL+V or click the

Toolbar

Paste

button to paste the clipboard

content in the

Message Pane

cursor position.

Clear All Ctrl+Del: Select this command or press CTRL+DEL to clear all

Message Pane contents.

Delete Del: Select

Message Pane text and select this command or press DEL to delete selected text.

3.8.3.2.3 Search Menu

This is the

NetOp Message window Search menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Find...: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Find

button to show the Windows Find window to find

Message Pane text elements.

Replace...: Select this command to show the Windows Replace window to replace

Message Pane text

elements.

Next F3: Select this command or press F3 to highlight the next occurrence of Find or Replace window specified text elements in the

Message Pane

.

3.8.3.2.4 Format Menu

This is the

NetOp Message window Format menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Character: This command expands into these commands:

Bold: Select Message Pane text and select this command to check mark/uncheck it or click the

Toolbar

Bold

button to make it appear pressed in/released to bold/unbold selected text.

Italic: Select

Message Pane text and select this command to check mark/uncheck it or click the

Toolbar

Italic

button to make it appear pressed in/released to italicize/un-italicize selected text.

Underline: Select

Message Pane

text and select this command to check mark/uncheck it or click the

Toolbar

Underline

button to make it appear pressed in/released to underline/un-underline selected text.

Strikeout: Select

Message Pane

text and select this command to check mark/uncheck it to strikeout/unstrikeout selected text.

Font...: Select

Message Pane text and select this command to show the Windows Font window to change

selected text font.

Text data/RTF data: Select the unchecked command to switch check marks to change the

Message Pane

277

NetOp Guest

text data format into the check marked type.

Note: The RTF format supports hyperlinks.

3.8.3.3 Toolbar

This is the

NetOp Message window toolbar:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

The toolbar contains these buttons:

Send: Click this button or select the

File Menu

Send Message

command to send the window

message to selected Hosts. The

Command Progress Status

window will show command execution.

Note: If Host Guest Access Security does not allow Send Message, the command will not execute, see

Allow Guest To .

New: Click this button or select the File Menu

New

command to empty the

Message Pane to create a

message. You will be prompted to save any unsaved current message changes.

Open: Click this button or select the

File Menu

Open

command to show a Windows Open window that specifies Files of type: Rtf Files (*.rtf) to open the contents of a rich text format file in the window.

You will be prompted to save any unsaved current message changes.

Save: This button will be enabled only if a file path and name have been specified. Click it or select

the File Menu

Save

command to save the message in its specified file.

Print: Click this button or select the

File Menu

Print

command to show a Windows Print window to

print the

Message Pane contents.

Undo/Redo: Click this button or select the

Edit Menu

Undo

command to undo/redo the last

Message

Pane action.

Cut: Select Message Pane text and click this button, select the

Edit Menu

Cut

command or press

CTRL+X to remove selected text and place it on the clipboard.

Copy: Select

Message Pane

text and click this button, select the Edit Menu

Copy

command or press

CTRL+C to copy selected text to the clipboard.

Paste: Click this button, select the

Edit Menu

Paste

command or press CTRL+V to paste the

clipboard contents in the

Message Pane cursor position.

Find: Click this button or select the

Search Menu

Find

command to show the Windows Find window

to find

Message Pane text elements.

Bold: Select Message Pane text and click this button to make it appear pressed in/released or select

the Format Menu

Bold

command to check mark/uncheck it to bold/un bold selected text.

Italic: Select

Message Pane

text and click this button to make it appear pressed in/released or select

the Format Menu

Italic

command to check mark/uncheck it to italicize/un-italicize selected text.

Underline: Select text in the

Message Pane

and click this button to make it appear pressed in/ released or select the

Format Menu

Underline

command to check mark/uncheck it to underline/ununderline selected text.

278

NetOp Guest

3.8.3.4 Message Pane

This is the

NetOp Message window message pane:

It will show the message contents. The first line of text will describe the message contents on the Host. You can edit, search and format message pane text from menu commands and

Toolbar

buttons.

To create an unprepared NetOp message, type it into the pane.

To create a prepared NetOp message, create plain or RTF formatted text in a file and paste it into the pane.

Note: RTF formatted text supports hyperlinks, see Format Menu .

3.8.3.5 Status Bar

This is the

NetOp Message window status bar:

The fields to the right are active:

· CAPS: Will show black text if CAPS LOCK is enabled.

·

NUM: Will show black text if NUM LOCK is enabled.

· OVR: Will show black text if INSERT is enabled.

3.8.4 Get Inventory

If allowed by Host Guest Access Security, see Allow Guest To , the Guest can get an inventory of Host

computer hardware and software to make it available on the Inventory Tab

.

The Guest can connect to get inventory from the

Quick Connect Tab

or from

Phonebook Tab or

History Tab

records, see Connect Guide .

When connected, the Guest can get inventory from

Phonebook Tab ,

Quick Connect Tab

,

Connections Tab

or History Tab records or from the

Remote Control

Toolbar or Toolbox

.

Click the

Get Inventory

button or select the

Connection Menu or record context menu

Get Inventory

command to get selected Host computer inventories to make them available on the

Inventory Tab .

Note: Advanced inventory options are available on the

Program Options

window

Inventory Tab .

279

NetOp Host

4 NetOp Host

This main section explains the functionality of NetOp Host on a computer that runs on a Windows operating system.

Note: NetOp Host on a computer that runs on a Linux, Solaris, Mac OSX, OS/2 or DOS operating systems is explained in the Administrator’s Manual Other Operating Systems chapter.

NetOp Host enables a computer to be remote controlled from and interact with a computer that runs NetOp

Guest.

The NetOp Host main section includes these sections:

·

Host Startup Guide

·

NetOp Host Window

·

Host Tools

·

Host Sessions

·

Session Tools

·

Host Actions

4.1 Host Startup Guide

This section includes these sections:

·

For Typical Computer Users

·

For Advanced Computer Users

·

Loading Alternatives

·

Setup Wizard

4.1.1 For Typical Computer Users

NetOp Host is a server type program that enables the matching client type program NetOp Guest on another

computer to access resources on the NetOp Host computer.

Note: If NetOp Host runs on your computer, you may experience that sometimes things beyond your control happen on the computer because a user that runs NetOp Guest on a remote computer accesses your computer. If your computer belongs to an organization in which administrators manage the setup and security of your computer, you should not need to be concerned if such things happen. However, you should report to your administrator if things that you do not like happen on your computer.

You can typically verify that NetOp Host is loaded on your computer by this button in the notification area in the lower right corner of the screen:

Note: NetOp Host can be set up to run in

Stealth mode

to not show this button, see the

Program Options

window General Tab .

Its tool tip that will be shown briefly when the mouse pointer is over the button will indicate the Host status

(above: Running with the computer IP address 192.168.102.92).

Right-click this button to show this menu:

280

NetOp Host

Restore/Show: This command will be Restore if the NetOp Host Window

is minimized into a

NetOp Host

button and Show if the NetOp Host Window is on the screen but possibly hidden by other windows. Select it

or double-click the

NetOp Host

button to show the

NetOp Host Window in front of other windows.

Exit: Select this command or the File Menu

Exit

command or apply a

Window Control

Close

control to unload

NetOp Host.

Note: NetOp Host unload can be protected by a Maintenance Password .

Connection List: Select this command to show this window:

Window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

It will show records of connected Guests like the

Connections Tab , see also

Connection Notification Tab .

History List: Select this command to show this window:

Window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

It will show records of connection events since the Host was last loaded like the

History Tab

, see also

Connection Notification Tab .

Request Help/Cancel Help: This command will be Request Help if the Host status is

Running

. Select it or the

Session Menu

Request Help

command or click the

Toolbar

Request Help

button to

Request Help

. It will be

Cancel Help if the Host status is

Help Requested

. Select it or the

Session Menu

Cancel Help

command or click the

Toolbar

Cancel Help

button to cancel a pending help request.

If a Guest is connected to the Host in a session, other options will be available, see Host Sessions .

4.1.2 For Advanced Computer Users

If the setup of your computer and its applications is your own responsibility, you must set up

NetOp Host .

After a basic NetOp Host

Installation , NetOp Host will not be loaded and will not load and start automatically

when starting the computer.

Load NetOp Host from Start > (All) Programs > NetOp Remote Control > Host or by one of the available

Loading Alternatives .

When any user loads NetOp Host for the first time after basic

Installation , the

Setup Wizard

will run to initially set up NetOp Host. Select default options to apply a usable initial setup that will load and start NetOp Host minimized in a

NetOp Host

button, also when starting the computer.

Several NetOp Host setup options are available:

281

NetOp Host

·

General setup: See

Program Options

.

·

Security setup: See

Guest Access Security .

· Communication setup: See

Communication Profiles

.

·

NetOp log setup: See Log Setup

.

· Setup protection: See

Maintenance Password .

By the

Install Alternative

Pack'n Deploy , you can install and deploy NetOp Host in a set up state.

4.1.3 Loading Alternatives

These

NetOp Host loading alternatives are available:

· In the Windows XP Start menu, select Host if pinned to your Start menu or in your list of most frequently used programs.

· In the directory where NetOp Host was installed, typically the directory C:\Program Files\Danware Data

\NetOp Remote Control\Host, run (double-click) NHSTW32.EXE.

· Create a desktop shortcut to NHSTW32.EXE and double-click this shortcut.

· In the Windows Run or Command Prompt window, execute a command specifying the NHSTW32.EXE path and file name. This command can include switches according to this syntax:

<NetOp Host program path and file> [<switch1>] [<switch2>]...

You can use any of these switches:

Switch

/C:<communication profile>

Function

Enable <communication profile> in addition to other selected

Communication Profiles . The setting will not be

stored.

/I:<Inventory file path and name>

Generate and retrieve the Host computer inventory to store it in <Inventory file path and name>.

/R:<Host name>

Name the Host by <Host name>. The setting will be stored.

/W:[+/-]

/W: Start the Host at loading. The setting will not be stored.

/W:+ Start the Host at loading. The setting will be stored.

/W:- Do not start the Host at loading. The setting will be stored.

Request Help by at least one of these switches:

/HD:<Problem description>

Specifies a problem description.

/HP:<Help provider>

Specifies a help provider (help service name or service ticket number).

/HC:<Communication profile>

/HA:<Help provider address>

Specifies a help request communication profile.

Specifies a help provider address (Guest address or

Connection Manager URL. The Connection Manager

URL can be omitted if specified in the used

WebConnect

communication profile).

/HW:

Must be included with a help request via WebConnect.

Cancel a pending help request by this switch:

/HH:

Cancels a pending help request.

Log on to a Guest network connecting NetOp

Gateway by these switches:

/LGN:<Gateway logon name>

/LGP:<Gateway logon password>

/LGD:<Gateway logon domain>

Specifies a Gateway logon name.

Specifies a Gateway logon password.

Specifies a Gateway logon domain.

282

NetOp Host

Note: When the Host is loaded, you can use the same command syntax to change settings or

Request

Help .

Examples

<NetOp Host program path and file> /R:John C:/TCP/IP /W:

Explanation: Load the Host with the Host name John, start the Host (do not store) enabling TCP/IP and other selected communication profiles.

<NetOp Host program path and file> /R:Peter /W:+

Explanation: Load the Host with the Host name Peter, start the Host (store) enabling selected communication profiles.

<NetOp Host program path and file> /HD:”Nothing works” /HP:”Windows Help” /HC:

TCP4 /HA:192.168.102.58

Explanation: Load the Host and send a help request with the problem description Nothing works, help provider Windows Help, communication profile TCP4 and IP address 192.168.102.58.

Note: Switch parameters that contain spaces or special characters must be enclosed by double quotation marks.

4.1.4 Setup Wizard

When

NetOp Host

is loaded for the first time after basic

Installation or if you select the

Tools Menu

Run

Setup Wizard

command, this window will be shown:

This wizard will guide you through Host setup.

Click Cancel to leave the Setup Wizard without changing Host setup.

Note: We recommend that you run the Setup Wizard when loading NetOp Host for the first time after a basic

Installation

.

Click Next to show this window:

283

NetOp Host

Select one of these options:

¤ Default: Follow the

Default Track with few setup options (default selection).

¡ Custom: Follow the

Custom Track with a wide range of setup options.

Note: For initial setup, we recommend that you follow the Default Track and select default options.

Click Back to show the previous wizard window.

Click Next to show the next wizard window:

·

Default Track

·

Custom Track

284

NetOp Host

4.1.4.1 Default Track

In the Host

Setup Wizard

Wizard Mode

window, select

Default

and click Next to show this window:

Select one of these options:

¤ Start with Windows: Load and start the Host when the computer is switched on (default selection).

¡ Load manually: Do not load the Host when the computer is switched on. The Host will start when loaded manually.

Click Next to show this window:

285

NetOp Host

Specify password: []: Specify in this field the password that all connecting Guests must specify to connect.

Characters will show as dots or asterisks.

Re-enter password: []: Re-specify in this field the password for confirmation.

Click Next to show this window:

286

NetOp Host

Select one of these options:

¤ Yes, I want to register my NetOp license on-line: Show the

NetOp Product Registration web page in your

Internet browser when clicking Next (default selection).

¡ No, but remind me later: Show this window when loading the Host next time.

¡ No, I do not want to register my NetOp license now: Do not show this window again.

Note: Registering your license with the NetOp manufacturer may prove useful if you lose your license certificate or if you want to upgrade to a newer version of the product. Do not register a free trial version license or a license that has already been registered.

Click Next to show this window:

Click Finish to end the Setup Wizard.

287

NetOp Host

4.1.4.2 Custom Track

In the Host

Setup Wizard

Wizard Mode

window, select

Custom

and click Next to show this window:

The options available in this window are explained in Communication Profiles .

Click Next to show this window:

288

NetOp Host

The options available in this window are explained on the

Program Options

window

General Tab

.

Click Advanced to show the

Program Options

window.

Click Next to show this window:

Select one of these options:

289

NetOp Host

¤ All Guests have the same password: Click Configure to show the

Guest Access Security

window

Guest

Access Privileges Tab showing

Grant All Guests Default Access Privileges options to review security

settings. Click Next to show the

Default Guest Access Password

window (default selection).

¡ Each Guest has its own password: Click Configure to show the

Guest Access Security

window

Guest

Access Privileges Tab showing

Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using NetOp

Authentication options to select the security role that shall be assigned to added Guests. Click Next to

show the

Add a Guest Account

window.

¡ Use Windows Security Management: Click Configure to show the

Guest Access Security

window

Guest

Access Privileges Tab showing

Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using Windows Security

Management options to select the security role that shall be assigned to added Windows accounts. Click

Next to show the

Add a Windows Account

window.

Select one of these options:

¤ Yes, add a Guest: Click Next to show the

Guest Credentials

window (default selection).

¡ No: Click Next to show the

Register

window to end the

Setup Wizard

.

290

NetOp Host

Guest ID: []: Specify in this field the name by which a connecting Guest must log on.

Specify password: []: Specify in this field the password by which this Guest must log on. Characters will show as dots or asterisks.

Re-enter password: []: Re-specify in this field the password for confirmation.

Click Next to add this account to the security role selected from the

Security Options

window and show the

Add Another Account

window.

291

NetOp Host

Select one of these options:

¤ Yes, add another account: Click Next to show the

Guest Credentials

or Windows Select User/Group window from which this window was shown to add another account (default selection).

¡ No: Click Next to show the

Register

window to end the

Setup Wizard

.

292

NetOp Host

Select one of these options:

¤ Yes, add a Windows user: Click Next to show the Windows Select User window to add a Windows user account to the security role selected from the

Security Options

window and show the

Add Another Account

window (default selection).

¡ Yes, add a Windows group: Click Next to show the Windows Select Group window to add a Windows group account to the security role selected from the

Security Options

window and show the

Add Another

Account

window.

¡ No: Click Next to show the

Register

window to end the

Setup Wizard

.

4.2 NetOp Host Window

This is the NetOp Host window:

It contains these elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Menu Bar

·

Toolbar

·

Tab Panel

·

Status Bar

4.2.1 Title Bar

This is the

NetOp Host Window

title bar:

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

The title bar will show Host status information:

·

Loading: Host is loading.

· Stopped: Host communication is disabled.

293

NetOp Host

·

Starting: Host communication is being enabled.

· Running: Host communication is enabled. No Guest is connected.

· Connected [[<Guest name>]][+<Number>]: Host communication is enabled. The Guest identified by

<Guest name> and <Number> other Guests are connected.

Note: If the

Program Options

window

Connection Notification Tab

During Connection

section

Display

Guest name (if available) in the title bar

box is checked, the name by which the connected Guest identifies itself will be shown in square brackets. If the

Program Options

window

General Tab Connection section

Allow multiple simultaneous Guest sessions

box is checked, multiple Guests can be connected at the same time. The number of connected Guests more than one will be shown by +<Number>.

· Disconnecting: Host communication is enabled. Connected Guests are being disconnected.

·

Help requested: Host communication is enabled. A help request is pending, see

Request Help

.

· Stopping: Host communication is being disabled.

This status information will also be shown in the

General Tab

Status

field, on the Windows taskbar NetOp

Host button and tool tip and in the notification area

NetOp Host

button tool tip.

Apply a

Window Control

Minimize

control to show the Host only as a notification area

NetOp Host

button.

4.2.2 Menu Bar

This is the

NetOp Host Window

menu bar:

It contains these menus:

·

File Menu

·

View Menu

·

Action Menu

·

Session Menu

·

Tools Menu

·

Help Menu

4.2.2.1 File Menu

This is the

NetOp Host Window

File menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

View: This command expands into this command:

Message: Select a

Messages Tab record and select this command or the record context menu

View

command to show the record message in the

NetOp Message window.

Save As: This command expands into this command:

History: Select the History Tab and select this command or the tab pane context menu

Save As

command to show a Windows Save As window that specifies Save as type: All Files (*.*) to save the pane contents in a file.

294

NetOp Host

Note: The Save As window File name drop-down box field will initially specify the txt file name extension, but it will not automatically be added to the specified file name.

Delete: This command expands into these commands:

History: Select the History Tab and select this command or the tab pane context menu

Delete

command to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting the pane contents.

Messages: Select

Tab Panel Messages Tab records and select this command or the record context menu

Delete

command to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting selected records and matching

files.

Exit: Select this command or the NetOp Host Button Menu

Exit

command or apply a

Window Control

Close

control to unload the Host.

4.2.2.2 View Menu

This is the

NetOp Host Window

View menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Toolbar: Select this command to hide/show the Toolbar

(default: shown). The command icon will appear pressed in if the

Toolbar is shown.

File Transfer Status: This command will be enabled if a Guest is connected. Select it to show the

File

Transfer Status

window.

Modem Dialog: Select this command to show the

Modem Dialog

window.

4.2.2.3 Action Menu

This is the

NetOp Host Window

Action menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Start: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Start

button to start the Host to enable selected

Communication Profiles

.

If

Guest Access Security does not specify any Guest logon credentials, by default this window will be

shown when the Host starts:

295

NetOp Host

¨ Don’t show this warning again: Check this box to suppress this security warning (default: unchecked).

Note: To reinstate this security warning if suppressed, while the Host is unloaded delete the

NetOp

Configuration Files nhstconf.ndb file that will typically reside in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users

\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host to delete the general Host setup. When reloading the Host, the

Setup Wizard

will run to create a Host setup.

Review security settings...: Click this button to show the

Guest Access Security

window.

Continue: Click this button to close the

Security Warning

window to start the Host.

Cancel: Click this button to close this window without starting the Host.

Stop: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Stop

button to stop the Host to disable enabled

Communication Profiles

.

Restart: Select this command or click the Toolbar

Restart

button to stop and start the Host to disable and

enable selected

Communication Profiles

.

Note: Some setup changes require Host restart.

Hide: Select this command to show a confirmation window to confirm hiding the Host. If hidden, nothing on the screen will indicate that the Host is loaded.

Note: If hidden from this command, the Host will be shown when reloaded, e.g. by restarting Windows. If hidden from the

Program Options

window General Tab

Stealth mode

option, the Host will be hidden when

reloaded. To show a hidden Host, run showhost.exe that by default will reside in the directory where NetOp

Host is installed.

4.2.2.4 Session Menu

This is the

NetOp Host Window

Session menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Disconnect: This command will be enabled if a Guest is connected. Select it or the NetOp Host Button

Connected Menu

Disconnect

command or click the

Toolbar

Disconnect

button to disconnect from all

connected Guests.

Note: From the

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu , you can disconnect from one of multiple connected

Guests.

Chat: This command will be enabled if a Guest is connected. Select it or the

NetOp Host Button Connected

296

NetOp Host

Menu

Chat

command or click the

Toolbar

Chat

button to start a

Chat session with all connected Guests.

Note: From the

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu , you can start a

Chat

session with one of multiple connected Guests.

Audio-Video Chat: This command will be enabled if a Guest is connected, unless the Guest or the Host is engaged in another audio session. Select it or the

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu

Audio-Video Chat

command or click the Toolbar

Audio-Video Chat

button to start an

Audio-Video Chat

session with the connected Guest that has keyboard and mouse control.

Note: From the

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu , you can pass keyboard and mouse control from one of

multiple connected Guests to another.

Request Help: This command will be enabled if the Host status is

Running

and if at least one of the

Program

Options

window

Help Request Tab

Options

section

Enable help service

or

Enable service tickets

boxes is

checked. Select it or the

NetOp Host Button Menu

Request Help

command or click the

Toolbar

Request Help

button to

Request Help

from a Guest.

Cancel Help: This command will be enabled if the Host status is

Help requested

. Select it or the

NetOp Host

Button Menu

Cancel Help

command or click the

Toolbar

Cancel Help

button to cancel a pending help

request.

4.2.2.5 Tools Menu

This is the

NetOp Host Window

Tools menu:

Its commands are explained in

Host Tools .

4.2.2.6 Help Menu

This is the

NetOp Host Window

Help menu:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Contents: Select this command to open the NetOp Host Help system that in its left pane shows a graphical

297

NetOp Host

table of contents.

Online Support: Select this command to open the Support for NetOp Remote Control web page in your

Internet browser.

Online Registration: Select to open the NetOp Product Registration web page in your Internet browser.

Apply License: Select to show this window:

It enables you to change the installed NetOp Host license information.

Licensed to: []: Specify the licensee name.

Serial number: []: Specify the Host license number.

Quick Guide: Select this command to open the NetOp Host Help system on the

Host Startup Guide

topic.

About...: Select this command to show this window:

This window will contain information on your NetOp Host installation. The build number in format

YYYYDDD (Y=year number digit, D=day number digit) is enclosed in parentheses next to the version number.

System Info...: Click this button to show the

System Info

window.

298

NetOp Host

4.2.3 Toolbar

This NetOp Host Window toolbar will be shown unless hidden from the

View Menu

Toolbar

command:

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Toolbar buttons are grouped into these sections:

·

Action Buttons

·

Session Buttons

·

Tool Buttons

4.2.3.1 Action Buttons

These are the Host Toolbar

action buttons:

Start: Click this button or select the Action Menu

Start

command to start the Host to enable selected

Communication Profiles .

Note: The

Security Warning

window is explained in the

Action Menu section.

Stop: Click this button or select the

Action Menu

Stop

command to stop the Host to disable all

Communication Profiles .

Restart: Click this button or select the Action Menu Restart command to stop and start the Host to

disable and enable selected

Communication Profiles .

Note: Some setup changes require Host restart.

4.2.3.2 Session Buttons

These are the Host Toolbar

session buttons:

Disconnect: This button will be enabled if a Guest is connected. Click it or select the

Session Menu or

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu

Disconnect

command to disconnect from all connected Guests.

Note: From the NetOp Host Button Connected Menu , you can disconnect from one of multiple

connected Guests.

Chat: This button will be enabled if a Guest is connected. Click it or select the

Session Menu or

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu

Chat

command to start a

Chat session with all connected

Guests.

Note: From the NetOp Host Button Connected Menu , you can start a

Chat

session with one of multiple connected Guests.

Audio-Video Chat: This button will be enabled if a Guest is connected, unless the Guest or the Host is engaged in another audio session. Click it or select the

Session Menu or

NetOp Host Button

Connected Menu

Audio-Video Chat

command to start an

Audio-Video Chat session with the

connected Guest that has keyboard and mouse control.

Note: From the NetOp Host Button Connected Menu , you can pass keyboard and mouse control

from one of multiple connected Guests to another.

Request Help: This button will be enabled if the Host status is

Running

and if at least one of the

Program Options

window Help Request Tab

Options

section

Enable help service

or

Enable service tickets

boxes is checked. Click it or select the

Session Menu

or

NetOp Host Button Menu

Request

Help

command to

Request Help

.

Cancel Help: This button will be enabled if the Host status is

Help requested . Click it or select the

Session Menu or

NetOp Host Button Menu

Cancel Help

command to cancel a pending help request.

299

NetOp Host

4.2.3.3 Tool Buttons

These are the Host Toolbar

tool buttons:

Program Options: Click this button or select the

Tools Menu

Program Options

command to show the

Program Options

window.

Guest Access Security: Click this button or select the

Tools Menu

Guest Access Security

command

to show the

Guest Access Security

window.

Communication Profiles: Click this button or select the

Tools Menu

Communication Profiles

command to show the

Communication Profile Setup

window.

Note: Tool buttons and

Tools Menu setup commands will be disabled if configuration files are protected, see

Maintenance Password . Tool actions can be protected by a Maintenance Password

.

4.2.4 Tab Panel

This is the

NetOp Host Window

tab panel:

It will show Host properties on these tabs:

·

General Tab

·

Connections Tab

·

History Tab

·

Services Tab

·

Communication Tab

·

Names Tab

·

Messages Tab

300

NetOp Host

4.2.4.1 General Tab

This is the Host Tab Panel General tab:

It will typically be shown in front to show general Host properties.

Status []: This disabled field will show the Host status like the

Title Bar , the Windows taskbar button and the

NetOp Host Button

tool tip.

Host ID []: This disabled field will show the Host name specified in the

Program Options

window

Host Name

Tab

Naming

section, see also

Names Tab

.

Address []: This disabled field, the

Status Bar and the

NetOp Host Button

tool tip will show enabled Host computer IP addresses, see

Names Tab .

4.2.4.2 Connections Tab

This is the Host Tab Panel Connections tab:

If Guests are connected to the Host, this tab will show Guest records in a table with these column contents:

· Sessions: Keyboard and mouse control check mark and session icons.

·

Name: Guest name.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Note: The information on this tab can be shown in the

Connection List

window.

301

Right-click a record to show this context command:

Change Guest access privileges: Click to show this window:

NetOp Host

Note: This command will be

Maintenance password

protected if

Guest access security

is protected.

Its pane contains check boxed available

Allow Guest to

options. Check/uncheck boxes to enable/disable options.

302

NetOp Host

4.2.4.3 History Tab

This is the Host Tab Panel History tab:

It will show records of connection events since the Host was last loaded in a table with these column contents:

· Time: Event icon, date and time.

· Name: Guest name.

·

Event: Connected or Disconnected.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Note: The information on this tab can be shown in the

History List

window.

When the Host is unloaded, records will be lost. Right-click in the pane to show this context menu:

Save As: Select this command or the

File Menu

Save As > History

command to show a Windows Save As

window that specifies Save as type: All Files (*.*) to save the pane contents in a file.

Note: The Save As window will specify the file name *.txt, but the extension txt will not automatically be added to the specified file name.

Delete: Select this command or the

File Menu

Delete > History

command to show a confirmation window to

confirm deleting the pane contents.

303

NetOp Host

4.2.4.4 Services Tab

This is the Host Tab Panel Services tab:

It will show records of available NetOp services in a table with these column contents:

·

Name: Service icon and name.

· Details: Details for each of these NetOp services:

· Encryption: The encryption type of the most recent Guest connection, see the

Guest Access Security

window

Encryption Tab .

· Name Server: Available: 0 if not using NetOp Name Server or if no NetOp Name Server is available when using NetOp Name Server. Available: 1 or 2 indicating the number of available NetOp Name

Servers when using NetOp Name Server, see

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

.

· Security Server: Available: 0 if not using NetOp Security Server or if no NetOp Security Server is available when using NetOp Security Server. Available: <Number of available NetOp Security Servers> indicating the number of available NetOp Security Servers when using NetOp Security Server, see the

Guest Access Security

window

Guest Access Privileges Tab

Use NetOp Security Server selection.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

4.2.4.5 Communication Tab

This is the Host Tab Panel Communication tab:

304

NetOp Host

It will show records of enabled communication profiles in a table with these column contents:

· Profile: Communication device icon and communication profile name.

·

Device: Communication profile Communication Device .

·

Details: Communication profile configuration details, see

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Note: Communication profiles will be enabled if the Host status is

Running

,

Connected

or

Help Requested

.

4.2.4.6 Names Tab

This is the Host Tab Panel Names tab:

It will show records of enabled Host names in a table with these column contents:

· Name: Host name.

·

Type: Host name type.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Note: Host names will be enabled if the Host status is

Running

,

Connected

or

Help Requested .

The Host will respond to Guest connect attempts and browses by its enabled names.

Host computer IP addresses will be enabled as IP address type names if

Communication Profiles

that use the

Communication Devices

TCP/IP ,

TCP/IP (TCP) or

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6)

are enabled, see

Communication

Tab .

Host computer network card MAC addresses will be enabled as MAC address type names if Communication

Profiles that use the

Communication Devices

NetBIOS or

IPX

are enabled, see

Communication Tab .

Note: MAC address type names that specify random MAC addresses may be shown when the Host communicates by other communication devices. Guests cannot connect by a random MAC address.

The Host computer Windows or network logon user name will be enabled as a LAN user type name if the

Program Options

window

Host Name Tab

Name options

section

Enable User Name

box is checked.

The contents of the Host General Tab

Host ID

field will be enabled as a NetOp name type name.

305

NetOp Host

4.2.4.7 Messages Tab

This is the Host Tab Panel Messages tab:

It will show records of received

NetOp Messages in a table with these column contents:

· Received: Message icon and received date and time.

·

From: Guest name.

· Subject: Message first text line.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

The contents of received

NetOp Messages will automatically be saved in an rtf file in the

NetOp

Configuration Files Messages directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data

\NetOp Remote Control\Host\Messages. Files in this directory will be shown as Messages tab records.

Right-click a record or select multiple records and right-click to show this context menu:

View: Select one record and select this command or the

File Menu

View > Message

command to show the

selected record message in the

NetOp Message

window.

Delete: Select one or multiple records and select this command or the

File Menu Delete > Messages

command to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting selected records and their files.

4.2.5 Status Bar

This is the

NetOp Host Window

status bar:

If a Communication Profile that uses a

TCP/IP

,

TCP/IP (TCP)

or

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6)

Communication Device

is enabled, the right end of the status bar will show the Host computer IP address. A + will be shown after the

IP address if multiple IP addresses are enabled. Click the + to show other enabled IP addresses. The

General Tab

Address

field and the

NetOp Host Button tool tip will also show enabled IP addresses.

If a Communication Profile that uses the

TCP/IP

Communication Device is enabled and in its

Advanced TCP/

IP Configuration

window the

Use NetOp Name Server

box is checked, a yellow pages icon will be shown in

the status bar. An indicator may appear on the yellow pages icon:

· None: Specified NetOp Name Servers are available.

·

Red X: No specified NetOp Name Server is available.

306

NetOp Host

·

Red exclamation mark (!): One of two specified NetOp Name Servers is available.

Note: NetOp Name Server availability will also be indicated on the

Services Tab

.

If the mouse pointer is over a menu command or Toolbar

button, the status bar will be cleared and a hint to the command or button will be shown.

4.3 Host Tools

Select Host tools from the

Tools Menu :

- or from the Toolbar

Tool Buttons :

Menu and toolbar controls are explained in

Menu and Toolbar Control .

Note:

Tools Menu configuration commands and

Toolbar

Tool Buttons

will be disabled if configuration files are protected, see

Maintenance Password . Tool actions can be protected by a Maintenance Password .

These Host tools are available:

·

Program Options

·

Guest Access Security

·

Maintenance Password

·

Log Setup

·

Communication Profiles

·

Modem Database

·

Check for New Updates

·

Debug Trace

·

Run Setup Wizard

307

NetOp Host

4.3.1 Program Options

Click the

Toolbar

Program Options

button or select the

Tools Menu

Program Options

command to show this

window:

Note: This command and button will be disabled if configuration files are protected, see Maintenance

Password

. If protected by a

Maintenance Password , you must specify the correct password in the

Maintenance Password Enter

window to access the Program Options window.

This window specifies Host setup on these tabs:

·

General Tab

·

Host Name Tab

·

Connection Notification Tab

·

Audio-Video Chat Tab

·

Remote Printing Tab

·

Help Request Tab

·

Directory Services Tab

·

Web Update Tab

Note: Program Options window specifications are stored in the nhstconf.ndb configuration file that resides in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host. Some Host setup changes require Host restart to apply, see

308

Action Menu or

Action Buttons

.

4.3.1.1 General Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window General tab:

NetOp Host

It specifies

Startup

and

Connection

options.

Startup

þ Start Host when loaded: Leave this box checked to start the Host to enable communication when loaded

(default: checked).

þ Load Host at Windows startup (run as service): Leave this box checked to load the Host when Windows starts on the computer (default: checked).

Note: Loading the Host at Windows startup and starting the Host when loaded will make the Host ready for connection when the Host computer is switched on, even if no user is logged on to Windows.

þ Minimize Host when loaded: Leave this box checked to minimize the Host into a

NetOp Host Button when

loaded (default: checked).

¨ Stealth mode (hide Host when started): Check this box to load the Host hidden to the Host computer user

(default: unchecked). If hidden, nothing on the screen will indicate that the Host is loaded.

Note: To show a hidden Host, run SHOWHOST.EXE that typically will reside in the directory where the

Host is installed.

Connection

309

NetOp Host

¨ Minimize Host on connection with Guest: Check this box to minimize the Host window into a

NetOp Host

Button when a Guest connects (default: unchecked).

¨ Host top most window on connection with Guest: Check this box to show the Host window in front of any other window when a Guest connects (default: unchecked).

¨ Show file transfer status: Check this box to show the

File Transfer Status

window when a Guest starts a

File Transfer session (default: unchecked).

¨ Send keep alive message: Check this box to send a data packet at intervals while connected to alert the

Host user if the connection has been lost (default: unchecked).

Note: To maintain an

ISDN (CAPI)

connection during short periods of inactivity, do not check this box but

select the Short-hold mode option.

þ Allow Multiple Simultaneous Guest Sessions: Leave this box checked to allow multiple Guest connections to the Host at the same time (default: checked).

4.3.1.2 Host Name Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window Host Name tab:

It specifies Host

Naming

,

Name options

and the

NetOp Name Server

name space ID.

Naming

This section specifies the name by which the Host will identify itself when communicating.

Note: To communicate by a

Communication Profile that uses a

Networking

Communication Device (

310

NetOp Host

NetBIOS ,

IPX

,

TCP/IP ,

Terminal Server ), each Host must use a unique name. A Host that uses a name that

is already used by another communicating Host will be denied communicating.

Select one of these options:

¡ Enter name or leave name field blank: Specify in the field below a name or leave the field blank to name the Host by the specified name or leave it without a name.

¡ Use environment variable []: Specify in the field below an environment variable name to name the Host by the value of the specified environment variable.

Note: Do not name a network computer Host by the environment variable USERNAME if it is set up to

Load at Windows startup

. If you do that, the Host will load before a user logs on to Windows to get the name %USERNAME% and retain this name until reloaded while a user is logged on to get the name

<Windows logon user name>. Of multiple Hosts named %USERNAME%, only one can communicate.

Name a terminal server session Host typically by the environment variable USERNAME, see the

Administrator's Manual Advanced Tools chapter NetOp in Terminal Server Environments section NetOp

Naming in a TSE section. To show available Windows environment variables, in a command prompt window type set and press ENTER.

¤ Use Windows computer name: Name the Host by the Host computer Windows name (default selection).

Note: Name a network computer Host typically by the Windows computer name. Do not name a terminal server session Host by the Windows computer name. Terminal server session Hosts share the Windows computer name of the terminal server computer. Of multiple Hosts named by the terminal server computer name, only one can communicate.

¨ Prefix with computer workgroup name: Check this box to prefix the Host computer name by its domain or workgroup name to ensure Host name uniqueness across multiple domains and workgroups

(default: unchecked).

Separate with: []: The field will initially show the default separator character (\). You can replace it by any other character.

Name: The Host name according to the selection above will be shown.

Name options

þ Public Host name: Leave this box checked to respond to Guests that browse for Hosts by the Host name

(default: checked).

Note: If the Host computer is connected directly to a public network like the Internet, you may want to uncheck this box to not invite hacking attempts.

þ Enable user name: Leave this box checked to enable the name of a user logged on to the Host computer to enable connections by the user name (default: checked).

Note: If this box is checked, the user name will appear on the Names Tab

. You may want to uncheck this box on a server Host to disable connecting by the name of a temporarily logged on user or the user as

which the Host runs, see Run As Tab , to acquire the computer rights of the user.

NetOp Name Server

Name Space ID: []: The default Name Space ID is PUBLIC. Specify in the field the Name Space ID specified on Guests with which the Host shall be able to communicate by using NetOp Name Server.

The Name Space ID will apply only if the Host communicates by a

Communication Profile that uses the

TCP/IPCommunication Device

and for which in the

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

window the

Use NetOp

Name Server

box is checked and NetOp Name Servers are specified.

Note: To apply

Naming

or

Name Space ID

changes, restart the Host, see

Action Menu

or

Action Buttons .

311

4.3.1.3 Connection Notification Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window Connection Notification tab:

NetOp Host

It specifies connection notification options.

Upon connection

¨ Play sound: Check this box to play a sound when a Guest connects (default: unchecked).

Note: The upon connection sound file StartHRC.wav resides in the Media directory of the directory in which NetOp Host is installed.

¨ Display Connection List [] s. (0 = no timeout): Check this box to show the

Connection List

window when a

Guest connects (default: unchecked). Specify in the field the number of seconds this window shall be

shown (default: 6). The value 0 will make the

Connection List

window remain on the screen.

¨ Password to close Connection List: []: Check this box and specify a password in the field to make the

Connection List

window remain on the screen until closed manually (default: unchecked). Characters will show as dots or asterisks. To close the

Connection List

window, specify the password in a Password

window.

¨ Display balloon tip: Check this box to show a balloon tip from the

NetOp Host Button when a Guest

connects (default: unchecked).

During connection

¨ Play sound: Check this box to play a sound during Guest connection at this interval (default: unchecked):

Interval: []s. (10-60): Specify in the field a number in the range for the interval between sounds in seconds

312

NetOp Host

(default: 10).

Note: The during connection sound file ContHRC.wav resides in the Media directory of the directory in which NetOp Host is installed.

þ Display Guest name (if available) in the title bar: Leave this box checked to show the connected keyboard and mouse control Guest name in the

Title Bar , the Windows taskbar NetOp Host button and the

NetOp

Host Button tool tip (default: checked).

¨ Animate icon: Check this box to animate the NetOp Host Button double corner lines during Guest

connection (default: unchecked).

After connection

¨ Display History List [] s. (0 = no timeout): Check this box to show the

History List

window when a Guest

disconnects (default: unchecked). Specify in the field the number of seconds this window shall be shown

(default: 0). The value 0 will make the

History List

window remain on the screen.

¨ Password to close History List: []: Check this box and specify a password in the field to make the

History

List

window remain on the screen until closed manually (default: unchecked). Characters will show as dots or asterisks. To close the

History List

window, specify the password in a Password window.

¨ Display balloon tip: Check this box to show a balloon tip from the

NetOp Host Button when a Guest

disconnects (default: unchecked).

4.3.1.4 Audio-Video Chat Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window Audio-Video Chat tab:

313

NetOp Host

It specifies audio and video settings.

Audio Chat

General

þ Enable full-duplex audio: Leave this box checked to enable sending audio data between Guest and

Host in both directions at the same time (default: checked).

Note: Some computer audio systems do not support full-duplex audio.

Microphone sensitivity

Silence level: Drag this slide to set the microphone sound input level below which no audio data shall be sent (default: second tick from left).

Line hold: Drag this slide to adjust the period in which audio data shall continue to be sent after the microphone sound input level has dropped below the

Silence level

(default: sixth tick from left).

Note: Try out different settings for

Silence level

and

Line hold

to optimize audio communication.

Check Sound System: Click this button to check of the computer sound system to show a result message.

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

Playback

Preferred Device: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the preferred audio playback device

(default: <Use any available device>). The drop-down box list contains the names of playback devices found by Windows. Select a name in the list to show it in the field.

Record

Preferred Device: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the preferred audio recording device

(default: <Use any available device>). The drop-down box list contains the names of recording devices found by Windows. Select a name in the list to show it in the field.

Note: If multimedia devices are connected to the computer, the <Use any available device> selection may select a connected device instead of the computer sound system. In that case, select the computer sound system.

Video Chat

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

314

NetOp Host

Select driver to use: []: If a video camera is installed, this drop-down box will contain its driver name.

Select a driver name in the list to show it in the field.

If a camera that uses the driver whose name is shown in the

Select driver to use

drop-down box field is

enabled, the image frame will show its captured image.

Format: Click this button to show the Windows Video Format window to format the video capture image.

Properties: Click this button to show the Windows Video Source window to specify video source properties.

¨ Disable compression: Check this box to disable video data compression (default: unchecked).

315

4.3.1.5 Remote Printing Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window Remote Printing tab:

NetOp Host

It specifies remote NetOp printers.

Note: To send a Host computer print job to a Guest printing device, while the Guest is connected print to a

Host computer remote NetOp printer that specifies the Guest printing device. Special instructions for remote printing from DOS applications are available in the NetOp KnowledgeBase .

Remote NetOp printers

This pane will show the names of remote NetOp printers in the Host computer Windows Printers folder

(initially none).

Add Printer...: Click this button to show this window:

316

NetOp Host

Follow these guidelines that will remain on the screen while you add a remote NetOp printer. Click Ready to start adding a remote NetOp printer.

Remove Printer: Select a NetOp printer in the pane and click this button to remove it.

317

4.3.1.6 Help Request Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window Help Request tab:

NetOp Host

It specifies general help request options. If unspecified, the Host user can specify individual options with each help request.

Optional help information

Problem description: []: To always specify the same problem description, specify it in this field. If the field is left empty, the

Help Providers

window will be shown when requesting help.

Help provider: []: To always request help from the same help provider (help service), specify its name in this

field. If the field is left empty, the

Help Providers

window will be shown when requesting help.

Communication

Communication profile

Select one of these options:

¤ Use current Host communication profiles: Select this option to send help requests by enabled

Communication Profiles (default selection). Unless only one Communication Profile or only

Communication Profiles

that use

Networking

Communication Devices are enabled, the

Select Help

Request Communication Profile

window will be shown when requesting help.

¡ Use specific Communication Profile []: Select this option to select in the drop-down box one of the available Host

Communication Profiles .

Advanced...: Click this button to show this window:

318

NetOp Host

Communication

Phone number or IP address: [] (Optional): If requesting help by a

Communication Profile that uses a

Point-to-Point or Network Point-to-Point

Communication Device

other than Infrared (IrDA)

, a telephone number or IP address must be specified. If not specified in this field, the

Connect to Help Provider

window will be shown when requesting help.

Help request timeout if not answered [] min. (1 - 60, 0 = unlimited): Specify in the field a number in the range to cancel the help request if not responded to by a help provider within the specified number of minutes (default: 0, i.e. the help request will not be canceled).

Gateway login

If requesting help by a

Communication Profile

that uses a

Point-to-Point or Network Point-to-Point

Communication Device through a Guest network NetOp Gateway, it may request logon. If valid

Gateway logon credentials are not specified in this section, a Gateway logon window may be shown

when requesting help.

Login name: []: Specify in this field the Gateway logon

name (default: empty).

Login password: []: Specify in this field the Gateway logon

password (default: empty).

Login domain: []: Specify in this field the Gateway logon

domain (default: empty).

¨ Use current login credentials for Windows Security authentication: Check this box to log on by the name, password and domain of the user logged on to Windows on the Host computer (default: unchecked).

Options

¨ Add Help Request icon to the tray: Check this box to add this button identified by the tool tip NetOp Help

Request to the notification area in the lower right corner of the screen (default: unchecked):

To request help, double-click the button or select the button Request Help context command.

Note: If this button is added, the Host computer user can request help even if the Host is hidden, see

Action Menu or

Action Buttons

.

þ Enable help service: Leave this box checked to enable help request by a help service, see

Request Help

319

NetOp Host

(default: checked).

¨ Enable service tickets: Check this box to enable help request by a service ticket, see

Request Help

(default: unchecked).

4.3.1.7 Run As Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window Run As tab:

It can enable always running the Host with the rights of a Windows user account.

If no user is logged on to the Host computer, the Host will run with extensive Host computer rights but no network computer rights, see the Administrator's Manual Advanced Tools chapter NetOp Remote Control

Processes and Windows Security section.

If a user is logged on to the Host computer, the Host will run with the rights of the logged on user.

A connected Guest will get the rights of the Host limited by applicable

Guest Access Security .

For certain purposes, typically to assign network computer rights to the Host when no user is logged on to the

Host computer, you can run the Host as a specific user.

Run Host as specific user

¨ Enable: Check this box to always run the Host as a specific Windows user account (default: unchecked).

User name: []: Specify in this field the Windows user account name.

Password: []: Specify in this field the matching password.

Domain: []: Specify in this field the matching domain.

320

NetOp Host

Caution: Consider carefully in each case the benefits and drawbacks including security risks of always running the Host as a specific Windows user account. In some cases, you should run the Host as a Windows user account created exclusively for this purpose.

¨ Automatically change to random password every week: Check this box to change the password of the credentials specified above immediately and every week into a random password to automatically satisfy a password change policy.

Caution: Do not check this box if the credentials specified above belong to a user person, as the user person cannot know the random password.

4.3.1.8 Directory Services Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window Directory Services tab:

It specifies directory services to enable authenticating connecting Guests, see

Grant Each Guest Individual

Access Privileges Using Directory Services

.

Directory services

The pane will specify directory services as records in a table with these column contents (initially empty):

· Name: Directory service name.

·

Directory Server: Directory server IP address or DNS name.

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

Add...: Click this button to show this window:

321

NetOp Host

This window specifies a directory service.

General

Name: []: Specify in this field the name that shall identify this directory service in the

Directory services

section pane.

Directory server: []: Specify in this field the directory server IP address or DNS name.

Port: []: Specify in this field the port through which the Host shall connect to this directory server (default:

389, the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) port).

¨ Use secure connection: Check this box to connect to this directory server by a secure connection

(default: unchecked). The LDAP secure connection port number is 636.

Base DN: []: Specify in this field the directory service distinguished name from which a search shall start.

Credentials tab

This tab will specify the credentials by which the Host will log on to the directory server. The credentials will determine which directory service information will be available to the Host.

¨ Anonymous bind: Check this box to disable the fields below to search this directory service with anonymous user rights that are typically very limited (default: unchecked).

User DN: []: Specify in this field a directory service user distinguished name to search the directory service with the rights of this user.

Password: []: Specify in this field the matching password.

Confirm password: []: Re-specify in this field the password for confirmation.

Settings tab

322

NetOp Host

This tab will specify the search criteria applied to retrieve the properties of a connecting Guest user.

Initially, its fields are empty. Click Default to showthis window:

This window selects a directory service type.

The field of the drop-down box will show the selected directory service type (default: Microsoft Active

Directory). The drop-down box list will contain names of commonly used directory services. If the directory service type of the directory server specified in the

Directory Service

window

Directory server

field is available in the list, select it to show it in the field.

OK: Click this button to close the window to specify the default settings of the selected directory service type in the

Settings

tab fields.

Note: If the

Settings

tab fields become filled in from the

Select Directory Service

window, you will typically

not need to edit their contents.

User search filter: []: Optionally (recommended), specify in this field a search filter to limit the search for user attributes to a certain object class.

User attribute: []: Specify in this field the type designation of the searched for user attribute.

User browse filter: []: Optionally (recommended), specify in this field a user browse filter to limit the browse for user attributes to certain object classes.

Group search filter: []: Optionally (recommended), specify in this field a search filter to limit the search for group attributes to a certain object class.

Group attribute: []: Specify in this field the type designation of the searched for group attribute.

Group browse filter: []: Optionally (recommended), specify in this field a group browse filter to limit the browse for group attributes to certain object classes.

OU search filter: []: Optionally (recommended), specify in this field a search filter to limit the search for organizational unit attributes to a certain object class.

323

NetOp Host

Edit...: Select a record in the pane and click this button to show the

Directory Service

window with the

properties of the record directory service to edit them.

Delete: Select a record in the pane and click this button to delete it.

4.3.1.9 Web Update Tab

This is the Host

Program Options

window Web Update tab:

It specifies web update options to automatically update the NetOp Host installation.

Update server: []: Specify in this field the web address of the server from which to download Host update files

(default: update.netop.com, the NetOp manufacturer web update server).

Note: To update many NetOp installations in an organization, we recommend to

Publish New Updates to an

internal web update server.

HTTP Proxy: []: Specifying a HTTP proxy is typically not required. Before specifying a HTTP proxy, click

Update now to test the web update connection. If this yields a message indicating connection to the update server, specify no HTTP proxy. If Update now yields no connection, click Detect to make NetOp attempt to detect the HTTP proxy server to show its name and port number in the HTTP Proxy field. Click Update now to test the connection. If unsuccessful, consult with your network/system administrator about what must be specified in the HTTP Proxy field (format: <Server name>:<Port number>).

Update now: Click this button to connect to the update server specified in the Update server field. A Web

Update message will notify you if connection to the update server failed, if no updates are available or if updates are available and in the latter case ask you if you want to download and install updates.

Schedule...: Click this button to show this window:

324

NetOp Host

This window specifies a schedule of checks for updates including download and installation of available update files.

Schedule

Select one of these options:

¤ Disabled: Disable automatic web update (default selection). The other sections in the window will be disabled.

¡ Automatic download, prompt before install: Automatically download any update files and prompt the user when downloaded.

¡ Automatic download and install: Automatically download and install any update files.

¨ Allow system restart after install: Check this box to automatically restart the computer after update installation, if required (default: unchecked). Leave unchecked to deny automatic restart to after installation show a message that restart is required to complete the installation.

Run

Select one of these options:

¤ At loading: Check for updates when the Host is loaded (default selection). The Delay section in the image above will be shown.

Delay

[] minute delay: Specify in this field a number to delay the web update by the specified number of minutes

(default: 0, range 0-99).

¡ Daily: Check for updates on a daily basis. This section will be shown:

Start at

325

NetOp Host

[] every [] day: In the first field, specify the time of the day (default: 12:00). In the second field, specify by a number an interval in days (default: 1, range 1-99).

¨ Randomize within the hour: Check this box to randomize the update time within the hour following the specified time to avoid crowding (default: unchecked).

Note: If the Host is not loaded at the scheduled time, web update will run when the Host is first loaded thereafter.

¡ Weekly: Check for updates on a weekly basis. This section will be shown:

Start at

[] every [] week: In the first field, specify the time of the day (default 12:00). In the second field, specify by a number an interval in weeks (default: 1, range 1-99).

¨ <Weekday>: Check boxes to run scheduled web updates on selected weekdays (default: Monday only checked).

¨ Randomize within the hour: Check this box to randomize the update time within the hour following the specified time to avoid crowding (default: unchecked).

Note: If the Host is not loaded at the scheduled time, web update will run when the Host is first loaded thereafter.

¡ Monthly: Check for updates on a monthly basis. This section will be shown:

Start at

[] on the [] day of the month: In the first field, specify the time of the day (default: 12:00). In the second field, specify by a number the day of the month (default: 1, range 1-28).

¨ Randomize within the hour: Check this box to randomize the update time within the hour following the specified time to avoid crowding (default: unchecked).

Note: If the Host is not loaded at the scheduled time, web update will run when the Host is first loaded thereafter.

Start date

Year: [] Month: [] Day: []: Select in the drop-down boxes the schedule start date (default: today).

326

NetOp Host

4.3.2 Guest Access Security

Click the

Toolbar

Guest Access Security

button or select the Tools Menu

Guest Access Security

command

to show this window:

It specifies Guest access security on these tabs:

·

Guest Access Privileges Tab

·

Guest Policy Tab

·

MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab

·

Encryption Tab

·

Smart Card Tab

Note: General Guest Access Security specifications will be stored in the

NetOp Configuration Files nhstconf.

ndb file that typically resides in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Danware

Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host.

327

4.3.2.1 Guest Access Privileges Tab

This is the

Guest Access Security

window Guest Access Privileges tab:

NetOp Host

It specifies the selected Guest access method and its details.

Guest Access Method []: The field of this drop-down box will specify the selected Guest access method. The drop-down box list contains these Guest access methods:

·

Grant All Guests Default Access Privileges (default selection)

·

Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using NetOp Authentication

·

Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using Windows Security Management

·

Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using Directory Services

·

Use NetOp Security Server

Select a Guest access method in the list to show it in the field to apply it to connecting Guests.

328

NetOp Host

4.3.2.1.1 Grant All Guests Default Access Privileges

This Guest Access Privileges Tab

Guest Access Method

selection will show these tab contents:

This selection assigns one common

Security Role

named

Default Security Role

to all Guests that log on to

the Host by one common Guest Profile named

Default User

.

Default Security Role

Select in the left pane the Default Security Role folder to show this security role section to the right:

329

NetOp Host

Under the heading Allow Guest to it specifies in a check boxed list which privileges will be granted to a connected Guest. Checked privileges will be allowed, unchecked privileges will be denied. Check/uncheck boxes to change privileges.

þ Remote control: Start a

Remote Control session (default: allowed). Indented privileges below will apply to

a

Remote Control session:

þ Use keyboard and mouse: Execute keyboard and mouse actions on the Host computer screen (default: allowed).

þ Blank the screen: Turn the Host computer screen black to the Host computer user (default: allowed).

þ Lock keyboard and mouse: Disable the Host computer keyboard and mouse (default: allowed).

þ Transfer clipboard: Transfer Guest computer clipboard content to the Host computer clipboard or Host computer clipboard content to the Guest computer clipboard (default: allowed).

þ Execute command (Restart, ...): Execute system control (

Execute Command ) and other commands on the

Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Request chat: Start a

Chat session (default: allowed).

þ Request audio chat and transfer sound: Start an audio session including Audio-Video Chat

and transfer

Host application sound (default: allowed).

þ Request Video: Enable video in an

Audio-Video Chat session (default: allowed).

þ Send files to Host:

File Transfer from the Guest computer to the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Receive files from Host:

File Transfer

from the Host computer to the Guest computer (default: allowed).

þ Run programs:

Run Program

on the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Redirect print: Send a Host computer print job to a Guest computer printing device and vice versa (default: allowed).

þ Remote Manage:

Remote Management of the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Retrieve Inventory:

Get Inventory

from the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Send Message: Send a NetOp Message

to the Host computer (default: allowed).

þ Demonstrate:

Demonstrate

the Guest computer screen image on the Host computer screen (default:

allowed).

330

NetOp Host

þ Join Multi Guest session: Join a running

Remote Control session (default: allowed).

þ Act as a multi Guest session administrator: Manage a multi Guest

Remote Control session (default:

allowed).

Under the heading Confirm access it specifies the selected Host computer user access confirmation option:

Select one of these options:

¤ No: The Host computer user shall not confirm Guest access (default selection).

¡ Yes, unless: The Host computer user shall confirm Guest access unless any checked condition below applies.

¨ Computer locked: The Host computer is locked (default: unchecked).

¨ No user logged on: No user is logged on to the Host computer (default: unchecked).

¨ Guest user logged on: The Guest computer user is logged on to the Host computer (default: unchecked).

Note: For practical reasons, the

NetOp message

and

Get inventory

actions have been exempted from

Confirm access security that applies to all other sessions and actions.

If the Host user shall confirm Guest access, a window like this will be shown on the Host computer when a

Guest connects:

Allow: Click this button to allow Guest access.

Deny: Click this button to deny Guest access.

Note: You can customize the

Confirm Access

window text in a

NETOP.INI

file

[TEXT_CONFIRM_ACCESS] section, see the NetOp KnowledgeBase .

Default User

Select in the left pane the Default User Guest element to show these sections to the right:

Password: []: Specify in this field a password of up to 16 characters to enable shared password authentication. Characters will show as dots or asterisks.

Confirm password: []: Re-specify in this field the password for confirmation.

331

NetOp Host

Note: To disable shared password authentication to request no password from a connecting Guest, clear both fields. This will leave the Host without Guest access authentication to enable any Guest to connect to

the Host. Unless suppressed, the

Security Warning

window will be shown when the Host starts communicating.

Select one of these options:

¤ No call back: Do not apply call back (default selection).

¡ Call back to: []: Specify in the field a telephone number or an IP address to make the Host disconnect and

reconnect to the specified telephone number or IP address if a Guest connects by a Communication

Profile that uses a

Point-to-Point or Network Point-to-Point

Communication Device

.

Note: Call back to a specified telephone number or IP address will enable connections only from a Guest on a computer with this telephone number or IP address. For other Guest address restriction options, see

MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab and

Allowed ISDN Numbers .

¡ Roving call back: Select this option to request a call back telephone number or IP address from a Guest that connects by a

Communication Profile

that uses a

Point-to-Point or Network Point-to-Point

Communication Device . When the Host receives this information, it will disconnect and reconnect to the

specified telephone number or IP address.

Note: Roving call back is typically used to make connection costs payable by the Host organization, e.g.

when a traveling employee connects to the home computer.

Note: Default access privileges specifications will be stored in the NetOp Configuration Files nhstconf.ndb

file that will typically reside in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Danware

Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host.

When a Guest connects, the Host will request a password, if enabled.

If the Guest returns the

Default User

password, the Host will grant the Guest the

Default Security Role

privileges.

You can apply other

Guest Access Security

options, see

Guest Policy Tab

,

MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab

,

Encryption Tab

and

Smart Card Tab .

332

NetOp Host

4.3.2.1.2 Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using NetOp Authentication

This Guest Access Privileges Tab

Guest Access Method

selection will show these tab contents:

This selection will assign an individually named

Security Role to each Guest that will log on to the Host by an

individually named

Guest Profile

.

Each Security Role will specify what is allowed to the Guest and the selected confirm access option.

Each Guest Profile will specify Guest logon credentials and the selected call back option.

Initially, the left pane will contain the

Security Role

folders named Full access, View only, Inventory only and

Remote Management only. Each Security Role folder will expand into the Guest Profiles to which the Security

Role is assigned as illustrated in the image above.

Double-click a Security Role folder to close (collapse) or open (expand) it. You can move Guest Profiles

, also between

Security Role folders, by drag and drop.

Select a

Security Role

folder to show its Security Role section to the right.

Select a

Guest Profile element to show its

Password

section and

Call back

section to the right.

Right-click a

Security Role folder or Guest Profile

element to show this context menu:

333

NetOp Host

Note: This menu will contain Add security role only if right-clicking a Security Role

folder.

Add Security Role: Select this command or click the matching button below the pane to show this window:

This window creates a

Security Role folder.

Name of security role: []: Specify in the field the

Security Role name.

Add Guest: Select a

Security Role folder or a Guest Profile element in it and select this command or click the

matching button below the pane to showthis window:

This window creates a

Guest Profile

element in the selected

Security Role

folder.

Guest ID: []: Specify in this field the name that a Guest that uses this Guest Profile must specify to log on to the Host. This will be the name that identifies the Guest Profile

.

Note: A Guest is not limited to logging on by the name that identifies the Guest. Guest logon does not verify Guest identity but validates Guest credentials.

Password: See

Password

section.

Call back: See

Call back

section.

Delete: Select a Security Role

folder or a

Guest Profile

element and select this command or click the matching button below to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting it.

Caution: Deleting a

Security Role

folder will delete all

Guest Profile elements in it.

Rename: Select a Security Role folder or a

Guest Profile element and select this command to show this

window:

334

NetOp Host

Rename security role/Guest: []: Edit the name in the field to rename.

Note: Individual NetOp access privileges specifications will be stored in the

NetOp Configuration Files

security.ndb file that typically resides in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host.

When a Guest connects, the Host will request NetOp credentials that consist of a Guest ID and password.

If the Guest returns credentials that match a Host

Guest Profile

, the Host will grant the privileges of the

Security Role

that is assigned to the

Guest Profile .

You can apply other Guest access security options, see

Guest Policy Tab ,

MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab ,

Encryption Tab

and

Smart Card Tab .

335

NetOp Host

4.3.2.1.3 Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using Windows Security

Management

This Guest Access Privileges Tab

Guest Access Method

selection will show these tab contents:

This selection will assign an individually named

Security Role to each Guest that will log on to the Host by

Windows logon user credentials.

Each Security Role will specify what is allowed to the Guest and the selected confirm access option.

Initially, the left pane will contain the

Security Role

folders named Full access, View only, Inventory only and

Remote Management only. Each Security Role folder will expand into Windows user and group elements to

which the

Security Role

is assigned as illustrated in the image above.

Double-click a Security Role folder to close (collapse) or open (expand) it. You can move Windows user and

group elements, also between Security Role folders, by drag and drop.

Select a

Security Role

folder to show its Security Role section to the right.

Select a Windows user or group element to show its

Domain

section,

RAS

section and

Call back

section to

the right.

Right-click a

Security Role folder or Windows user or group element to show this context menu:

336

NetOp Host

Note: This menu will contain Add security role and Rename only if right-clicking a

Security Role folder.

Add Security Role: Select this command or click the matching button below the pane to show the

Security

Role window.

Add User: Select a Security Role folder or a Windows user or group element in it and select this command or

click the matching button below the pane to show on a Windows 2000+ computer the Windows Select Users window to select one or multiple Windows users to add them to the selected

Security Role folder.

On a Windows NT or 9x computer, this window will be shown:

Which domain is the account in: []: The drop-down box list will contain domains recognized by the computer.

Select one to show it in the drop-down box field as selected.

Select the account to add: []: The drop-down box list will contain the names of users in the domain selected in the drop-down box field above. Select one to show it in the drop-down box field as selected.

Click OK to add the selected Windows user element in the selected

Security Role folder.

Add Group: Select a

Security Role folder or a Windows user or group element in it and select this command

or click the matching button below the pane to show on a Windows 2000+ computer the Windows Select

Groups window to select one or multiple Windows groups to add them to the selected Security Role

folder.

On a Windows NT or 9x computer, the

Choose Account

window explained above showing groups instead of

users will be shown to add groups.

Delete: Select a Security Role

or a Windows user or group element and select this command or click the matching button below the pane to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting it.

Caution: Deleting a

Security Role

folder will delete all Windows user and group elements in it.

Rename: Select a Security Role folder and select this command to show the

Rename

window.

This section will show the selected Windows user or group element domain.

This section will be included only if the Host computer runs on a Windows 2003, XP, 2000 or NT operating

337

NetOp Host

system.

¨ Get call back information from Windows NT Remote Access Service (RAS): Check this box to use call back information stored in Windows NT Remote Access Service (RAS) (default: unchecked).

Call back: This section will be included only if the box in the RAS section above is unchecked, see

Call back

section.

Windows User Manager: This button will be included only if the Host computer runs on a Windows 2003, XP,

2000 or NT operating system. Click this button to show the Windows user manager window according to the administrator rights of the user logged on to Windows on the Host computer to manage users and groups.

Note: Individual Windows access privileges specifications will be stored in the

NetOp Configuration Files

secur_NT.ndb file that typically will reside in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application

Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host.

When a Guest connects, the Host will request Windows credentials that consist of a user name, password and domain.

The Host will query Windows Security Management for credentials validation and group membership information. If the Guest user and/or groups of which the Guest user is a member match a Host Windows

user or group element, the Host will grant the privileges of the Security Role that is assigned to the Windows

account object.

Note: A Guest user that is assigned different

Security Roles individually and as a member of groups will be

allowed what is allowed by any applicable

Security Role

.

You can apply other Guest access security options, see

Guest Policy Tab ,

MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab ,

Encryption Tab

and

Smart Card Tab .

338

NetOp Host

4.3.2.1.4 Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using Directory Services

This Guest Access Privileges Tab Guest Access Method

selection will show these tab contents:

This selection will assign an individually named

Security Role to each Guest that will log on to the Host by

directory services user credentials.

Each Security Role will specify what is allowed to the Guest and the selected confirm access option.

Initially, the left pane will contain the

Security Role

folders named Full access, View only, Inventory only and

Remote Management only. Each Security Role folder will expand into directory services user and group

elements to which the

Security Role

is assigned as illustrated in the image above.

Double-click a Security Role folder to close (collapse) or open (expand) it. You can move directory services

user and group elements, also between

Security Role

folders, by drag and drop.

Select a

Security Role

folder to show its Security Role section to the right.

Select a directory services user or group element to show its

Directory service

section and

Call back

section

to the right.

Right-click a

Security Role folder or directory services user or group element to show this context menu:

339

NetOp Host

Note: This menu will contain Add Security Role and Rename only if right-clicking a

Security Role folder.

Add Security Role: Select this command or click the matching button below the pane to show the

Security

Role window.

Add User: Select a Security Role folder or a directory services user or group element in it and select this

command or click the matching button below the pane to show this window:

The upper pane will show directory services specified on the

Program Options

window

Directory Services

Tab with an expandable directory tree structure. Click [+] buttons to expand and [-] buttons to collapse

directories showing users with user icons and their common names (cn=<Common name>).

Add: Select a user in the upper pane and click this button to add the user as a record in the lower pane.

Remove: Select a user record in the lower pane and click this button to remove it.

The lower pane will show records of selected users in a table with these column contents:

·

Distinguished Name: Directory path and common name of the user.

· Directory Service: Name of the directory service as specified on the

Program Options

window

Directory

Services Tab .

340

NetOp Host

Table controls are explained in

Table Control .

OK: Click this button to close the window and add the user records in the lower pane to the selected Security

Role folder.

Add Group: Select a

Security Role folder or a directory services user or group element in it and select this

command or click the matching button below the pane to show the Select Directory Services Groups window that is similar to the

Select Directory Services Users

window explained above to add group objects to a

Security Role

folder.

Delete: Select a Security Role

folder or a directory services user or group element and select this command or click the matching button below to show a confirmation window to confirm deleting it.

Caution: Deleting a

Security Role

folder will delete all directory services account elements in it.

Rename: Select a Security Role folder and select this command to show the

Rename

window.

This section will show the directory service name and the selected directory services user or group element distinguished name (dn).

Call back: See

Call back

section.

Note: Individual directory services access privileges specifications will be stored in the NetOp Configuration

Files secur_DS.ndb file that typically will reside in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\All Users

\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host.

When a Guest connects, the Host will request directory services credentials that consist of a user name, a password and a directory server.

The Host will search the specified directory server to validate returned credentials and to retrieve information on Guest user group memberships. If the Guest user and/or groups of which the Guest user is a member match a Host directory services user or group element, the Host will grant the privileges of the

Security Role

that is assigned to the directory services account element.

Note: A Guest user that is assigned different

Security Roles individually and as a member of groups will be

allowed what is allowed by any applicable

Security Role

.

You can apply other Guest access security options, see

Guest Policy Tab ,

MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab ,

Encryption Tab

and

Smart Card Tab .

341

NetOp Host

4.3.2.1.5 Use NetOp Security Server

This Guest Access Privileges Tab

Guest Access Method

selection will show these tab contents:

This selection will make the Host use NetOp Security Server to authenticate each connecting Guest and

assign a Security Role to it.

Group ID: []: Specify in this field the 32-digit hexadecimal NetOp Security Server group ID that identifies the

NetOp Security Server group that the Host shall use.

Note: You can copy the NetOp Security Server group ID from NetOp Security Manager, see the

Administrator's Manual NetOp Security Management chapter Manage Security Database Content section

Security Settings section Security Policies section Security Server Group Name section.

When a Guest connects, the Host will request logon credentials according to NetOp Security Management preferences.

The Host will forward returned credentials to NetOp Security Server for validation and compilation of the

Security Role

that shall be assigned to the Guest according to the security data stored in the security database. The Host will apply the resulting

Security Role to the Guest.

You can apply other Guest access security options, see

Guest Policy Tab ,

MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab ,

Encryption Tab

and

Smart Card Tab .

342

4.3.2.2 Guest Policy Tab

This is the

Guest Access Security

window Guest Policy tab:

NetOp Host

It specifies

Guest Access Security policies.

Password

Maximum invalid password attempts: [] (0 = unlimited): Specify in this field a number in the range 0 - 9 for the number of logon attempts that will be allowed to a Guest before the action selected in the drop-down box field below will be executed (default: 3).

Action if maximum attempts are exceeded: []: The field of the drop-down box will show the selected action.

The drop-down box list contains these options:

· Disconnect: Disconnect the Guest (default selection).

·

Disable Host: Make the Host deny any connection attempt and show this window:

343

NetOp Host

· Restart Windows: Restart Windows on the Host computer, which - depending on the Host setup - may load and start the Host and make it available for connection.

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

Disconnect

Action after disconnect: []: The field of the drop-down box will show the selected action. The drop-down box list contains these options:

· None: No action (default selection).

·

Lock computer: Lock the Host computer to show the Windows Computer Locked window. The Host will remain running and available for connection.

· Log off Windows: Log off the Host computer user from Windows to show the Welcome to Windows window. The Host will remain running and available for connection.

· Restart Windows: Restart Windows on the Host computer, which - depending on the Host setup - may load and start the Host and make it available for connection.

Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

System-wide disconnect hotkey: [] Shift [] Ctrl [] Alt [] Win []: Check any of the first four boxes and optionally specify a character in the last box to compose a keystroke combination that will disconnect all connected

Guests if the NetOp Host Window

is active or not (default: empty).

File Transfer

¨ Disable file transfer before local login: Check this box to disable

File Transfer

if no user is logged on to the

Host computer (default: unchecked).

Record Sessions

¨ Enable: Check this box to enable Host recording of remote control sessions and enable other section elements (default: unchecked).

Folder: [][Browse...]: Specify in this field the path of the directory in which session recording files shall be saved. Click Browse to show the Windows Browse for Folder window to select a folder, the path of which will be specified in the field.

¨ Disconnect if recording fails: Check this box to disconnect if session recording fails (default: unchecked).

Note: Session recording files will be named <Time stamp>-<Guest ID>-<Host ID>.dwr. You can play back session recording files only on NetOp Guest.

Timeout

Confirm Access: [] s. (0 = no timeout): Specify in this field a number in the range 1 - 9999 to disconnect if the

Host user has not confirmed Guest access within the specified number of seconds (default: 0).

Authentication: [] s. (0 = no timeout): Specify in this field a number in the range 1 - 9999 to disconnect if

Guest authentication has not completed within the specified number of seconds (default: 0).

Inactivity: [] s. (0 = no timeout): Specify in this field a number in the range 1 - 9999 to disconnect if there has been no Guest keyboard or mouse activity within the specified number of seconds (default: 0).

344

4.3.2.3 MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab

This is the

Guest Access Security

window MAC/IP Address List Setup tab:

NetOp Host

It enables limiting the network addresses from which a Guest can connect.

MAC/IP Address List

¨ Enable MAC/IP address check: Check this box to limit the network addresses from which a Guest can connect to the addresses specified in the pane and enable the pane and buttons (default: unchecked).

The pane will show records of specified addresses and optional comments (default: none).

Note: MAC addresses will apply if communicating by

NetBIOS or

IPX . IP addresses will apply if

communicating by

TCP/IP or

TCP/IP (TCP) .

Add...: Click this button to show this window:

345

NetOp Host

MAC/IP address: []: Specify in this field a MAC or IP address.

Comment: []: In this field, you can specify a comment that will be shown next to the address in the pane.

Edit...: Select an address record in the pane and click this button to show it in the

Add/Edit MAC/IP Address

List

window to edit it.

Delete: Select an address record in the pane and click this button to delete it.

346

4.3.2.4 Encryption Tab

This is the

Guest Access Security

window Encryption tab:

NetOp Host

It specifies enabled encryption types.

Note: NetOp communication will be protected by encryption. One encryption type is available on version 6.5-

NetOp Remote Control modules. A range of encryption types is available on version 7.0+ NetOp Remote

Control modules. Communicating NetOp modules will automatically negotiate to encrypt communication by an encryption type that is enabled on both modules. NetOp modules on which no common encryption type is enabled cannot communicate.

The pane shows check boxed available encryption type icons and names. Leave a box checked to enable the encryption type (default: all checked): Uncheck to disable.

þ NetOp 6.x/5.x Compatible: NetOp Remote Control version 6.5- compatible encryption.

þ None: Does not encrypt data and verify data integrity but verifies session uniqueness.

þ Data integrity: Verifies data integrity.

þ Keyboard: Encrypts and verifies keyboard, mouse, logon and password data.

þ Data integrity and Keyboard: Encrypts keyboard, mouse, logon and password data and verifies data

347

integrity.

þ High: Encrypts and verifies integrity of all data on a high security level.

þ Very High: Encrypts and verifies integrity of all data on a very high security level.

Show Details: Select an encryption type and click this button to show encryption details.

4.3.2.5 Smart Card Tab

This is the

Guest Access Security

window Smart Card tab:

NetOp Host

It specifies Smart Card login options.

Windows Security Management

Select one of these options:

¤ Never log in with Smart Card: Enable only credentials login (default selection).

¡ Always log in with Smart Card: Enable only Smart Card login.

¡ Allow both login with Smart Card and credentials (name, password and domain): Enable credentials and

Smart Card login.

Directory Services

348

NetOp Host

Select one of these options:

¤ Never log in with Smart Card: Enable only credentials login (default selection).

¡ Always log in with Smart Card: Enable only Smart Card login.

¡ Allow both login with Smart Card and credentials (name, password and server): Enable credentials and

Smart Card login.

Select one of these options:

¤ Subject field: Retrieve the user identification from the Smart Card certificate Subject field (default selection).

¡ Subject alternative name field (must be a User Principal Name (UPN)): Retrieve the user identification from the Smart Card certificate Subject Alternative Name field.

In the field, specify the Smart Card certificate field contents compatible directory services attribute type name only if different from a user object distinguished name.

Note: For Directory Services Smart Card login to succeed, the Host must be able to resolve the Smart Card certificate user identification into a Directory Services user identification. If the Smart Card certificate user identification and Directory Services user identifications are incompatible, Smart Card login will fail. To find available Smart Card certificate user identifications, insert the Smart Card and in Internet Explorer click the

Tools menu Internet Options command to show the Internet Options window. On the Content tab, click

Certificates to show the Certificates window. On the Personal tab, double-click the appropriate certificate record to show the Certificate window. Its Details tab will show the contents of available certificate fields including Subject and Subject alternative name.

4.3.3 Maintenance Password

Select the

Tools Menu

Maintenance Password

command to show this window:

Note: If a maintenance password is specified, maintenance password protection will be enabled and the

Maintenance Password

command will be protected.

This window specifies a maintenance password, what it protects and Host configuration files protection.

Change Maintenance Password...: Click this button to show this window:

349

NetOp Host

Old Password: []: This field will be disabled if no maintenance password is specified. To change the current maintenance password, specify it in the field. Characters will show as dots or asterisks.

New Password: []: Specify in this field a new maintenance password (max. 16 characters).

Confirm Password: []: Re-specify in this field the new maintenance password for confirmation.

Note: Disable maintenance password protection by leaving the New Password and Confirm Password fields empty.

Maintenance password required for

¨ Guest access security: Check this box to apply maintenance password protection to the

Tools Menu

Guest Access Security

command and the

Toolbar

Guest Access Security

button (default: unchecked).

¨ All other configuration: Check this box to apply maintenance password protection to all other

Tools Menu

setup commands and other Toolbar

Tool Buttons (default: unchecked).

¨ Unload and Stop: Check this box to apply maintenance password protection to unloading the Host, see

Title Bar or

File Menu , and stopping the Host, see

Action Menu

or

Action Buttons (default: unchecked).

Note: Apply

Unload and Stop

maintenance password protection to prevent Host stop or unload that will make it unavailable for connection and/or to

Protect security configuration files .

Protect security configuration files

Select one of these options:

¤ Protect by maintenance password only (if applies): Protect Host setup only by any applied maintenance password protection that does not protect Host configuration files (default selection).

¡ Protect files when connected: Protect Host configuration files and disable

Tools Menu

setup commands

when the Host status is

Connected

to prevent a connected Guest from changing Host setup.

¡ Protect files when connected and running: Protect Host configuration files and disable

Tools Menu setup

commands when the Host status is

Connected

,

Help requested

or

Running

to prevent a Host computer

user that by maintenance password protection is prevented from stopping or unloading the Host from changing the Host setup.

Note: Host configuration files reside in the NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and

Settings\All Users\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host.

If maintenance password protection is enabled, selecting a protected command or clicking a protected button will show this window:

350

NetOp Host

Enter password: []: Specify in the field the maintenance password. There is no limit to the number of maintenance password attempts.

4.3.4 Log Setup

Select the

Tools Menu

Log Setup

command to show the

Log Setup

window.

4.3.5 Communication Profiles

Click the

Toolbar

Communication Profiles

button or select the

Tools Menu

Communication Profiles

command

to show this window:

It enables/disables, creates, edits and deletes communication profiles.

Note: A communication profile is a named configuration of a

Communication Device . You can create multiple

communication profiles with different configurations of each

Communication Device .

Communication Profile List []: This pane contains check boxed Host communication profile names. Check boxes to enable communication profiles when the Host starts communicating (default: LAN (TCP) and TCP/

IP checked).

New: Click this button to show the

Communication Profile Edit

window to create a communication profile.

Edit: Select in the pane a communication profile and click this button to show the

Communication Profile Edit

window to edit it.

Delete: Select in the pane a communication profile and click this button to delete it.

Note: To apply changes to enabled communication profiles, you must restart the Host, see

Action Menu or

Action Buttons .

4.3.6 Modem Database

Select the

Tools Menu

Modem Database

command to show the

Modem

window.

4.3.7 Check for New Updates

Select the

Tools Menu

Check For New Updates

command to connect to the update server specified on the

Program Options

window

Web Update Tab

to check for any new updates to the Host installation and if specified in the

Web Update Schedule window download and install any new updates.

351

NetOp Host

4.3.8 Debug Trace

This command is normally not included in the

Tools Menu . To add it, in the Help Menu select

About

to show

the

About NetOp Remote Control Host

window. Press ALT+Z to add the

Debug Trace

command to the

Tools

Menu

.

Select

Debug Trace

to save a debug trace of recent communication. This window will be shown:

It will show where the debug trace is saved.

Yes: Click this button to show the debug trace.

No: Click this button to close the window without showing the debug trace.

Note: The NetOp debug trace is a plain text file that records recent NetOp communication events but not transmitted data. Its interpretation requires special NetOp expertise. It may be requested by NetOp support to troubleshoot communication problems.

4.3.9 Run Setup Wizard

Select the

Tools Menu

Run Setup Wizard

command to run the

Setup Wizard

to change Host setup in a guided dialog.

4.4 Host Sessions

NetOp Guest can connect to NetOp Host to run one or multiple simultaneous sessions with it.

When a Guest is connected, the

NetOp Host Window

will appear like this:

Its

Title Bar will show

Connected

and if selected in the

Program Options

window

Connection Notification Tab

352

NetOp Host

During connection

section the name of the Guest that has keyboard and mouse control in square brackets. If

multiple Guests are connected, +1, +2, etc. will indicate the number of additional connected Guests.

Among the

Toolbar Session Buttons , the

Disconnect

,

Chat

and

Audio-Video Chat

buttons will be enabled

(colored). The

Request Help

and

Cancel Help

buttons will be disabled (gray).

Connected will also be showed in the

General Tab Status field, on the Windows taskbar NetOp Host button

and tool tip and in the notification area

NetOp Host Button tool tip.

The

NetOp Host Button

will have double corner lines. Right-click it to show this menu:

Restore/Show to History List: See NetOp Host Button .

Disconnect: If one Guest is connected, this command does not expand. Select it or the matching

Session

Menu

command or click the

Toolbar

Disconnect

button to disconnect.

If multiple Guests are connected, this command will expand into these commands:

All: Select this command or the

Session Menu

Disconnect

command or click the

Toolbar

Disconnect

button to disconnect all connected Guests.

<Guest name>: Select this command to disconnect only the selected Guest.

Suspend Connect: Select this command to check mark it to deny further Guest connections (default: unchecked). Select the check marked command to uncheck it to allow further Guest connections.

Chat: If one Guest is connected, this command does not expand. Select it or the matching

Session Menu

command or click the Toolbar

Chat

button to start a

Chat session with the Guest.

If multiple Guests are connected, this command will expand into these commands:

All: Select this command or the

Session Menu

Chat

command or click the

Toolbar

Chat

button to start a multi

Chat session with all connected Guests.

<Guest name>: Select this command to start a

Chat

session with only this Guest.

Audio-Video Chat: Select this command or the matching

Session Menu command or click the

Toolbar

Audio-

Video Chat

button to start an

Audio-Video Chat session with the Guest that has keyboard and mouse control.

Pass Control...: This command will be included if multiple Guests are connected. It expands into connected

Guest name commands. The keyboard and mouse control Guest name command will be check marked and disabled. Select another Guest name command to pass keyboard and mouse control to this Guest check marking and disabling its command.

These session types are available:

·

Remote Control

·

Monitor

·

File Transfer

·

Chat

353

NetOp Host

·

Audio-Video Chat

·

Remote Management

·

Demonstrate

4.4.1 Remote Control

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can start and end a remote control session that will show the Host computer screen image on the Guest computer screen. The Host computer user can end all

sessions by disconnecting, see Session Menu

,

Session Buttons or

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu .

If the

Program Options

window

General Tab

Allow multiple simultaneous Guest sessions

box is checked, multiple Guests can take part in a multi Guest session. One Guest at a time can have keyboard and mouse control, which is indicated in the

Title Bar , on the

Connections Tab and in the

Connection List

window. The

Host computer user can

Pass Control

from one connected Guest to another from the

NetOp Host Button

Connected Menu

.

No window will be shown on the Host computer screen. The Host computer user and the keyboard and mouse control Guest computer user can work on the Host computer screen at the same time with the same privileges unless limited by Host

Guest Access Security or Guest remote control options.

Guest user remote control options include starting other

sessions , executing

actions

, sending system control

commands, managing a multi Guest session , sending and receiving clipboard content, loading

NetOp Marker

Utility on the Host computer, blanking the Host computer screen to make it appear black to the Host

computer user, disabling the Host computer keyboard and mouse and transferring Host computer application sound. Host

Guest Access Security can disallow some or all of these options.

4.4.2 Monitor

If

Guest Access Security allows

Remote Control , NetOp Guest can sequentially monitor the computer screen images of multiple Hosts and switch between monitor mode and Remote Control mode.

On the Host, monitoring will appear like multiple short Remote Control

sessions.

4.4.3 File Transfer

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can start and end a file transfer session to enable the

Guest computer user to transfer files between the Guest computer and the Host computer. The Host computer user can end all sessions by disconnecting, see

Session Menu ,

Session Buttons

or

NetOp Host

Button Connected Menu .

If the

Program Options

window

General Tab

Allow multiple simultaneous Guest sessions

box is checked, multiple Guests can run a file transfer session at the same time.

No window will be shown on the Host computer screen. To view what is happening during a file transfer

session, select the View Menu

File Transfer Status

command to show this window:

354

NetOp Host

The pane will show browsed Host computer directories and received and deleted files.

To automatically show this window when a file transfer session is started, check the

Program Options

window

General Tab Show file transfer status box.

Host

Guest Access Security

can limit the Guest file transfer privileges.

4.4.4 Chat

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can start and end a chat session to enable typed text communication between the Guest computer user and the Host computer user. NetOp Host can start and

end a chat session with connected Guests from the Session Menu

or

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu

Chat

command or the

Toolbar

Chat

button and end all sessions by disconnecting, see

Session Menu

,

Session Buttons or

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu .

If the

Program Options

window

General Tab

Allow multiple simultaneous Guest sessions

box is checked, multiple Guests can run a joint multi chat session with one Host. If multiple Guests are connected, selecting the

Session Menu

Chat

command or the

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu

Chat > All

command or

clicking the

Toolbar

Chat

button will start a chat session with all connected Guests. From the NetOp Host

Button Connected Menu , you can start a chat session with a selected onnected Guest.

This window will be shown:

355

NetOp Host

A similar window will be shown on participating Guest computer screens.

Dialog: []: This pane will show the chat dialog. A sender identification will precede each contribution.

Enter Chat contribution and click Send: [][Send]: Specify your contribution in the pane and click Send to show it in the

Dialog

pane of all participants.

Font...: Click this button to show the Windows Font window to specify the font of your chat contribution before sending it.

End chat: Click this button to end the chat session. You can exclude a Guest from a

multi chat session by

selecting its check marked command in the

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu

Chat

command submenu.

Guests can withdraw from a multi chat session. A Guest that has keyboard and mouse control can end a multi chat session.

Save...: Click this button to show a Windows Save As window that will suggest to save the dialog in your personal directory as an rtf file identified by the date and time.

4.4.5 Audio-Video Chat

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can start and end an audio-video chat session to enable sound and optionally image communication between the Guest computer user and the Host computer user.

The Host computer user can start an audio-video chat session with a connected Guest that has keyboard and mouse control from the

Session Menu

or NetOp Host Button Connected Menu

Audio-Video Chat

command or the

Toolbar

Audio-Video Chat

button.

Note: Each Guest and each Host can at the same time run only one audio session including Transfer Sound

(transfers Host computer application sound to the Guest during a

Remote Control session). If one connected

module runs an audio session, Audio-Video Chat commands and buttons will be disabled on both connected

356

NetOp Host

modules.

This window will be shown:

A similar window with toolbar button controls will be shown on the Guest computer screen. The Guest Audio-

Video Chat window enables the user to enable/disable audio or video and resize the Guest and Host Audio-

Video Chat window to accommodate a large, medium or small Remote video frame and end the session.

The Host computer user can end the session only by disconnecting, see

Session Menu ,

Session Buttons or

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu .

In the Remote section, the video frame will show the remote computer video camera image. If video communication is disabled, the frame will show No Video. If no camera runs on the remote computer, the frame will show No Camera.

In the Local section, the video frame will show the local computer video camera image. If video communication is disabled, the frame will show No Video. If no camera runs on the local computer, the frame will show No Camera.

The lower right Volume section has two slides and a pane:

· Drag the left loudspeaker slide to adjust the playback volume (default: maximum).

· Drag the middle microphone slide to adjust the recording volume (default: maximum).

·

The right microphone pane will monitor the recording volume. The show should remain empty while not talking. Colored blocks should partly but not completely fill the show while talking.

Specify audio-video chat options on the

Program Options

window

Audio-Video Chat Tab

.

4.4.6 Remote Management

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can start and end a remote management session to enable the Guest computer user to access a range of Host computer management tools. The Host computer

user can end all sessions by disconnecting, see Session Menu

,

Session Buttons or

NetOp Host Button

Connected Menu

.

If the

Program Options

window

General Tab

Allow multiple simultaneous Guest sessions

box is checked, multiple Guests can run a remote management session at the same time.

No window will be shown on the Host computer screen.

357

NetOp Host

4.4.7 Demonstrate

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, the Guest can demonstrate its computer screen image on the Host computer screen:

This

NetOp demonstration

window will show a live resized Guest screen image in which the Guest user can

demonstrate screen events. The Guest user can mask screen elements to make them appear as black rectangles.

The Host user can move, resize, minimize, maximize and restore but not close the

NetOp demonstration

window.

4.5 Session Tools

This session tool is available to the Host:

·

NetOp Marker Utility

4.5.1 NetOp Marker Utility

NetOp Marker Utility enables creating figure and text markers on top of the Host screen image and magnifying a section of the Host screen image.

Note: The NetOp Marker Utility program vitawrap.exe resides on the Host computer and marks and magnifies on top of the Host computer screen.

To load NetOp Marker Utility from the Guest, click the Remote Control display Toolbar or Toolbox Marker

Mode button to make it appear pressed in or select the Remote Control window Title Bar menu Marker Mode

358

NetOp Host

command to check mark it.

To unload NetOp Marker Utility from the Guest, click the Remote Control display Toolbar or Toolbox Marker

Mode button to release it or select the check marked Remote Control window Title Bar menu Marker Mode command to uncheck it.

To load NetOp Marker Utility from the Host, run (double-click) the vitawrap.exe file that resides in the directory where NetOp Host is installed.

To unload NetOp Marker Utility from the Host, on the Windows Task Manager window Applications tab end the NetOp Marker Utility task.

NetOp Marker Utility will show this window:

It contains these elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Upper Toolbar

·

Lower Toolbar

·

Status Bar

4.5.1.1 Title Bar

This is the

NetOp Marker Utility

window title bar:

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

Click the title bar icon or right-click in the title bar to show this menu:

359

NetOp Host

The top section contains window control commands, see Window Control . The other sections contain these

types of

NetOp Marker Utility

commands:

·

Figure marker commands, see Figure Markers

·

Text marker command, see Text Marker

· Magnifier command, see

NetOp Magnifier

·

Undo and Clear All commands, see Delete Markers

·

Properties and Help commands, see

Marker Properties and Help

Select Minimize to minimize the

NetOp Marker Utility

window into this Host computer screen notification area

button:

Behind the pencil, the most recently enabled marker tool symbol will be shown.

Right-click this button to show this menu:

360

NetOp Host

It contains a Restore command that will restore the

NetOp Marker Utility

window and the same

NetOp

Marker Utility

commands as the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu .

4.5.1.2 Upper Toolbar

This is the

NetOp Marker Utility

window upper toolbar:

It contains these buttons:

Draw Ellipse: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Ellipse command to enable the ellipse tool, see

Figure

Markers .

Draw Rectangle: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Rectangle command to enable the rectangle tool, see

Figure Markers

.

Draw Arrow: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar

Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu

Arrow command to enable the arrow tool, see

Figure

Markers .

Draw Lines (Stop=MB2): Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

NetOp Marker

Utility Title Bar Menu

or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Line command to enable the sectioned line

tool, see

Figure Markers

.

Draw Freehand: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Freehand command to enable the freehand tool, see

Figure Markers

.

Show Free Text: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Text command to enable the

Text Marker

tool.

Show Magnifier: Click this button to make it appear pressed in or select the NetOp Marker Utility Title

Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu

Magnifier command to show the NetOp Magnifier

window.

Undo: Click this button or select the matching NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu

or

NetOp Marker

Utility Button Menu command to delete the most recently selected marker, see

Delete Markers

.

361

NetOp Host

Clear All: Click this button or select the matching

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu

or NetOp

Marker Utility Button Menu command to delete all markers, see

Delete Markers .

4.5.1.3 Lower Toolbar

This is the

NetOp Marker Utility

window lower toolbar:

It contains these buttons:

Select Font: Click this button or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility

Button Menu Font command to showthe Windows Font window to select a

Text Marker

font, see

Marker Properties and Help .

Select Color: Click this button or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu

or

NetOp Marker

Utility Button Menu Color command to show the Windows Color window to select a

Figure Marker

color, see

Marker Properties and Help .

Select Pen Thickness: Click this button to show a line width drop-down box or select the

NetOp

Marker Utility Title Bar Menu

or NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu Line Width command to select a

Figure Marker or

Text Marker frame line width, see

Marker Properties and Help .

Help: Click this button or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility

Button Menu

Help command to open NetOp Host Help on the NetOp Marker Utility topic, see

Marker

Properties and Help .

4.5.1.4 Status Bar

This is the

NetOp Marker Utility

window status bar:

It will show a hint to the mouse pointer position button or highlighted menu command.

4.5.1.5 Figure Markers

To select a figure marker tool with the mouse, in the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

click the

figure marker button to make it appear pressed in or in the NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp

Marker Utility Button Menu select the figure marker command to change the mouse pointer into a pencil with

the figure marker shape.

To enable a figure marker tool from the keyboard, place the mouse pointer on the active

NetOp Marker Utility

window Upper Toolbar

figure marker button and press F9 to change the mouse pointer into a pencil with the

figure marker shape. Alternatively, while the

NetOp Marker Utility

window is active press ALT+SPACE to

show the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu and press the figure marker command first character keyboard

key or highlight the figure marker command and press ENTER.

To create a figure marker with the mouse, drag (sectioned line: click). To end a sectioned line, right-click.

To draw a figure marker from the keyboard, move the figure marker with the arrow keys. Press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage or section a line. To end a sectioned line, press F10.

To move a marker or change its appearance, move the mouse pointer to it to show an arrow-pointed +.

To move, drag or press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage.

To change appearance, right-click or press F10 to show this menu:

362

NetOp Host

Color: Select this command or click the marker and click the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Lower Toolbar

Select Color

button to show the Windows Color window to change the marker color selection (default: Red).

Line Width: Select this command to expand it into a selection of numbers of pixels or click the marker and click the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Lower Toolbar

Select Pen Thickness

button to show a drop-down box

with a selection of line widths to change the marker line width selection (default: 2 pixels).

Undo: Select this command or click the marker and click the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

Undo

button to delete the selected marker.

Clear All: Select this command or click the marker and click the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

Clear All

button to to delete all markers.

Click outside the menu or press F10 to close the menu.

To change figure marker tool properties, right-click or press F10 to show this menu:

This menu is similar to the Figure Marker Menu but has Unselect instead of Undo.

Unselect: Select this command, press ESCAPE, click the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

pressed in figure marker button to release it or select the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp

Marker Utility Button Menu figure marker command to unselect the figure marker tool to restore the normal

mouse pointer.

Note: Selecting another marker tool will unselect the selected marker tool.

4.5.1.6 Text Marker

To select the text marker tool with the mouse, in the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

click the

Show Free Text

button to make it appear pressed in or in the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu

or

NetOp

Marker Utility Button Menu select Text to change the mouse pointer into an angle that indicates a text marker

box corner.

To select the text marker tool from the keyboard, place the mouse pointer on the active

NetOp Marker Utility

window Upper Toolbar

Show Free Text

button and press F9 to make the button appear pressed in and

change the mouse pointer into an angle that indicates a text marker box corner. Alternatively, while the

NetOp Marker Utility

window is active press ALT+SPACE to show the NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu

and press the T key or highlight the Text command and press ENTER.

To unselect the text marker tool, press ESCAPE or use one of the selection procedures explained above to release the

Show Free Text

button and restore the normal mouse pointer.

Note: Selecting another marker tool will unselect the selected marker tool.

363

NetOp Host

When the text marker tool is selected:

· To create a text marker with the mouse, drag a dotted rectangle to show the

Text Marker

window.

· To create a text marker from the keyboard, move the text marker tool with the arrow keys. Press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys to create a dotted rectangle and press INSERT to disengage to show this window:

This window specifies the text marker contents and appearance.

In the pane, specify the text marker text. Right-click to show an edit menu.

Use frame: []: The field of this drop-down box will by default show No to show no frame around the text marker. The drop-down box list contains No and a selection of frame line widths. Select an option in the list to show it in the field.

Font: Click this button to show the Windows Font window to change the text marker font and color selection

(default: Arial Bold 30pt Red).

OK: Click this button to close the Text Marker window to show the text marker.

To move a marker or change its appearance, move the mouse pointer to it to show an arrow-pointed +.

To move, drag or press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage.

To change appearance, right-click or press F10 to show this menu:

This menu is similar to the Figure Marker Menu but has Font instead of Color.

Font: Select this command to show the Windows Font window to change the text marker font and color selection (default: Arial Bold 30pt Red).

Note: This menu will include a Line Width command only if a framed text marker is selected.

4.5.1.7 NetOp Magnifier

To show the

NetOp Magnifier

window with the mouse, in the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

click the

Show Magnifier

button to make it appear pressed in or in the

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu select Magnifier.

To show the

NetOp Magnifier

window from the keyboard, place the mouse pointer on the active

NetOp

364

NetOp Host

Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

Show Magnifier

button and press F9 to make the button appear pressed

in. Alternatively, while the

NetOp Marker Utility

window is active press ALT+SPACE to show the

NetOp

Marker Utility Title Bar Menu and press M or highlight the Magnifier command and press ENTER.

If the mouse pointer is outside this window, the window pane will show a magnified image of the mouse pointer surroundings.

To move the window, drag its title bar or place the mouse pointer in the title bar, press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage.

To resize the window, drag its sides or corners or position the mouse pointer on a side or corner to show a double arrow, press INSERT to engage, move with the arrow keys and press INSERT to disengage.

To change the pane image magnification, drag the right side scroll bar button or place the mouse pointer above or below it and press F9. Its top position will show a 1:1 scale image.

Right-click in the window or place the mouse pointer in the window and press F10 to show this menu:

Close: Select this command or click the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

Show Magnifier

button appearing pressed in to release it to close the

NetOp Magnifier

window.

Copy Ctrl+C: Select this command or press CTRL+C to copy the pane contents to the clipboard.

Refresh F5: The pane image will refresh when the mouse pointer is moved but by default not refresh if the mouse pointer is not moved. Select this command or press F5 to refresh the pane image.

Refresh Rate…: Select this command to show this window:

¨ Enable refresh timer: Check this box to refresh the pane image if the mouse pointer is not moved

(default: unchecked).

Interval (tenths of seconds): []: Specify in this field a number to refresh at the specified interval (default: 20

).

4.5.1.8 Delete Markers

To delete markers, click one of these

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Upper Toolbar

buttons or select the matching

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu command:

Undo: Delete the most recently selected marker.

Clear All: Delete all markers.

365

NetOp Host

Note: When NetOp Marker Utility is unloaded, all markers and any

NetOp Magnifier

window will disappear.

4.5.1.9 Marker Properties and Help

Specify marker properties and show help from the

NetOp Marker Utility

window

Lower Toolbar buttons or the

matching

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu or

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu commands:

(Select) Font: Click this button or select this command to show the Windows Font window to select a

Text

Marker font and color (default: Arial Bold 30pt Red).

(Select) Color: Click this button or select this command to show the Windows Color window to select a

Figure

Marker color (default: Red).

Select Pen Thickness/Line Width: Click this button to show a line width drop-down box or select this command to expand it into a selection of numbers of pixels to select a

Figure Marker or

Text Marker frame

line width (default: 2 pixels).

Help: Click this button or select this command to open NetOp Host Help on the NetOp Marker Utility topic.

4.6 Host Actions

A Host can Request Help

from Guests that offer help services.

A Guest can execute these actions on a Host computer:

·

Run Program

·

Execute Command

·

NetOp Message

·

Get Inventory

4.6.1 Request Help

The Host user can request help from a Guest that offers help services if the Host status is

Running .

Click the

Toolbar

Request Help

button or select the

Session Menu ,

NetOp Host Button Menu

or

NetOp Help

Request Button

Request Help

command to request help. The command or button will be enabled if on the

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab one of the

Enable help service

or

Enable service tickets

boxes is

checked.

If the help request is fully specified on the

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab and a help provider is

found, the help request will be delivered.

If on the

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab the

Use current Host communication profiles

option is

selected and more than one

Communication Profile is enabled of which one uses a

Point-to-Point or Network

Point-to-Point

Communication Device

, this window will be shown:

366

NetOp Host

The pane will show <Any initialized communication> and enabled

Communication Profiles . Select <Any

initialized communication> to use all enabled

Communication Profiles that use a

Networking

Communication Device or select a

Communication Profile .

The field will become enabled if you select a

Communication Profile

that uses a Point-to-Point or Network

Point-to-Point

Communication Device

. Specify in it the telephone number or IP address to connect to.

If a Communication Profile that uses the

TCP/IP

Communication Device will be used for the help request and

on the

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab the

Enable service tickets

box is checked, this window

will be shown:

Select one of these options:

¤ Use help service to search for help providers: Request help from a help service.

¡ Use service ticket to connect to a specific help provider: Request help by a received service ticket number to enable these fields:

Service ticket: []: In this field, specify the service ticket number.

Problem description: []: In this field, you can describe your problem.

Note: If on the

Program Options

window

Help Request Tab only the

Enable service tickets

box is

checked, this window will show only enabled service ticket fields. A NetOp on Demand enabled NetOp

Guest can issue service ticket numbers and forward a service ticket number to you to enable you to return a help request.

367

NetOp Host

If a Communication Profile that uses a

Point-to-Point

or

Network Point-to-Point

Communication Device

is selected but no telephone number or IP address has been specified, this window will be shown:

Specify in the field the telephone number or IP address to connect to.

If requesting help by a

Communication Profile

that uses a

Point-to-Point or Network Point-to-Point

Communication Device through a Guest network NetOp Gateway, it may request logon. If valid credentials

were not specified in the

Advanced Help Request Options

window

Gateway login

section, one of these windows can be shown:

·

The Shared NetOp Authentication window:

Password []: Specify the Gateway security password.

· The Individual NetOp Authentication window:

Guest ID: []: Specify a Gateway security recognized Guest ID.

Password: []: Specify the matching password.

·

The Windows Authentication window:

368

NetOp Host

User name: []: Specify a Gateway security recognized Windows user name.

Password: []: Specify the matching Windows logon password.

Domain: []: Specify the matching domain.

Note: If valid Gateway security credentials were specified in the

Program Options

window

Help Request

Tab

Advanced Help Request Options

window

Gateway login

section, no logon window will be shown.

If no help provider is found, a message will be shown.

Note: To browse for help providers beyond the local network segment if using a Communication Profile that

uses the

TCP/IPCommunication Device

, use an

IP Broadcast List or NetOp Name Server, see

Advanced

TCP/IP Configuration .

If help providers are found but no Problem description and/or no Help provider

was specified on the

Program

Options

window

Help Request Tab , this window will be shown:

Problem description: []: This field will show any problem description specified on the

Program Options

window Help Request Tab . You can leave the field empty or specify or edit a problem description.

Help providers: []: This pane will show the names of found help providers (on NetOp Guest named help services). Select one and click Select to deliver the help request to the selected help provider.

When the help request has been delivered, the

Toolbar

Request Help

button and

Session Menu

Request

Help

command will become disabled and

Cancel Help

will become enabled. The Host status will become

Help requested

to indicate that a help request is pending.

The help providing Guest user will be notified of the pending help request and will typically respond to it by

starting a Remote Control

session.

369

NetOp Host

Click the

Toolbar

Cancel Help

button or select the

Session Menu

Cancel Help

command to cancel a pending help request.

Note: A pending help request may be canceled by timeout if not responded to, see

Advanced Help Request

Options

. If the Host is restarted or a Guest connects, a pending help request will be canceled. You can

request and cancel help by a command, see

Loading Alternatives .

4.6.2 Run Program

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can run a program on the Host computer.

If the program runs in a window, it will be shown on the Host computer screen to enable the Host user to access it. Otherwise, nothing will show on the Host computer screen.

4.6.3 Execute Command

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can execute these system control commands on the Host computer:

· Log off: Log off the Host computer user from Windows.

·

Restart: Restart the Host computer.

· Shut down: Shut down the Host computer.

· Lock computer: Lock the Host computer to enable the logged on user or an administrator to unlock it.

·

Wake on LAN: Start a Host computer equipped with a Wake on LAN enabled network card.

4.6.4 NetOp Message

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can send a NetOp message that will show like this on the

Host computer screen:

This window contains these elements:

·

Title Bar

·

Menu Bar

·

Toolbar

·

Message Pane

·

Status Bar

370

NetOp Host

4.6.4.1 Title Bar

This is the

NetOp Message

window title bar:

Title bar window controls are explained in

Window Control

.

The title bar and the automatically saved message file will identify the NetOp message by its sender name, date and time.

4.6.4.2 Menu Bar

This is the

NetOp Message window menu bar:

It contains these menus:

·

File Menu

·

Edit Menu

·

Search Menu

4.6.4.2.1 File Menu

This is the

NetOp Message

window File menu:

Save As...: Select this command to show a Windows Save As window that specifies Save as type: RTF files

(*.RTF) to save the message content in a rich text format file.

Note: Files of received message contents will automatically be saved in the

NetOp Configuration Files

Messages directory that typically resides in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application

Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\Host. Records of files in this directory will be shown on the

Messages Tab

.

Print...: Select this command or click the

Toolbar

Print

button to show a Windows Print window to print the

Message Pane contents.

Close: Select this command or a

Window Control Close control to close the

NetOp Message

window.

4.6.4.2.2 Edit Menu

This is the

NetOp Message

window Edit menu:

Copy: Select text in the

Message Pane

and select this command, click the

Toolbar

Copy

button or press

CTRL+C to copy selected text to the clipboard.

371

NetOp Host

4.6.4.2.3 Search Menu

This is the

NetOp Message

window Search menu:

Find...: Select this command or click the

Toolbar Find button to show a Windows Find window to search for a

specified text string in the

Message Pane

.

Next: Select this command or press F3 to highlight the next occurrence of the text string specified in the Find window.

4.6.4.3 Toolbar

This is the

NetOp Message

window toolbar:

It contains these buttons:

Print: Click this button or select the

File Menu

Print

command to show a Windows Print window to

print the

Message Pane contents.

Copy: Select text in the

Message Pane

and click this button, select the

Edit Menu

Copy

command or

press CTRL+C to copy selected text to the clipboard.

Find: Click this button or select the

Search Menu

Find

command to show a Windows Find window to search for a specified text string in the Message Pane .

4.6.4.4 Message Pane

This is the

NetOp Message

window message pane:

Drag the

NetOp Message

window borders to resize the message pane.

You can print message pane contents from the Toolbar

Print

button or the

File Menu

Print

command.

You can copy message pane contents from the

Toolbar

Copy

button or the

Edit Menu

Copy

command.

You can search message pane contents from the

Toolbar

Find

button or the Search Menu

Find

command.

4.6.4.5 Status Bar

This is the

NetOp Message

window status bar:

It has no functionality.

372

NetOp Host

4.6.5 Get Inventory

If allowed by Guest Access Security

, NetOp Guest can generate, retrieve and copy an inventory of Host computer hardware and software.

No window will be shown on the Host computer screen.

373

Common Tools

5 Common Tools

This Common Tools main section explains tools that are common to all NetOp Remote Control modules. It contains these sections:

·

Communication Devices

·

Modem Database and Dialog

·

NetOp Log

·

System Info

·

NETOP.INI

·

NetOp Configuration Files

5.1 Communication Devices

NetOp uses the term communication device for the NetOp adaptation of a generally available communication protocol or a NetOp proprietary communication protocol.

NetOp modules will typically use different configurations of communication devices for different communication environments. NetOp uses the term communication profile for a named configuration of a communication device.

A newly installed NetOp module will include default

Communication Profiles . You will typically need to modify

the default

Communication Profiles

or create

Communication Profiles

to optimize communication in your environment.

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

In this window, you can create or edit a communication profile.

Communication information

Description of communication profile: []: This field must contain the Communication Profile name that must

be unique. You can edit the field contents.

Note: You can create multiple differently named communication profiles that use the same communication device.

Communication device: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the name of the communication device used by the

Communication Profile . The drop-down box list will contain these communication device names:

374

Common Tools

·

NetBIOS

·

IPX

·

ISDN (CAPI)

·

Serial

·

Windows Modem

·

TCP/IP

·

TCP/IP (TCP)

·

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6)

·

WebConnect

·

RemPCIPX v. 4.3 (Guest only), see

IPX

· RemPCNB v. 4.3 (Guest only), see

NetBIOS

·

Gateway

·

Infrared (IrDA)

·

Terminal Server

(terminal server modules only)

Select a communication device name in the list to show it in the field.

¨ Use dial-up networking: This check box will be enabled only if a TCP/IP family communication device is

selected in the

Communication device

drop-down box. Check it to expand the

Communication Profile Edit

window with a

Dial-up network connection section.

The lower window section will be named by the communication device shown in the

Communication device

drop-down box field. In this section, you can specify the configuration of the communication device that shall

apply to the Communication Profile . Click a communication device name hotspot in the list above to jump to

the section that explains the configuration options with each communication device.

The available communication devices fall into three groups by their NetOp characteristics:

· Networking:

NetBIOS

,

IPX ,

TCP/IP

and

Terminal Server . A NetOp module can connect to and browse for

NetOp modules that run on network computers ( Terminal Server

: - that run in the terminal server environment).

·

Point-to-Point:

ISDN (CAPI) ,

Serial ,

Windows Modem

,

Gateway and

Infrared (IrDA) . A NetOp module can

connect through a connection between two computers to a NetOp module that runs on the other computer or - if NetOp Gateway runs on the other computer - connect to and browse for NetOp modules that run on computers on the NetOp Gateway network or terminal server.

·

Network Point-to-Point:

TCP/IP (TCP) and

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) . A NetOp module can connect through a

network connection between two computers to a NetOp module that runs on the other computer or - if

NetOp Gateway runs on the other computer - connect to and browse for NetOp modules that run on computers on the NetOp Gateway network or terminal server.

Note:

Communication Profiles

are stored in the

NetOp Configuration Files

comprof.ndb file that typically resides in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp

Remote Control\<Module name>.

5.1.1 NetBIOS

NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) is a simple networking protocol.

NetOp NetBIOS is a Networking

Communication Device based on the NetBIOS protocol.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses NetBIOS can support multiple NetOp connections.

Communication that uses NetBIOS in its basic mode (in Windows: Microsoft NetBEUI) cannot pass network connection elements like routers. Communication that uses NetBIOS over

IPX or

TCP/IP

can pass network connection elements. Communicating modules must use the same NetBIOS mode. Different NetBIOS

375

Common Tools

modes use different NetBIOS Adapter Numbers

.

This section includes these sections:

·

NetBIOS Settings

·

NetBIOS Communication Profile Edit

5.1.1.1 NetBIOS Settings

To connect, specify a name by which the destination NetOp module can respond:

· If a Guest connects or browses using the

Host name qualifier H::, the Host can respond by its enabled

NetOp Name and MAC Address type

names .

· If a Guest connects or browses using the

Host name qualifier U::, the Host can respond by its enabled LAN

User type

name .

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

NETOP.INI Settings

These settings can be used in a

NetOp.INI

file

[NetBIOS] Section :

Key Value Explanation

Max_Packet_Size= <Number> <Number> specifies the maximum packet size in bytes. In case of communication problems, try specifying the minimum 512.

Rcv_DG_Threads= 1 or 2

Default is 2 (two datagram threads). If this causes problems, try specifying 1.

Resources

Required NetBIOS resources are typically available on any computer.

5.1.1.2 NetBIOS Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper window section is explained in Communication Devices

.

The Guest NetBIOS

Communication Device comes in two versions, NetBIOS for communicating with Hosts

version 5.0+ and RemPCNB v. 4.3 for communicating with RemPC version 4.3. The lower window section that is named NetBIOS or RemPC NetBIOS compatibility has the same contents:

Adapter number: [] (0-255): Specify in this field the adapter number assigned to the applicable NetBIOS

mode, see NetBIOS Adapter Numbers

.

List...: Click this button to show the

NetBIOS Adapter Numbers

window.

376

Common Tools

5.1.1.2.1 NetBIOS Adapter Numbers

In the

NetBIOS Communication Profile Edit

window NetBIOS/RemPC NetBIOS Compatibility section, click

List

to show this window:

The pane will show records of available NetBIOS modes in a table with these column contents:

· Number: Mode adapter number.

· Description: Mode type.

·

Version: Software version number.

· Type: Software type.

· Max packet size: Maximum packet size in bytes.

·

MAC Address: Network adapter MAC address.

Note: Network mode records will show the true computer network adapter MAC address. NetOp will assign random MAC addresses to inapplicable modes such as dial-up. Do not select any such records.

5.1.2 IPX

IPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange) is a Novell networking protocol.

NetOp IPX is a

Networking

Communication Device

based on the IPX protocol. IPX is typically used in network environments with NetWare servers and clients.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses IPX can support multiple NetOp connections.

This section includes these sections:

·

IPX Settings

·

IPX Communication Profile Edit

5.1.2.1 IPX Settings

To connect, specify a name by which the destination NetOp module can respond:

·

If a Guest connects or browses using the

Host name qualifier H::, the Host can respond by its enabled

NetOp Name and MAC Address type

names .

·

If a Guest connects or browses using the

Host name qualifier U::, the Host can respond by its enabled LAN

User type

name .

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

NETOP.INI Settings

This setting can be used in a NetOp.INI

file

[IPX] Section

:

377

Common Tools

Key Value Explanation

Max_Packet_Size= <Number> <Number> specifies the maximum packet size in bytes. In case of communication problems, try specifying the minimum 512.

Network Numbers

To find the network number for a computer with a known name, type this from a command prompt: nlist user=<Name> /a (NetWare 4.x) or userlist /a (NetWare 3.x)

If your computer is attached to a NetWare server that recognizes the name, it will respond with the network number in the address field.

Resources

NetOp uses IPX socket 8641 (hexadecimal) when communicating between a Guest and a Host. NetOp uses

IPX sockets 8186 and 8187 (hexadecimal) when communicating between a Guest and a RemPC. Novell has assigned these sockets to NetOp.

5.1.2.2 IPX Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

The Guest IPX

Communication Device comes in two versions, IPX for communicating with Hosts version 5.0

+ and RemPCIPX v. 4.3 for communicating with RemPC version 4.3. The lower window section that is named IPX or RemPC IPX compatibility has the same contents:

Novell Networks

Unless a network list has been created, IPX communication will reach only NetOp modules on the local network. You can extend communication to remote networks by the options in this section.

Select one of these options:

¡ Local network only: Communicate with the local network only.

¡ User defined list of networks: Enables the Network list button. Click this button to show the

Novell Network

Numbers

window.

¤ Build list of known networks: NetOp will browse to build a network list from information published by the router information protocol (RIP) to communicate with the networks on the list (default selection).

378

Common Tools

5.1.2.2.1 Novell Network Numbers

In the

IPX Communication Profile Edit

window IPX/RemPC IPX Compatibility section, click Network List to

show this window:

The pane will contain the 8-digit hexadecimal network numbers of selected remote networks (initially none).

Add...: Click this button to show this window:

Enter network number: []: Specify in this field an 8-digit hexadecimal network number or edit it.

Edit...: Select in the pane a network number and click this button to show the Novell Network Number

window to edit it.

Delete: Select in the pane a network number and click this button to delete it.

5.1.3 ISDN (CAPI)

CAPI (Common Applications Programmer’s Interface) enables ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) modems connected to each other to negotiate connection parameters. NetOp Remote Control version 7.0+ supports only the 32 bit version CAPI 2.0.

NetOp ISDN (CAPI) is a

Point-to-Point

Communication Device based on ISDN (CAPI).

Note: Each of the two ISDN B-channels can support one NetOp connection. CAPI will work with NetOp only if both ends of an ISDN connection support CAPI. ISDN non-CAPI communication that is not compatible with

ISDN (CAPI) communication uses the Serial or

Windows Modem

Communication Device . While CAPI 2.0 is

compatible with the older 16 bit version CAPI 1.1, by experience we recommend using CAPI 2.0 also at the other end of the connection.

379

Common Tools

This section includes these sections:

·

ISDN (CAPI) Settings

·

ISDN (CAPI) Communication Profile Edit

5.1.3.1 ISDN (CAPI) Settings

To connect, specify an ISDN device telephone number.

·

If a Guest connects directly to a Host, specify the Host computer ISDN device telephone number.

·

If a Guest connects through a remote network NetOp Gateway, specify the Gateway computer ISDN device telephone number and optionally the Host name, see

Point-to-Point or Gateway .

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest connected to directly or through a Guest network NetOp Gateway can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

Resources

An ISDN device that supports CAPI 2.0 must be connected to the computer. CAPI must be configured and enabled.

5.1.3.2 ISDN (CAPI) Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper window section is explained in Communication Devices

.

The ISDN section that will be shown if ISDN (CAPI 2.0) is selected in the

Communication device

drop-down

box has these contents:

Own number: []: If no other applications use the same ISDN line, leave this field empty. If other applications use the same ISDN line, specify in this field that part of your ISDN device telephone number that distinguishes the telephone number used by NetOp from telephone numbers used by other applications using the same ISDN line. If connecting through a telephone exchange, specify the last number of digits that are typically used for internal telephone numbers.

Enable

¨ Short-hold mode [] s. (10-250): Check this box to suspend the connection during short periods of inactivity to reduce telephone charges (default: unchecked). On the Guest, an additional field for specifying a shorthold period in the interval 10-250 seconds is available (default: 10).

380

Common Tools

¨ Use of 2 B-channels: Check this box to use both B-channels to increase transmission speed (default: unchecked).

Note: These options will work only if selected at both ends of the connection.

Wait before call back: [ ] s. (1-999): Specify in this field a number in the range to wait that number of seconds before call back, if applied, to enable the receiving modem to become ready (default: 10).

ISDN Number Check (Host only)

¨ Enable Guest ISDN number check: Check this box to allow only Guests whose ISDN device telephone

number is in the

Allowed ISDN Numbers

window pane to connect to the Host.

Edit allowed ISDN numbers...: Click this button to show the

Allowed ISDN Numbers

window.

5.1.3.2.1 Allowed ISDN Numbers

In the Host

ISDN (CAPI) Communication Profile Edit

window ISDN section, click

Edit allowed ISDN numbers

to show this window:

The pane will show allowed ISDN telephone numbers (initially none).

Add...: Click this button to show this window:

Enter phone number: []: Specify in the field a telephone number or edit it.

Edit...: Select a telephone number in the pane and click this button to show the

Phone Number

window to edit

it.

Delete: Select a telephone number in the pane and click this button to delete it.

381

Common Tools

Note: Allowed ISDN numbers are stored in the

NetOp Configuration Files anumlist.ndb file that typically

resides in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote

Control\<Module name>.

5.1.4 Serial

NetOp Serial is a

Point-to-Point

Communication Device

that enables analog or digital (non-CAPI ISDN) communication through a telephone connection or a direct cable connection (null modem) between two computer modems.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses Serial can support only one NetOp connection. NetOp modem

communication requires the same type of modem at both ends of the communication. Available modem

types are: analog, non-CAPI ISDN and ISDN (CAPI). ISDN (CAPI) communication uses the ISDN (CAPI)

Communication Device .

This section includes these sections:

·

Serial Settings

·

Serial Communication Profile Edit

5.1.4.1 Serial Settings

To connect, specify a modem telephone number.

·

If a Guest connects directly to a Host, specify the Host computer modem telephone number.

·

If a Guest connects through a remote network NetOp Gateway to a Host, specify the Gateway computer modem telephone number and optionally the Host name, see

Point-to-Point or Gateway

.

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest connected to directly or through a Guest network NetOp Gateway can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

Resources

To communicate using a digital telephone connection, an ISDN modem that supports the AT command set must be connected to and installed on the computer at both ends.

To communicate using an analog telephone connection, an analog modem that supports the AT command set must be connected to and installed on the computer at both ends.

382

Common Tools

5.1.4.2 Serial Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

The Serial section that will be showed if Serial is selected in the

Communication device

drop-down box has

these contents:

Modem

[] Null Modem (Direct Connection): Check this box only if using a null modem cable connection between the

Guest modem and the Host modem.

Modem Name: []: The list of this drop-down box will contain the names of modems in the NetOp Modem

Database . Search the list to find the name of the modem connected to your computer and select it to show it

in the drop-down box field. If the modem name is not in the list, use the options below in the specified order:

1. Download the most recent Modem Database from the NetOp

KnowledgeBase to possibly find your modem here.

2. Select Hayes Compatible Fast.

3. Look into the modem documentation or modem supplier website to find the required AT command strings to create a modem configuration that applies these AT command strings, see

New Modem

.

4. Send a support request to NetOp Support . Be sure to include the exact full name of your modem. We will endeavour to get back to you as soon as possible with a solution to your problem.

New Modem...: Select a modem in the drop-down list and click this button to show the

Modem Configuration

window to create a modem configuration in the

Modem Database based on the selected modem.

Edit Modem...: Select a modem in the drop-down list and click this button to show the

Modem Configuration

window to edit the modem configuration. If the button is disabled, you cannot edit the selected modem configuration but you can create a modem configuration based on the selected modem configuration, see

New Modem

.

(Settings)

Note: With some modem configurations, only some of the options will be enabled. You cannot edit disabled

383

Common Tools

options. If you need to change non-editable options, create a modem configuration, see

New Modem

.

Com Port: []: The field of this drop-down will show the selected communication port (default: Com 1). The drop-down box list will contain the names of serial communication ports on your computer. Select a name in the list to show it in the field.

Data Rate: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected data rate (default: Default). The dropdown box list will contain Default and commonly used data rates. Select a data rate in the list to show it in the field. Default will select the default data rate of your modem. Select a data rate that will accommodate the data rate of your modem and the modem you want to connect to.

Flow Control: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected flow control (default: Default). The drop-down box list will contain flow control options available with your modem. Select a flow control option in the list to show it in the field. Generally, select RTS/CTS (return to send/clear to send).

Dial Type: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected dial type (default: Tone). The drop-down box list contains the options Tone and Pulse. Select Tone unless you are connected to an old-fashioned telephone central that supports only pulse dialing.

Wait before call back: [] s. (1-999): Specify in this field a number in the range to wait that number of seconds before callback, if applied, to enable the receiving modem to become ready (default: 10).

5.1.5 Windows Modem

TAPI (Telephony Application Program Interface) is a communication protocol that is used for making data/ fax/voice calls, including the Windows applets HyperTerminal, Dial-up Networking, Phone Dialer, and other

Win32 communication applications.

NetOp Windows Modem is a TAPI based Point-to-Point

Communication Device that enables analog or digital

(non-CAPI ISDN) communication through a telephone connection or a direct cable connection (null modem) between two computer modems.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses Windows modem can support only one NetOp connection.

NetOp modem communication requires the same type of modem at both ends of the communication.

Available modem types are: analog, non-CAPI ISDN and ISDN (CAPI). ISDN (CAPI) communication uses the

ISDN (CAPI)

Communication Device .

Configuration

When a NetOp module is loaded for the first time and the Setup Wizard

is run, NetOp can automatically detect modems installed in Windows to automatically create

Communication Profiles for them in the

Communication Profile Setup

window.

You can create Communication Profiles for additional Windows modems from the

Windows Modem

Communication Profile Edit

window.

Note: With certain modems, the automatically created Windows modem

Communication Profile does not

provide satisfactory NetOp communication. These cases are typically known by NetOp Support that has developed

Serial

based

Communication Profiles that work with these modems, see

Serial Communication

Profile Edit .

This section includes these sections:

·

Windows Modem Settings

·

Windows Modem Communication Profile Edit

5.1.5.1 Windows Modem Settings

To connect, specify a modem telephone number.

· If a Guest connects directly to a Host, specify the Host computer modem telephone number.

· If a Guest connects through a remote network NetOp Gateway to a Host, specify the Gateway computer modem telephone number and optionally the Host name, see

Point-to-Point or Gateway

.

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest connected to directly or through a Guest network NetOp Gateway can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

384

Common Tools

Resources

To communicate using a digital telephone connection, an ISDN modem that supports the AT command set must be connected to and installed on the computer at both ends.

To communicate using an analog telephone connection, an analog modem that supports the AT command set must be connected to and installed on the computer at both ends.

5.1.5.2 Windows Modem Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

The Windows Modem section that will be showed if Windows Modem is selected in the

Communication device

drop-down box has these contents:

Connect Using: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected modem. The drop-down box list will contain the names of modems recognized by Windows. Select the modem that you want to use for this communication profile and edit the

Description of Communication Profile

name above, if desired.

Typically, this is all that is required to configure a Windows modem communication profile. However, these options are available:

Configure: Click this button to show the Windows <Modem name> Connection Preferences window to edit connection preferences.

Dialing Properties: Click this button to show the Windows Phone and Modem Options window Dialing Rules tab to select or specify a location.

Add Modem: Click this button to show the Windows Phone and Modem Options window to add a Windows modem.

Dialing from: and Calling Card: The Windows selections will be shown.

Wait before call back: [ ] s. (1-999): Specify in this field a number in the range to wait that number of seconds before call back, if applied, to enable the receiving modem to become ready (default: 10).

5.1.6 TCP/IP

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is a suite of network communication protocols. It includes among many others UDP (User Datagram Protocol) that is a widely used networking protocol.

NetOp TCP/IP is an UDP based Networking

Communication Device that will connect by UDP and optionally

385

Common Tools

communicate by TCP/IP (TCP) during a session, see

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses TCP/IP can support multiple NetOp connections.

This section includes these sections:

·

TCP/IP Settings

·

TCP/IP Communication Profile Edit

5.1.6.1 TCP/IP Settings

TCP/IP offers three connect options:

·

IP Address

·

Name Response

·

Name Resolution

IP Address

You can connect by IP address across segmented IP networks including the Internet. The source module port number must match the destination module port number, see

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

.

If you connect from outside a network protected by a network address translation (NAT) firewall or proxy server to a network computer NetOp module, specify the firewall or proxy server public IP address with the port number assigned to the network computer, e.g. 192.168.20.51:1234. Ask the firewall or proxy server administrator which port number is assigned to a specific network computer.

Name Response

Name response broadcasts a name, the first characters of a name or without a name requesting NetOp modules with a matching enabled name to respond. These name response options are available:

· If a Guest connects or browses using the

Host name qualifier H::, the Host can respond by its enabled

NetOp Name type name .

·

If a Guest connects or browses using the

Host name qualifier U::, the Host can respond by its enabled LAN

User type

name .

·

If a Host requests help

, the Guest can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

Note: A broadcast will reach only computers on the local network segment and computers whose IP address or DNS name is specified in the communication profile

IP Broadcast List

.

Name Resolution

Name resolution will resolve a specified name into its matching IP address. These name resolution options are available:

· In the

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

window, check the

Use NetOp Name Server

box and specify the

NetOp Name Servers that shall be used and in the

Program Options

window

Host Name Tab

NetOp Name

Server

section specify the Name Space ID used by the NetOp modules you want to connect to. Connect by

any enabled destination module name, for a Host

help request a Guest

Help service

name. NetOp Name

Server will resolve the name into the matching IP address to connect by it across segmented IP networks

including the Internet. You can also Browse for Hosts

using NetOp Name Server.

·

If a Guest connects by a name using the

Host name qualifier DNS::, a domain name server will interpret

the name as a DNS name and attempt to resolve it into a matching IP address for the Guest to connect by it across segmented IP networks including the Internet.

Note: In most cases, if using the

Host name qualifier H:: a domain name server will interpret the name as

a DNS name and attempt to resolve it into a matching IP address.

· If a Guest connects by a name using the

Host name qualifier LDAP::, the Guest will search directory

services specified on the Guest

Program Options

window

Directory Services Tab for a user with this name

to connect by the matching address attribute that is typically an IP address. You can also

Browse for Hosts

using directory services.

386

Common Tools

Connect Problems

In case of connect problems, first verify that an IP connection is available by from a command prompt typing:

PING <NetOp module IP address>

The PING utility will send four data packets that request a reply. If replies are received, an IP connection is available.

If an IP connection is available and connectivity problems persist, consult with your network/system administrator. As a last resort, submit a support request to NetOp Support .

Resources

TCP/IP uses one port for sending and one port for receiving communication.

By default, NetOp Remote Control will use port number 6502 for sending and receiving.

You can use other port numbers, but remember that the source module send port number must always match the destination module receive port number, see

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration .

5.1.6.2 TCP/IP Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

¨ Use dial-up networking: Check this box to expand the window with the

Dial-up network connection

section

(default: unchecked).

The

TCP/IP

section will be shown if TCP/IP is selected in the

Communication device

drop-down box.

Dial-up network connection

Dial-up network profile: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected profile. The drop-down box list contains the names of available profiles. Select a profile in the list to show it in the field to connect to a network by this dial-up network profile.

Dialing from: and Calling card: The dialing properties of the selected dial-up network profile will be shown.

387

Common Tools

Configure: Click this button to show the Windows Dial-up Connection window to configure the dial-up connection.

Dialing properties: Click this button to show the Windows Phone and Modem Options window to edit the dialing properties of the selected dial-up network profile.

Add profile: Click this button to show the Windows Network Connection Wizard to add a dial-up network profile.

TCP/IP

Max packet size (MTU): [] (512 – 5146 bytes): Specify in this field the maximum packet size (range 512-

5146, default: 2600).

Note: A high MTU will increase communication speed and a low MTU may contribute to solving communication problems.

¨ Optimize for Internet communication: Check this box to apply settings (MTU, data compression, etc.) optimized for communicating across the Internet.

Advanced...: Click this button to show the

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

window.

IP Broadcast List...: Click this button to show the

IP Broadcast List

window.

5.1.6.2.1 Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

In the

TCP/IP Communication Profile Edit

window

TCP/IP

section, the

TCP/IP (TCP) Communication Profile

Edit

window

TCP

section or the

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) Communication Profile Edit

window

TCP IPv6

section,

click

Advanced

to show this window

:

Specify IP Address

þ Use all available IP addresses: Leave this box checked to use all available IP addresses (default: checked). If the computer has multiple IP addresses and only one of them shall be used for NetOp communication, uncheck the box to enable the

IP address

field.

388

Common Tools

IP address: []: Specify in this field the IP address that shall be used for NetOp communication.

Specify Port Numbers

þ Use default port numbers: Leave this box checked to use the default NetOp port number 6502 for

Receive port

and

Send port

(default: checked).

Note: Port number 1970 is officially registered to NetOp Remote Control. However, port number 6502 is the preferred default port number for compatibility with older NetOp versions.

Receive port: If the

Use default port numbers

box is checked, 6502 will be shown. If unchecked, by default

6502 will be shown in an enabled field. You can specify a number in the range 1025 - 65535.

Send port: If the

Use default port numbers

box is checked, 6502 will be shown. If unchecked, by default 6502

will be shown in an enabled field. You can specify a number in the range 1025-65535.

Note: The source module

Send port

number must match the destination module

Receive port

number. See also the Special Note on Receive Port Number

below.

Options

Note: This section will be included only if this window was shown from a Communication Profile that uses

TCP/IP .

þ Use TCP for session if possible: Leave this box checked to connect by

TCP/IP but if available on Guest

and Host switch to

TCP/IP (TCP)

when connected for high speed session communication (default: checked).

NetOp Name Server

Note: This section will be enabled only if this window was shown from a

Communication Profile that uses

TCP/IP .

¨ Use NetOp Name Server: Check this box to use NetOp Name Server to resolve NetOp names into IP addresses (default: unchecked).

Note: Using NetOp Name Server will facilitate connecting across segmented IP networks including the

Internet.

Primary: []: Leave in this field the default name nns1.netop.com of the primary public NetOp Name Server on the Internet or specify the IP address or DNS name of a primary NetOp Name Server on your corporate network.

Secondary: []: Leave in this field the default name nns2.netop.dk of the secondary public NetOp Name

Server on the Internet or specify the IP address or DNS name of a secondary NetOp Name Server on your corporate network.

¨ Ignore port information from Name Server: Check this box to replace the destination module

Receive port

number received from NetOp Name Server by the port number specified below (default: unchecked).

Note: Some types of firewalls replace sent

Receive port

numbers by invalid port numbers to protect

network computers against connection attempts. In that case, NetOp Name Server will receive, store and return invalid

Receive port

numbers that must be replaced by valid

Receive port

numbers.

Use Port: []: Specify in this field the port number that shall replace the

Receive port

number received from

NetOp Name Server (default: 6502).

Note: To use NetOp Name Server, you must specify the applicable Name Space ID in the

Program Options

window Host Name Tab

NetOp Name Server

section.

Special Note on Receive Port Number

The communication devices TCP/IP

and

TCP/IP (TCP) including

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6)

use the specified receive port number in different ways:

TCP/IP listens by the specified

Receive port

number and specifies this

Receive port

number in sent

communication to receive return communication by the specified

Receive port

number. TCP/IP does not

allow

Communication Profiles that specify identical IP addresses and

Receive port

numbers to be enabled at

the same time. If you specify the

Receive port

number 0 (zero), sent communication will specify another

389

Common Tools

available

Receive port

number to receive return communication by this

Receive port

number.

TCP/IP (TCP)

listens by the specified

Receive port

number but specifies by default another available

Receive port

number in sent communication to receive return communication by this

Receive port

number. In this

case, a

Communication Profile

that uses

TCP/IP (TCP) and a

Communication Profile

that uses TCP/IP with

identical IP addresses and

Receive port

numbers can be enabled at the same time.

To specify the listening

Receive port

number in sent

TCP/IP (TCP) communication, apply this

NETOP.INI

file

[TCP] Section

setting:

[TCP]

BindToRecvPort=True

If this setting is applied, a

Communication Profile

that uses TCP/IP (TCP) and a

Communication Profile that

uses

TCP/IP with identical IP addresses and

Receive port

numbers cannot be enabled at the same time.

5.1.6.2.2 IP Broadcast List

In the

TCP/IP Communication Profile Edit

window

TCP/IP

section, click

IP Broadcast List

to show this

window:

Using

TCP/IP , connecting or browsing by

Name Response will broadcast communication that will reach only

computers on the local network segment. To extend broadcasts beyond the local network segment, specify in this window the IP addresses, IP address ranges and DNS names that shall be reached by broadcasts

(initially none).

Note: The IP Broadcast List will not be used if connecting by

IP Address

or connecting or browsing by

Name

Resolution .

Add...: Click this button to show this window:

Enter DNS name or IP Address: []: Specify in this field an IP address, e.g. 192.168.102.57, an IP address

390

Common Tools

range, e.g. 192.168.102.20-192.168.102.30, or a DNS name, e.g. MAIL_SVR, to add it in the

IP Broadcast

List

window pane.

Caution: Specifying an IP address range will make each broadcast send a number of data packets that matches the number of IP addresses in the range. To avoid excessive network traffic, do not specify larger

IP address ranges than justified.

Edit...: Select in the pane an IP address, an IP address range or a DNS name and click this button to show it in the

IP Broadcast List (Enter)

window to edit it.

Delete: Select in the pane an IP address, an IP address range or a DNS name and click this button to delete it.

¨ Disable local subnet broadcast: Check this box to disable local network segment broadcast to send data packets only to the addresses specified in the pane (default: unchecked).

5.1.7 TCP/IP (TCP)

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is a suite of network communication protocols. It includes among many others TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) that is a commonly used point-to-point protocol.

NetOp TCP/IP (TCP) is a TCP based Network Point-to-Point

Communication Device

.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses TCP/IP (TCP) can support one NetOp connection. To support

multiple NetOp connections, you can create multiple

Communication Profiles

that use TCP/IP (TCP).

This section includes these sections:

·

TCP/IP (TCP) Settings

·

TCP/IP (TCP) Communication Profile Edit

5.1.7.1 TCP/IP (TCP) Settings

To connect, specify a computer IP address.

If you connect from outside a network protected by a network address translation (NAT) firewall or proxy server to a network computer NetOp module, specify the firewall or proxy server public IP address with the port number assigned to the network computer, e.g. 192.168.20.51:1234. Ask the firewall or proxy server administrator which port number is assigned to a specific network computer.

·

If a Guest connects directly to a Host, specify the Host computer IP address.

· If a Guest connects through a remote network NetOp Gateway to a Host, specify the Gateway computer IP address and optionally the Host name, see

Network Point-to-Point .

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest connected to directly or on a remote NetOp Gateway network can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

Other TCP/IP (TCP) settings are the same as the

TCP/IP Settings .

391

Common Tools

5.1.7.2 TCP/IP (TCP) Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

¨ Use dial-up networking: Check this box to expand the window with the

Dial-up network connection

section

(default: unchecked).

The TCP section that will be shown if TCP/IP (TCP) is selected in the

Communication device

drop-down box

has these contents:

¨ Optimize for Internet communication: Check this box to apply settings (MTU, data compression, etc.) optimized for communicating across the Internet (default: unchecked).

¨ Encapsulate in HTTP: Check this box to wrap data packets as HTTP packets to ease firewall passage

(default: unchecked). This is also known as HTTP-tunneling.

Advanced...: Click this button to show the

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

window.

5.1.8 TCP/IP (TCP IPv6)

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is a suite of network communication protocols. It includes among many others TCP IPv6 (Transmission Control Protocol for Internet Protocol version 6) that is a recently introduced point-to-point protocol for Internet Protocol version 6 networks.

NetOp TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) is a TCP IPv6 based

Network Point-to-Point

Communication Device

.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) can support one NetOp connection. To

support multiple NetOp connections, you can create multiple

Communication Profiles

that use TCP/IP (TCP

IPv6). You can use TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) only between computers connected to an IPv6 network.

This section includes these sections:

·

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) Settings

·

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) Communication Profile Edit

5.1.8.1 TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) Settings

To connect, specify a computer IPv6 address.

·

If a Guest connects directly to a Host, specify the Host computer IPv6 address.

· If a Guest connects through a remote network NetOp Gateway to a Host, specify the Gateway computer

392

Common Tools

IPv6 address and optionally the Host name, see Network Point-to-Point .

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest connected to directly or on a remote NetOp Gateway network can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

5.1.8.2 TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

¨ Use dial-up networking: Check this box to expand the window with the

Dial-up network connection

section

(default: unchecked).

The TCP IPv6 section that will be shown if TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) is selected in the

Communication device

drop-

down box has these contents:

¨ Optimize for Internet communication: Check this box to apply settings (MTU, data compression, etc.) optimized for communicating across the Internet.

Advanced...: Click this button to show the

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

window.

5.1.9 WebConnect

WebConnect is a NetOp proprietary

Point-to-Point

Communication Device

with

Networking

Communication

Device properties that enables network NetOp modules to connect swiftly by a NetOp Connection Service on

the local network or on the Internet.

This section includes these sections:

·

WebConnect Settings

·

WebConnect Communication Profile Edit

5.1.9.1 WebConnect Settings

To connect, specify the computer IP address of the NetOp module you want to connect to. If the NetOp module you want to connect to uses the same NetOp Connection Service that you use, the NetOp

Connection Service will connect you.

· If a Guest connects directly to a Host, specify the Host computer IP address.

· If a Guest connects through a remote network NetOp Gateway to a Host, specify the Gateway computer IP address and optionally the Host name, see

Network Point-to-Point .

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest connected to directly or on a remote NetOp Gateway network can respond

393

Common Tools

by its enabled

Help service

names.

5.1.9.2 WebConnect Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

¨ Use dial-up networking: Disabled.

The WebConnect section that will be shown if WebConnect is selected in the

Communication device

dropdown box has these contents:

¨ Optimize for Internet communication: Check this box to apply settings (MTU, data compression, etc.) optimized for communicating across the Internet (default: unchecked).

¨ Encapsulate in HTTP: Check this box to wrap data packets as HTTP packets to ease firewall passage by

HTTP tunnelling (default: unchecked).

Advanced...: Click this button to show the

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration

window.

Credentials: Click to show this window:

Specify the credentials by which the NetOp module shall identify itself when connecting to the NetOp

394

Common Tools

WebConnect service:

Login name []: Specify a WebConnect service recognized login name.

Password []: Specify the matching password.

Confirm password []: Re-specify the password for confirmation.

Domain []: Specify the matching domain.

5.1.10 Gateway

Gateway is a NetOp proprietary

Point-to-Point

Communication Device

that enables a network NetOp module to connect through a local network NetOp Gateway.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses Gateway can support only one NetOp connection.

This section includes these sections:

·

Gateway Settings

·

Gateway Communication Profile Edit

5.1.10.1 Gateway Settings

To connect, specify a modem telephone number or computer IP address according to the selected device group type, see

Gateway Device Group List

.

· If a Guest connects through a local network NetOp Gateway directly to a Host, specify the Host computer modem telephone number or computer IP address.

· If a Guest connects through a local network NetOp Gateway through a remote network NetOp Gateway to a Host, specify the Gateway computer modem telephone number or computer IP address and optionally the Host name, see

Point-to-Point or Gateway .

·

If a Host requests help

through a local network NetOp Gateway, a Guest connected to directly or on a remote NetOp Gateway network can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

Resources

To use Gateway, one or multiple outgoing NetOp Gateways must run on the local network.

395

Common Tools

5.1.10.2 Gateway Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

The Gateway section that will be shown if Gateway is selected in the

Communication device

drop-down box

has these contents:

Access Gateway via communication profile: []: The field of this drop-down box will show the name of the

Communication Profile that connects to the local network NetOp Gateway (default: <Any initialized

communication>). The drop-down box list contains <Any initialized communication>, available

Communication Profiles

that use a

Networking

Communication Device

and

Terminal Server

. Select a

Communication Profile in the list to show it in the field.

Select <Any initialized communication> to connect to or browse for

Gateway device groups using any

enabled

Communication Profile that uses a

Networking

Communication Device . Select another

Communication Profile to connect or browse using only this Communication Profile that does not need to be

enabled. Select

Terminal Server

only if your NetOp module resides on a terminal server client.

Gateway device group

Gateway device groups are administrator specified names of available outgoing

point-to-point and network point-to-point communication on local network NetOp Gateways.

Select one of these options:

¤ Use device group: []: Select this option to specify a Gateway device group name in the field (default selection).

¡ Browse for device groups: Select this option to show the

Gateway Device Group List

window when connecting.

5.1.10.2.1 Gateway Device Group List

When connecting using a

Communication Profile

that uses the

Gateway

Communication Device for which in

the

Gateway Communication Profile Edit

window the

Browse for device groups

option was selected, this window will be shown:

396

Common Tools

Its pane will show Gateway device groups on the local network.

Select: Select a device group in the pane and click this button to connect by the selected device group.

5.1.11 Infrared (IrDA)

Infrared (IrDA) is a NetOp proprietary

Point-to-Point

Communication Device

that enables communication between NetOp modules on two computers that communicate by infrared light.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses Infrared (IrDA) can support only one NetOp connection.

Configuration

Windows 2003, XP, 2000, ME and 98 support infrared communication according to the protocols and standards of Infrared Data Association (IrDA). Configure infrared communication in Windows.

This section includes these sections:

·

Infrared (IrDA) Settings

·

Infrared (IrDA) Communication Profile Edit

5.1.11.1 Infrared (IrDA) Settings

To connect:

· If a Guest connects directly to a Host, specify no name or address.

· If a Guest connects through a NetOp Gateway to a Host, optionally specify the Host name, see

Infrared

.

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest connected to directly or on the connected to NetOp Gateway network can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

Resources

Infrared communication through transmitters pointing towards each other within working distance must be established.

397

Common Tools

5.1.11.2 Infrared (IrDA) Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to show this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

The Infrared (IrDA) section that will be shown when Infrared (IrDA) is selected in the

Communication device

drop-down box is empty. There are no setting options for the Infrared (IrDA)

Communication Device .

5.1.12 Terminal Server

Terminal Server is a NetOp proprietary

Networking

Communication Device that enables NetOp modules that

run in a terminal server environment to communicate.

Note: Each Communication Profile that uses Terminal Server can support multiple NetOp connections.

This section includes these sections:

·

Terminal Server Settings

·

Terminal Server Communication Profile Edit

5.1.12.1 Terminal Server Settings

To connect, specify a name by which the destination NetOp module can respond:

· If a Guest connects or browses using the

Host name qualifier H::, the Host can respond by its enabled

NetOp Name type name .

·

If a Guest connects or browses using the

Host name qualifier U::, the Host can respond by its enabled LAN

User type

name .

·

If a Host requests help

, a Guest can respond by its enabled

Help service

names.

If NetOp Gateway runs on the terminal server console, terminal server NetOp modules and NetOp modules outside the terminal server environment can connect through it, see the Administrator's Manual Advanced

Tools chapter NetOp in Terminal Server Environments section.

398

Common Tools

5.1.12.2 Terminal Server Communication Profile Edit

In the

Communication Profile Setup

window or in the

Quick Connect Tab

Communication Profile Section

, click New or Edit to display this window:

The upper section of this window is explained in

Communication Devices .

The Terminal Server section that will be shown when Terminal Server is selected in the

Communication device

drop-down box is empty. There are no setting options for the Terminal Server

Communication Device .

5.2 Modem Database and Dialog

This section explains the Modem Database and

Modem Dialog

associated with the Serial

Communication

Device .

It includes these sections:

·

Modem Database

·

Modem Dialog

5.2.1 Modem Database

Select the

Tools Menu Modem Database command to show this window:

399

Common Tools

This window manages the modem database.

Note: The modem database is stored in the NetOp Configuration Files modems.ndb file that will typically

reside in the directory C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp

Remote Control\<Module name>.

In the pane, the first _Modem Database YYYYDDD record specifies the modem database update year and day number. You can download and install the newest available update from the NetOp KnowledgeBase

Download Updates subsection.

Note: Downloading and installing modems.ndb will overwrite your current modems.ndb.

Other records represent modem configurations created by NetOp Support or added by a user.

New: Click this button to show the

Modem Configuration

window to create a modem configuration in the modem database. To base a new modem configuration on an available modem configuration, select its record before clicking the button.

Edit: Select a record in the pane and click this button to show the

Modem Configuration

window to edit the

selected record modem configuration.

Delete: Select a record and click this button to delete it. The button will be disabled if you cannot delete the selected record.

5.2.1.1 Modem Configuration

In the

Modem

window, click New or Edit or in the

Serial Communication Profile Edit

window click New

Modem or Edit Modem to show this window:

This window creates or edits a

Modem Database modem configuration.

Note: With some modem configurations, some or all fields will be disabled to protect the original Modem

Database modem configuration. If you select a

Modem

window modem configuration record and click New,

the

Modem Configuration

window will show the properties of the selected modem configuration with all fields enabled.

Name: []: This field will contain the modem configuration name that must be unique within the modem database. You can edit the field contents.

Modem command strings

400

Common Tools

These fields specify the modem AT command strings. Consult with your modem manual or the modem manufacturer website to find the AT command strings required by your modem.

Max data rate []: The field of this drop-down box will show the selected modem maximum data rate or a default value. The drop-down box list contains typical data rates. Select a data rate applicable to your modem and the modem you want to connect to.

Settings

þ RTS/CTS Flow control: Typically, leave this box checked to use Return To Send/Clear To Send flow control (default: checked).

¨ Ignore carrier signal: Typically, leave this box unchecked (default: unchecked).

5.2.2 Modem Dialog

Select the

View Menu Modem Dialog command to show this window:

During

Serial

modem connect and disconnect, the pane will show the communication sent by (>>) and received by (<<) your modem. This information will assist you in diagnosing modem connectivity problems.

5.3 NetOp Log

Any NetOp module can log selected NetOp events. NetOp events can be logged:

·

On the computer in a local NetOp log.

· In a NetOp Security Server security database in the NetOp Log or on an older version NetOp Access

Server or NetOp Log Server.

·

In the Windows event log of the computer and another computer.

· In a management information system.

This section contains these sections:

·

Log Setup

·

Local NetOp Log

·

NetOp Log Events

401

5.3.1 Log Setup

Select the

Tools Menu Log Setup command to show this window:

Common Tools

It specifies NetOp log setup on these tabs:

·

Log Setup Tab

·

NetOp Local Tab

·

NetOp Server Tab

·

Windows Event Log Tab

·

SNMP Traps Tab

402

5.3.1.1 Log Setup Tab

This is the

Log Setup

window Log Setup tab:

Common Tools

It specifies logging options.

Log Events

¨ Log locally: Check this box to log NetOp events in a log file on the computer (default: unchecked).

¨ Log on NetOp server: Check this box to log NetOp events in a NetOp Security Server security database

NetOp Log of or on an older version NetOp Access Server or NetOp Log Server (default: unchecked).

¨ Log to Windows event log: Check this box to log NetOp events in the Windows event log of the computer and/or of another Windows 2003/XP/2000/NT computer (default: unchecked).

¨ Log using SNMP traps: Check this box to log NetOp events by sending SNMP messages to a management information system (default: unchecked).

NetOp Security Server has an additional checkbox:

þ Act as log server: Leave this box checked to enable logging other NetOp modules’ NetOp events in the security database NetOp Log (default: checked).

NetOp Host and extended Hosts have additional check boxes, fields and drop-down boxes:

¨ Custom Host Name for All Log Events: Check this box to enable the field and drop-down box below to identify logged events by a customized Host name (default: unchecked). The left field specifies the customized Host name composed from right drop-down box components and keyboard characters. These components are available:

· %A: IP/MAC address

· %I: Host ID

403

Common Tools

·

%C: Computer name

· %L: Windows logon user name

Select a component in the right drop-down box list to add it in the left field.

¨ Custom Guest Name for Connection and Session Log Events: Check this box to enable the field and dropdown box below to identify Guests engaged in Connection and Session log events by a customized name.

The left field specifies the customized Guest name composed from right drop-down box components and keyboard characters. These components are available:

· %A: IP/MAC address

·

%U: Authenticated user name

· %I: Guest ID

·

%C: Computer name

·

%L: Windows logon user name

Select a component in the right drop-down box list to add it in the left field.

This is an example of a custom Host and Guest name

Local NetOp Log :

20031103,14:10,Host1+User1,0,00000,00000,HCON +,

20031103,14:10,Host1+User1,1,00000,00000,HSES +,[email protected]

20031103,14:10,Host1+User1,2,00000,00000,HSESRC +,[email protected]

20031103,14:10,Host1+User1,3,00000,00000,HSESFXFER+,[email protected]

20031103,14:10,Host1+User1,4,00000,00000,HSESCHAT +,[email protected]

20031103,14:10,Host1+User1,5,00000,00000,HSESAUDIO+,[email protected]

20031103,14:10,Host1+User1,6,00000,00000,HSESAUDIO-,[email protected]

20031103,14:10,Host1+User1,7,00000,00000,HSESCHAT -,[email protected]

20031103,14:11,Host1+User1,8,00000,00000,HSESFXFER-,[email protected]

20031103,14:11,Host1+User1,9,00000,00000,HSESRC -,[email protected]

20031103,14:11,Host1+User1,10,00000,00000,HSES -,[email protected]168.1.2

The Host name was customized as %C+%L. The Guest name was customized as %[email protected]%A.

The Host was started and the Guest started a remote control session, a file transfer session, a chat session and an audio-video chat session and ended sessions in reverse order.

404

5.3.1.2 NetOp Local Tab

This is the

Log Setup

window NetOp Local tab:

Common Tools

It selects which NetOp events shall be logged and specifies the local NetOp log file.

Select Events to view in list

Select one of these options to show check boxed event names in the

Events to log

pane:

¤ View all Events: Show all available events (default selection).

¡ View Selected: Enable these options:

¨ Connection: Check this box to show available connection events.

¨ Session: Check this box to show available session events.

¨ Action: Check this box to show available action events.

¨ Security: Check this box to show available security events.

¨ Configuration: Check this box to show available configuration events.

Events to log: []: This pane will show check boxed names of events of the types selected to the left. Check boxes to select logging of events (default: all unchecked).

Select all: Click this button to check all boxes in the

Events to log

pane.

Deselect all: Click this button to uncheck all boxes in the

Events to log

pane.

Note: Available NetOp log event codes and arguments are tabulated in NetOp Log Events

.

Log File

405

Common Tools

Note: This section will be enabled only if the

Log locally

box is checked on the Log Setup Tab

.

Log file name: []: This field will show the (path and) name of the log file (default: NETOP.LOG). If no path is specified, the log file will reside in the

NetOp Configuration Files directory, typically C:\Documents and

Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control\<Module name>.

þ Write to disk for each log entry: Leave this box checked to write each NetOp event to the local NetOp log file immediately (default: checked). Uncheck this box to write NetOp events to the local NetOp log file when the NetOp module is unloaded, which consumes less processor capacity.

Note: A new local NetOp log file that will be created when the NetOp module is loaded will overwrite an old local NetOp log file with the same path and file name.

5.3.1.3 NetOp Server Tab

This is the

Log Setup

window NetOp Server tab:

It selects which NetOp events shall be logged and specifies the Host ID of the logging server.

Select Events to view in list

Select one of these options to show check boxed event names in the

Events to log

pane:

¤ View all Events: Show all available events (default selection).

¡ View Selected: Enable these options:

¨ Connection: Check this box to show available connection events.

¨ Session: Check this box to show available session events.

¨ Action: Check this box to show available action events.

¨ Security: Check this box to show available security events.

406

Common Tools

¨ Configuration: Check this box to show available configuration events.

Events to log: []: This pane will show check boxed names of events of the types selected to the left. Check boxes to select logging of events (default: all unchecked).

Select all: Click this button to check all boxes in the

Events to log

pane.

Deselect all: Click this button to uncheck all boxes in the

Events to log

pane.

Note: Available NetOp log event codes and arguments are tabulated in NetOp Log Events

.

Host ID for Log Server

Note: This section will be enabled only if the

Log on NetOp server

box is checked on the Log Setup Tab .

The field will contain the Host ID of the NetOp server on which NetOp events shall be logged (initially empty).

Click Browse to browse the network for available logging NetOp servers to show this window:

The pane will show the Host IDs of found logging NetOp servers.

Select: Select a Host ID in the pane and click this button to show it in the field.

Note: If on a Host or extended Host the

Guest Access Security option

Use NetOp Security Server

is

selected, leave the

Host ID for Log Server

field empty to log in the specified security server group security

database NetOp Log.

407

5.3.1.4 Windows Event Log Tab

This is the

Log Setup

window Windows Event Log tab:

Common Tools

It selects which NetOp events shall be logged and specifies Windows event logs.

Select Events to view in list

Select one of these options to show check boxed event names in the

Events to log

pane:

¤ View all Events: Show all available events (default selection).

¡ View Selected: Enable these options:

¨ Connection: Check this box to show available connection events.

¨ Session: Check this box to show available session events.

¨ Action: Check this box to show available action events.

¨ Security: Check this box to show available security events.

¨ Configuration: Check this box to show available configuration events.

Events to log: []: This pane will show check boxed names of events of the types selected to the left. Check boxes to select logging of events (default: all unchecked).

Select all: Click this button to check all boxes in the

Events to log

pane.

Deselect all: Click this button to uncheck all boxes in the

Events to log

pane.

Note: Available NetOp log event codes and arguments are tabulated in NetOp Log Events

.

Use Windows event log

408

Common Tools

.

Note: This section will be enabled only if the

Log to Windows event log

box is checked on the Log Setup Tab

þ Local: Leave this box checked to log NetOp events in the Windows event log of the computer (default: checked).

¨ Remote: []: Check this box to log NetOp events in the Windows event log of a remote Windows 2003/

XP/2000/NT computer (default: unchecked). Specify in the field the Windows name of the remote computer.

5.3.1.5 SNMP Traps Tab

This is the

Log Setup

window SNMP Traps tab:

It selects which NetOp events to log in a management information system.

Select Events to view in list

Select one of these options to show check boxed event names in the

Events to log

pane:

¤ View all Events: Show all available events (default selection).

¡ View Selected: Enable these options:

¨ Connection: Check this box to show available connection events.

¨ Session: Check this box to show available session events.

¨ Action: Check this box to show available action events.

¨ Security: Check this box to show available security events.

¨ Configuration: Check this box to show available configuration events.

Events to log: []: This pane will show check boxed names of events of the types selected to the left. Check

409

Common Tools

boxes to select logging of events (default: all unchecked).

Select all: Click this button to check all boxes in the

Events to log

pane.

Deselect all: Click this button to uncheck all boxes in the

Events to log

pane.

Note: Available NetOp log event codes and arguments are tabulated in NetOp Log Events

.

If the

Log using SNMP Traps

box is checked on the Log Setup Tab , a Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) message will be sent when a selected NetOp event occurs. NetOp SNMP events are defined in the

danware.mib file that resides in the directory where the NetOp module is installed.

5.3.2 Local NetOp Log

The local

NetOp Log file is a plain text file with text lines that each log a NetOp event.

Events are ordered chronologically. This example from a Guest log illustrates the typical contents of a log:

20011009,15:41,Guest1,0,00000,00000,GACTCOMPR+,TCP/IP

20011009,15:41,Guest1,1,00000,00000,GCONCALL ,192.168.1.3

20011009,15:41,Guest1,2,00000,00000,GSESFXFER+,

20011009,15:42,Guest1,3,00000,00000,*ACTFILE -,C:\test.txt

20011009,15:42,Guest1,4,00000,00000,GSESFXFER-,

20011009,15:42,Guest1,5,00000,00000,GSESRC -,

20011009,15:42,Guest1,6,00000,00000,GCONHNGUP ,192.168.1.3

20011009,15:42,Guest1,7,00000,00000,GACTCOMPR-,

Note: NetOp log event codes and arguments are tabulated in NetOp Log Events .

Each line contains this information: date, time, NetOp module name, event number, error code 1, error code

2, event code, arguments.

Note: Error codes are currently not implemented and should always be 00000.

The log file above recorded these events:

On October 9, 2001 at 15:41 hours the Guest Guest1 enabled the communication profile TCP/IP.

It connected to the Host with the name 192.168.1.3.

It started a file transfer session.

It sent the file C:\test.txt.

Find out yourself what then happened.

5.3.3 NetOp Log Events

NetOp Log events and their codes are explained in these sections:

·

Guest NetOp Log Events

·

Host and Extended Host NetOp Log Events

5.3.3.1 Guest NetOp Log Events

NetOp Guest can log these

NetOp Log events:

Connection

Event Name

Con: Call Host

Con: Disconnect Host

Con: Connection lost

Event Code Arguments

GCONCALL

Host name

GCONHNGUP

Host name

*CONLOST

Host name

Con: User authenticated GCONUSER (none)

410

Session

Event Name

Ses: Remote control started

Ses: Remote control stopped

Ses: File transfer started

Ses: File transfer stopped

Ses: Chat started

Ses: Chat stopped

Ses: Audio started

Ses: Audio stopped

Event Code Arguments

GSESRC +

Host name

GSESRC -

Host name

GSESFXFER+ (none)

GSESFXFER- (none)

GSESCHAT + (none)

GSESCHAT - (none)

GSESAUDIO+ (none)

GSESAUDIO- (none)

Ses: Remote Management started GSESRM + Host name

Ses: Remote Management stopped GSESRM Host name

Action

Event Name

Act: Help service start

Act: Help service stop

Event Code Arguments

GACTHLPSV+ (none)

GACTHLPSV- (none)

GACTHLPRQ+ Host name

Act: Help request received

Act: Help request cancelled

Act: File received

GACTHLPRQ- Host name

*ACTFILE + File path and name

Act: File Sent

Act: Host Rebooted

Act: Session recording started

Act: Session recording stopped

Act: Windows event logging failed

*ACTFILE - File path and name

*ACTBOOT

Host name

GACTREC +

Recording file path and name

GACTREC -

Recording file path and name

*ACTWIN !

(none)

*ACTSNMP ! (none)

Act: SNMP trapping failed

Act: Received Clipboard

Act: Sent Clipboard

Act: Received Print Job

*ACTCLPB + (none)

*ACTCLPB - (none)

*ACTPRINT+ (none)

*ACTPRINT- (none)

Act: Sent Print Job

Act: Communication Profile Started

GACTCOMPR+ Communication profile name

Act: Communication Profile Stopped

GACTCOMPR- [Communication profile name]

Act: Inventory received

GACTINV

Host name

Act: Message sent

GACTMSG

Host name

Security

Event Name

Sec: Password rejected

Event Code Arguments

*SECPW !

Host name

Sec: Confirm access denied *SECCA !

Host name

Sec: Security Server login

GSECACSRV+ Logon name

Sec: Security Server log off

GSECACSRV- (none)

Configuration

Event Name

Cfg: Help service name defined

Cfg: Help service name deleted

Cfg: Local logging turned on

Cfg: Local logging turned off

Cfg: Local logging filename changed

Cfg: Server logging turned on

Event Code Arguments

GCFGHLPSV+ Help service name

GCFGHLPSV- Help service name

*CFGLLOC + Log file name

*CFGLLOC - Log file name

*CFGLFILE* New log file name

*CFGLSRV + Log server name

Common Tools

411

Common Tools

Cfg: Server logging turned off

*CFGLSRV - Log server name

Cfg: Windows event logging turned on

*CFGLWIN + If remote: computer name

Cfg: Windows event logging turned off

*CFGLWIN - If remote: computer name

Cfg: Sending SNMP traps turned on

Cfg: Sending SNMP traps turned off

*CFGLSNMP+ (none)

*CFGLSNMP- (none)

Cfg: Security Server password changed GCFGACPW * NetOp Guest ID

Cfg: Web update check

*CFGWUCHK

Old build, new build, [timeout error]

Cfg: Web update download

Cfg: Web update install

*CFGWUDL

File name, [timeout error]

*CFGWUINST (none)

Cfg: Web update success

*CFGWU *

Old build, new build

Cfg: Web update failed

*CFGWU !

Old build, error message

5.3.3.2 Host and Extended Host NetOp Log Events

NetOp Host or extended Host can log these NetOp Log

events:

Connection

Event Name

Con: Host started

Con: Host stopped

Con: Callback

Con: Connection lost

Con: Name Server started

Con: Name Server stopped

Con: Security Server started

HCONNNS -

(none)

HCONNSS +

(none)

Con: Security Server stopped

HCONNSS -

(none)

Con: Gateway started

*CONLOST

(none)

HCONNNS +

(none)

HCONGW +

(none)

Con: Gateway stopped

Event Code Arguments

HCON +

(none)

HCON -

(none)

HCONCALLB

Callback number

HCONGW -

(none)

Session

Event Name

Ses: Session started

Ses: Session stopped

Ses: Remote control started

Ses: Remote control stopped

Ses: File transfer started

Event Code Arguments

HSES +

Guest name

HSES -

Guest name

HSESRC +

Guest name

HSESRC -

Guest name

HSESFXFER+ Guest name

Ses: File transfer stopped

Ses: Chat started

Ses: Chat stopped

HSESFXFER- Guest name

HSESCHAT + Guest name

HSESCHAT - Guest name

HSESAUDIO+ Guest name

Ses: Audio started

Ses: Audio stopped

HSESAUDIO- Guest name

Ses: Remote Management started

HSESRM +

Guest name

Ses: Remote Management stopped

HSESRM -

Guest name

Action

Event Name

Act: Help request sent

Act: Help request canceled

Act: File received

Act: File sent

Act: Host reboot

Event Code Arguments

HACTHLPRQ+ Help service name, problem description

HACTHLPRQ- (none)

*ACTFILE + File path and name

*ACTFILE - File path and name

*ACTBOOT

(none)

412

Common Tools

Act: Run Program

Act: SNMP trapping failed

Act: Received clipboard

HACTRUN

Program name

Act: Execute Command

HACTEXE

Command name

Act: Windows event logging failed

*ACTWIN !

(none)

*ACTSNMP ! (none)

*ACTCLPB + (none)

Act: Sent clipboard

Act: Received print job

*ACTCLPB - (none)

*ACTPRINT+ (none)

Act: Sent print job

Act: Keyboard locked

Act: Keyboard unlocked

Act: Screen blanked

Act: Screen unblanked

Act: Host user logged off

Act: Gateway login

Act: Inventory sent

Act: Message received

*ACTPRINT- (none)

HACTKBD -

(none)

HACTKBD +

(none)

HACTSCR -

(none)

HACTSCR +

(none)

HACTLOFF

(none)

HACTGW +

Connecting module name

HACTINV

Guest name

HACTMSG

Guest name

Security

Event Name Event Code Arguments

Sec: Individual security enabled or changed HSECINDIV+ Guest access method

Sec: Individual security disabled

HSECINDIV- Guest access method

Sec: Security role added

HSECROLE + Security role name

Sec: Security role deleted

Sec: Security role changed

HSECROLE - Security role name

HSECROLE * Security role name

Sec: Guest added to role

Sec: Guest deleted from role

HSECGUEST+ Guest name

HSECGUEST- Guest name

Sec: Guest changed in role

HSECGUEST* Guest name

Sec: Password enabled

Sec: Password disabled

Sec: Password changed

Sec: Callback enabled (default only)

HSECPW +

If individual: Guest name

HSECPW -

If individual: Guest name

HSECPW *

If individual: Guest name

HSECCALLB+ (none)

Sec: Callback disabled (default only)

Sec: Callback changed (default only)

HSECCALLB- (none)

HSECCALLB* (none)

Sec: Confirm access enabled

Sec: Confirm access disabled

Sec: Password rejected

Sec: Confirm access denied

Sec: Illegal password limit reached

HSECCA +

If individual: security role name

HSECCA -

If individual: security role name

*SECPW !

Guest name

*SECCA !

(none)

HSECPWLIM! (none)

Sec: Timeout limit exceeded

HSECTMOUT

AC (inactivity), AU (authentication) or CA

(confirm access).

Configuration

Event Name

Cfg: Local logging started

Cfg: Local logging stopped

Cfg: Local logging filename changed

Cfg: Server logging started

Cfg: Server logging stopped

Cfg: Windows event logging started

Cfg: Windows event logging stopped

Event Code Arguments

*CFGLLOC + Log file name

*CFGLLOC - Log file name

*CFGLFILE* New log file name

*CFGLSRV + Log server name

*CFGLSRV - Log server name

*CFGLWIN + If remote: computer name

*CFGLWIN - If remote: computer name

413

Common Tools

Cfg: Sending SNMP traps started

Cfg: Sending SNMP traps stopped

Cfg: Option change: Start at load

Cfg: Option change: Load with OS

Cfg: Option change: Minimize at startup

Cfg: Option change: Stealth mode

Cfg: Option change: Minimize on connection

Cfg: Option change: On top

Cfg: Option change: Show file transfer

Cfg: Option change: Send keep alive

Cfg: Option selected: Boot after disconnect

Cfg: Option selected: Logoff after disconnect

Cfg: Option selected: Lock after disconnect

Cfg: Option selected: Nothing after disconnect

Cfg: Option change: Naming method

Cfg: Option change: Public Host name

*CFGLSNMP+ (none)

*CFGLSNMP- (none)

HCFGOWAIT* ON/OFF

HCFGOLOAD* ON/OFF

HCFGOMIST* ON/OFF

HCFGOSTLT* ON/OFF

HCFGOMICO* ON/OFF

HCFGOTOP * ON/OFF

HCFGOSFX * ON/OFF

HCFGOALIV* ON/OFF

HCFGOBOOT+ (none)

HCFGOLOGO+ (none)

HCFGOLOCK+ (none)

HCFGONOTH+ (none)

HCFGONAME* (none)

HCFGOPUBN* ON/OFF

HCFGOUSRN* ON/OFF

HCFGONOTI* (none)

HCFGOHRD * (none)

HCFGOHRP * (none)

Cfg: Option change: Enable user name

Cfg: Option change: Connection notification

Cfg: Option change: Help Request description

Cfg: Option change: Help Request provider

Cfg: Option change: Help Request communication HCFGOHRC * (none)

Cfg: Option change: Help Request phone/IP

HCFGOHRPI* (none)

Cfg: Option change: Help Request show icon

HCFGOHRSI* ON/OFF

Cfg: Option change: Audio full duplex

HCFGOAUFD* ON/OFF

Cfg: Option change: Audio silence level

HCFGOAUSL* (none)

Cfg: Option change: Audio line hold

HCFGOAULH* (none)

Cfg: Option change: Name space ID

HCFGONSID* (none)

Cfg: Maintenance requiry changed for Guest

Cfg: Maintenance requiry changed for Gateway

HCFGMRQG*

(none)

HCFGMRQGW* (none)

Cfg: Maintenance requiry changed for other

HCFGMRQO * (none)

Cfg: Maintenance requiry changed for exit/stop

HCFGMRQEX* (none)

Cfg: Protect files changed

HCFGPROTS* (none)

Cfg: Maintenance password changed

HCFGMTPW * (none)

Cfg: Guest access allow to changed (default only) HCFGGALLW* (none)

Cfg: MAC/IP address list changed

HCFGMACIP* (none)

Cfg: File transfer disable changed

Cfg: Security Server group ID changed

HCFGFX *

(none)

HCFGSSG *

(none)

Cfg: Web update check

Cfg: Web update download

Cfg: Web update install

Cfg: Web update success

Cfg: Web update failed

*CFGWUCHK

Old build, new build, [timeout error]

*CFGWUDL

File name, [timeout error]

*CFGWUINST (none)

*CFGWU *

Old build, new build

*CFGWU !

Old build, error message

NetOp Gateway can log these

NetOp Log special Gateway events:

Event Name

GW: Gateway access allowed

GW: Gateway callback

GW: Gateway callback changed (default only)

GW: Gateway callback disabled (default only)

GW: Gateway callback enabled (default only)

Event Code Arguments

HGW ACCES+ (none)

HGW CALLB

Callback number

HGW CALLB* (none)

HGW CALLB- (none)

HGW CALLB+ (none)

414

Common Tools

GW: Gateway group defined

GW: Gateway group deleted

HGW GROUP+ Security role name

HGW GROUP- Security role name

GW: Gateway Guest added

HGW GUEST+ Guest name

GW: Gateway Guest changed

GW: Gateway Guest deleted

HGW GUEST* Guest name

HGW GUEST- Guest name

GW: Gateway individual security disabled

HGW INSEC- (none)

GW: Gateway individual security enabled (or changed)

HGW INSEC+ (none)

GW: Gateway NSS GID changed

HGW SSGID* (none)

GW: Gateway password changed (default only)

HGW PW *

(none)

GW: Gateway password disabled (default only)

GW: Gateway password enabled (default only)

GW: Gateway password rejected

HGW PW -

(none)

HGW PW +

(none)

*SECGWPW ! Connecting module name

5.4 System Info

In the About NetOp Remote Control Guest or

About NetOp Remote Control Host

window, click

System Info

to show this window:

It has two menus, see below, and shows selected system information in three sections:

·

The upper section shows summary program and system information.

·

The middle section shows summary screen information.

· The lower section shows summary driver information.

Advanced Display Info Menu

415

Common Tools

Select a command to show detailed information on the current screen in a Screen Info window.

Communication Info Menu

Net Addresses: Select this command to show this window:

Net Addresses []: The pane will show enabled computer network addresses.

Note: NetOp module network addresses are enabled only if Communication Profiles that use

Networking

Communication Devices

are enabled.

5.5 NETOP.INI

When NetOp is installed on a computer for the first time, a file named NETOP.INI will be created in the computer operating system directory (C:\Windows or C:\WINNT).

NETOP.INI contains settings that determine how NetOp modules will be installed and loaded. It will be read when a NetOp module is installed or loaded on the computer.

Typically, you do not need to worry about the NETOP.INI file, but you can edit it to apply certain options.

NETOP.INI uses the standard Windows INI file format with sections, keys and values. It is a plain text file that can be edited with a standard text editor like Notepad.

NETOP.INI can contain these sections:

·

[INSTALL]

: Specifies NetOp installation settings.

·

[COEXISTENCE]

: Specifies settings for running different NetOp modules on a computer at the same time.

·

[GUEST], [HOST], [GATEWAY], [NNS], [NSS]

: Specify startup settings for NetOp modules.

·

[IPX]

: Specifies startup settings for the IPX communication device.

·

[NETBIOS]

: Specifies startup settings for the NetBIOS communication device.

·

[TCP]

: Specifies startup settings for the TCP communication device.

416

Common Tools

·

[DTL]

: Specifies special communication settings.

·

[AUDIO]

: Specifies special audio settings.

Other sections can be included.

Note: In the NetOp KnowledgeBase , look into the Documentation section NetOp.ini settings section to view all currently available NETOP.INI setting options.

5.5.1 [INSTALL] Section

This

NETOP.INI

file section that by default is included specifies the installation directories and program folders of the most recently installed NetOp programs. These specifications will be the default suggestions when reinstalling NetOp.

5.5.2 [COEXISTENCE] Section

This

NETOP.INI

file section that by default is included specifies settings for replacing one running NetOp module by another and running different NetOp modules at the same time.

Low level coexistence allows NetOp Guest to be loaded on a computer that runs NetOp Host or an extended

NetOp Host, temporarily suspending NetOp Host, or vice versa. A Host connected to a Guest cannot be suspended. Guest connections to Hosts will be broken when a running Guest is replaced by a Host.

High level coexistence allows a NetOp Guest to run on a computer at the same time as a NetOp Host or extended Host. This will enable cascading remote control, i.e. a Guest remote controlling a Host on a computer that is running a Guest that in turn remote controls another Host. Running a Guest and a Host on a computer at the same time requires that they use different

Communication Profiles . If Communication

Profiles that use

TCP/IP are used, they must use different

Receive port

numbers.

This section can contain these keys:

COEXIST=<1, 0 or 2>

The default value 1 will enable low level coexistence, the value 0 will disable coexistence and the value 2 will enable high level coexistence. If the key is missing, coexistence will be disabled.

LOAD_WARNING=<1 or 0>

The default value 1 will show a warning message when the user attempts low level coexistence. The user will have the options to proceed or cancel. The value 0 will show no warning message. If the key is missing, a warning message will be shown.

DEBUG=<0 or 1>

This optional key can be added to show the loader program commands executing in a separate window. If the key is missing or its value is set to 0, the loader program window will not be shown. If the value is set to 1, the loader program window will be shown.

5.5.3 [GUEST], [HOST], [GATEWAY], [NNS] and [NSS] Sections

You can use these optional

NETOP.INI

file sections to specify non-default locations of configuration and

other files created and used by NetOp modules, see

Other Locations of NetOp Configuration Files . These

sections and keys can be used:

[GUEST]

DataPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Guest configuration files.

HistoryPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Guest history files.

InventoryPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Guest inventory files.

PhonebookPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Guest phonebook files.

RecordPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Guest record files.

ScriptPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Guest script files.

and/or

417

Common Tools

[HOST]

DataPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Host configuration files.

MessagePath=<Path> that specifies the path to Host message files.

and/or

[GATEWAY]

DataPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Gateway configuration files.

MessagePath=<Path> that specifies the path to Gateway message files.

and/or

[NNS]

DataPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Name Server configuration files.

MessagePath=<Path> that specifies the path to Name Server message files.

and/or

[NSS]

DataPath=<Path> that specifies the path to Security Server configuration files.

MessagePath=<Path> that specifies the path to Security Server message files.

Other keys can be included in the sections.

Note: The [HOST] key ActualBufferReleaseBlock=<Numbers> is information written by the Host program to the NETOP.INI file. It is unimportant to the user but can be used by NetOp specialists for troubleshooting.

5.5.4 [IPX] Section

This optional

NETOP.INI

file section can contain this key:

Max_Packet_Size=<Number>, where <Number> meaning the maximum communication packet size in bytes can be set between 512 and 5000.

This setting can be used to solve communication problems, see IPX Settings .

5.5.5 [NetBIOS] Section

This optional

NETOP.INI

file section can contain this key:

Max_Packet_Size=<Number>, where <Number> meaning the maximum communication packet size in bytes can be set between 512 and 5000.

This setting can be used to solve communication problems, see NetBIOS Settings .

5.5.6 [TCP] Section

This optional

NETOP.INI

file section can contain this key:

BindToRecvPort=True

TCP/IP (TCP)

listens by the specified

Receive port

number but includes by default another available

Receive port

number in sent communication to receive return communication by it. To include the specified

Receive port

number in sent

TCP/IP (TCP) communication, use this key.

5.5.7 [DTL] Section

This optional

NETOP.INI

file section can contain this key:

TimeOutTimes=<Number>, where <Number> meaning the number of resends in addition to the default

10 that will be applied to get data packets through can be set between 1 and 50.

Setting this key may be necessary if data packets take a long time to get through or get lost.

418

Common Tools

5.5.8 [AUDIO] Section

This optional

NETOP.INI

file section can contain this key:

Sound_Mix=<Sound mix recording mode name>

This key may be necessary on NetOp Host to enable

Transfer Sound

if the sound mix recording mode name

of the Host computer audio device (sound card) is different from Wave Out Mix.

5.5.9 NETOP.INI Example

For clarification, a sample

NETOP.INI

file is shown below with explanations to the right.

NETOP.INI file Explanation

[INSTALL]

The INSTALL section

DIRECTORY=C:\Program Files

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote

Control

FOLDER=NetOp Remote Control

The NetOp program files reside in the directory C:\Program Files

\Danware Data\NetOp Remote Control

The name of the program folder is NetOp Remote Control

[COEXISTENCE]

[NETBIOS]

The COEXISTENCE section

COEXIST=1

Max_Packet_Size=512

Low level coexistence shall be enabled

DEBUG=1

[IPX]

Loader program commands shall be shown

LOAD_WARNING=1

DataPath=F:\SHARED\DATA\Host

A load warning window shall be shown

[Guest]

[Host]

The Guest section

DataPath=F:\SHARED\DATA\Guest

The Guest configuration files reside in the directory F:\SHARED

\DATA\Guest

The Host section

The Host configuration files reside in the directory F:\SHARED

\DATA\Host

The IPX section

Transmit IPX data in packets not larger than 512 bytes

The NETBIOS section

Max_Packet_Size=2500

[DTL]

Transmit NetBIOS data in packets not larger than 2500 bytes

The DTL section

TimeOutTimes=10

Add 10 resends to the default 10

5.6 NetOp Configuration Files

The setup of NetOp modules is stored in configuration files, typically with the extension ndb (NetOp Data

Base).

When a NetOp module is installed on a computer, configuration files that specify the installed setup are created in the directory where the NetOp module is installed.

When a user loads a NetOp module for the first time after installation, configuration files will be copied from the directory where the NetOp module is installed to a user configuration directory.

The

Setup Wizard will run for the user to create a customized setup, the settings of which will be written to

the configuration files in the user configuration directory.

Directory folders for other NetOp files created by the user will be created in the user configuration directory.

419

Common Tools

NetOp log files created by the user will by default be saved in the user configuration directory.

This table gives an overview of NetOp configuration and other files, their default location and contents:

File name

Common files:

Default location File contents

COMIPLST.NDB

<Guest> or <Host> IP broadcast list

COMPROF.NDB

<Guest> or <Host> Communication profiles

MODEMS.NDB

<Guest> or <Host> Modem database

NETOP.LOG

<Guest> or <Host> Local event log (default name)

Guest files:

INVCUITM.XML

SCRIPT.LOG

*.DWC

<Guest>

NOWCONF.NDB <Guest>

RUNPROG.NDB

NFM.LOG

NGUESTW.LOG

<Guest>

<Guest>

<Guest>

<Guest>

Inventory custom items

Guest setup

Run program specifications

File manager log (default name)

Guest debug trace

Script log (default name)

<Guest>\PhBook Phonebook records

*.DWC

*.DWR

*.DWS

*.XML

*.BMP

<Guest>\History

<Guest>\record

<Guest>\script

History records

Recording records

NetOp scripts

<Guest>\inventor Host inventories

<Guest>\SnapShot Host screen images

Host or extended

Host files:

ANUMLIST.NDB

DIRSERV.NDB

MACLIST.NDB

<Host>

<Host>

<Host>

NHSTCONF.NDB <Host>

SECUR_DS.NDB <Host>

SECUR_NT.NDB <Host>

Allowed ISDN numbers

Directory services setup

Allowed Guest IP or MAC addresses

Host setup

Directory services roles, users and groups

Windows roles, users and groups

SECURITY.NDB

<Host>

NHOSTW.LOG

<Host>

*.RTF

NetOp roles and Guests

Host debug trace

<Host>\Messages NetOp messages

Gateway files:

GWSCR_NT.NDB <Gateway>

GWSCRTY.NDB

<Gateway>

Gateway Windows roles, users and groups

Gateway NetOp roles and Guests

The meanings of <Guest>, <Host> and <Gateway> are explained in

Default Location of NetOp Configuration

Files .

When a user changes the setup of a NetOp module during use, changes are written to the configuration files in the user configuration directory immediately or when the NetOp module is unloaded.

When a user loads a NetOp module, the configuration files in the user configuration directory are read to reestablish the setup that existed when the user last unloaded the NetOp module.

If the user configuration files are write protected or access to the directories in which they reside is denied, user setup changes cannot be written to files and will not be retained.

The setup of a NetOp module can be protected by applying a

Maintenance Password . Host user

configuration files can be

protected when the Host is running or connected.

If user configuration files are deleted, the user setup of deleted user configuration files will be lost. When the module is loaded after deleting user configuration files, a new user setup in new user configuration files will be created.

Most ndb files are written in a NetOp proprietary format and cannot be read or edited separately.

420

Common Tools

This section includes these sections:

·

Default Location of NetOp Configuration Files

·

Other Locations of NetOp Configuration Files

5.6.1 Default Location of NetOp Configuration Files

If user profiles are implemented, NetOp Configuration Files will by default reside in Windows user profile

directories.

User profiles are implemented with Windows NT systems (Windows 2003, XP, 2000 and NT), and user profiles can be implemented with Windows 9x systems (Windows ME, 98 and 95).

· On Windows 2003, XP and 2000, user profile directories are typically C:\Documents and Settings\

<Windows logon user name>.

· On Windows NT, user profile directories are typically C:\WINNT\Profiles\<Windows logon user name>.

·

On Windows 9x (ME, 98 and 95), user profile directories, if implemented, are typically C:\Windows\Profiles\

<Windows logon user name>.

By default, user configuration files will reside in the path <User profile directory>\Application Data\<NetOp module path>, where <NetOp module path> is the full path to the directory where the NetOp module is installed. If the NetOp module is installed in the C:\Program Files directory, only the path from that directory will be used in <NetOp module path>.

Note: Application Data is typically a hidden folder that will be shown only if you select to show hidden folders.

If user profiles are implemented on a computer, user Guest configuration files will by default reside in the user profile directory of the user logged on to Windows and will be individual to each user (<Guest>).

If user profiles are implemented on a computer, user Host or extended Host configuration files will by default reside in the All Users user profile directory and will be shared by all users of the computer (<Host> and

<Gateway>).

If user profiles are not implemented on a computer, user configuration files will by default reside in a Config directory in the directory where the NetOp module is installed and will be shared by all users of the computer

(<Guest>, <Host> and <Gateway>).

5.6.2 Other Locations of NetOp Configuration Files

You can place NetOp Configuration Files in a non-default user individual or shared location by using these

NETOP.INI

file keys:

[GUEST]

DataPath=<Path>

HistoryPath=<Path>

InventoryPath=<Path>

PhonebookPath=<Path>

RecordPath=<Path>

ScriptPath=<Path> and/or

[HOST]

DataPath=<Path>

MessagePath=<Path> and/or

[GATEWAY]

DataPath=<Path>

421

Common Tools

MessagePath=<Path> and/or

[NNS]

DataPath=<Path>

MessagePath=<Path> and/or

[NSS]

DataPath=<Path>

MessagePath=<Path>

- where <Path> is the full path to the directory where user configuration files shall be stored.

422

Index

[

[AUDIO] Section 419

[COEXISTENCE] Section 417

[DTL] Section 418

[GUEST]_ [HOST]_ [GATEWAY]_ [NNS] and [NSS] Sections 417

[INSTALL] Section 417

[IPX] Section 418

[NetBIOS] Section 418

[TCP] Section 418

<

<Management tool> Menu 173

A

About command 58, 298

About Menu 270

About NetOp Remote Control Guest window 58

About NetOp Remote Control Host window 298

Action Buttons 134, 299

Action Command 255

Action Commands 54

Action Menu 295

Action to perform section 211

Add button 194, 202, 240

Add command 193, 202

Add Phonebook Reference window 63

Add Printer Guidelines window 109, 317

Add to Favorites button 191

Add to Favorites command 190

Add to Favorites window 190

Add/Edit MAC/IP Address List window 346

Address Check 49

Address field 301

Advanced Audio Settings window 106, 314

Advanced button 388

Advanced Help Request Options window 319

Advanced Help Service window 114

Advanced Inventory Options window 120

Advanced TCP/IP Configuration 388

Advanced Video window 107, 315

After connection section 313

Allow Guest To 45

Allow guest to options 330

Allow Guest to section 45

Allow Multiple Simultaneous Guest Sessions option 310

Allowed ISDN Numbers 381

Applications tab 182

Apply License command 57, 298

Arrange Icons command 153

Audio-Video Chat 168, 356

Audio-Video Chat button 59, 134, 299

Audio-Video Chat command 52, 297, 353

Audio-Video Chat Tab 105, 313

Audio-Video Chat window 168, 357

Index

423

B

Bitmap Mode 228

Blank Display button 137

Blank Display command 132

Bold button 278

Bold command 277

Browse button 72

Browse for device groups option 396

Browse for Hosts 75

Buttons 71

C

Cache Tab 94

Call back section 332

Callback window 47

Cancel Help command 297

Change Current Destination Folder window 27

Change guest access privileges command 302

Change Maintenance Password window 126, 350

Change or Remove 30

Change Password window 43

Chat 166, 355

Chat > All command 353

Chat button 59, 134, 299

Chat command 52, 296, 353

Check for New Updates 128, 351

Check for New Updates command 307

Choose Account window 337

Clear All button 235, 362

Clear All command 277

Clear button 182

Clear command 181

Clear Event Log window 181

Clear Selection command 152

Clipboard Buttons 136

Clipboard Tab 103

Clone Files button 163

Clone Files command 144

Close button 276

Close command 18, 146

Close Guest when finished check box 245

Command Console 210

Command Console command 172

Command Console display 210

Command Console Menu 211

Command Console Toolbar 211

Command Mode 227

Command Progress Status Session window 53

Command Progress Status window 272

Commands 246

Commands in the Script File 257

Comment column 64

Common Controls 17

Common Tools 374

Communication Device 374

Communication devicedrop-down box 374

Communication Devices 14

Communication Profile 374

424

Communication profile drop-down box 219

Communication Profile Edit window 374

Communication Profile Section 71

Communication Profile Setup window 127, 351

Communication Profiles 127, 351

Communication Profiles Button 300

Communication Profiles command 307

Communication section 219

Communication Tab 304

Compatibility 16

Completing the NetOp Remote Control Guest Setup Wizard window 29

Compression/Encryption Tab 227

Confirm Access 46

Confirm access options 331

Confirm Access section 46

Confirm Access window 331

Confirmation Tab 157

Connect button 71

Connect by a Name and/or Address 74

Connect Command 246

Connect Guide 38

Connect Problems 39

Connect Tab 218

Connect to Help Provider window 368

Connect to Host (Communication profile) window 248

Connect to Host (Phonebook file) window 247

Connected 294

Connection List command 281

Connection List window 281

Connection Menu 51

Connection Notification Tab 312

Connection Properties 217

Connection Properties button 60, 72, 135

Connection Properties command 56, 132

Connection section 309

Connections Tab 76, 301

Contents command 57, 297

Contents Pane 86

Control Buttons 135

Copy button 278, 372

Copy command 55, 277, 371

Copy Dialog window 252

Copy Files button 163

Copy Files command 144

Copy Guest to Removable Media 128

Copy Key Name button 191

Copy Key Name command 189

Copy Tab 254

Copy/Move/Synchronize/Clone 146

Create New Task window 183

Create Task button 184

Custom Inventory Item window 121

Custom selection 284

Custom Setup window 26

Custom Tab 231

Custom Track 288

Customer Information window 24

Cut button 278

Cut command 55, 277

Index

425

D

Debug Trace 128, 352

Debug Trace command 307

Default Host Name Qualifier 96

Default Location of NetOp Configuration Files 421

Default Security Role 329

Default selection 284

Default Track 285

Default User 331

Delete 255

Delete button 60, 163, 191

Delete command 55, 145, 189, 277, 303, 306

Delete History command 295

Delete Markers 238, 365

Delete Messages command 295

Demonstrate 358

Demonstrate button 59, 134

Demonstrate command 52

Demonstrate toolbox 216

Dependencies Tab 201

Description column 64

Description of communication profile field 374

Deselect By command 152

Deselect window 152

Desktop Tab 229

Details 177, 214

Details button 60, 164

Details command 56, 153

Details Pane 87

Details section 174

Dialog pane 356

Dial-up Network Connetion section 387

Directory server field 322

Directory service section 341

Directory Service window 322

Directory Services Authentication 41

Directory Services Login window 42

Directory Services section 321

Directory Services Tab 99, 321

Disconnect All Guests Except Your Own button 136

Disconnect button 60, 72, 135, 299

Disconnect command 54, 296, 353

Disk Drive Properties window 178

Disk Drive Types 179

Disk Drives 176

Disk Drives command 172

Disk Drives Menu 177

Disk Drives Toolbar 178

Disk Space Requirements window 27

Display Guest name (if available) in the title bar option 313

Display Panel 175

Display Tab 224

Documentation 14

Domain section 337

Download Installation Files 21

Draw Arrow button 361

Draw Ellipse button 361

Draw Freehand button 361

426

Draw Lines button 361

Draw Rectangle button 361

Drive Info command 145

Drive Information window 145

During Connection section 312

E

Edit allowed ISDN numbers button 381

Edit Binary Value window 187

Edit button 240

Edit command 85

Edit DWORD Value window 188

Edit Menu 276, 371

Edit Multi-String window 188

Edit Script command 56

Edit String window 187

Enable help service option 319

Enable service tickets option 320

Enable user name option 311

Encryption 49

Encryption Tab 118, 347

End Process command 184

End Task command 184

End Task/Process button 184

End-User License Agreement window 24

Enter name or leave name field blank option 311

Error No 6x Encryption window 228

Error No Common Encryption Type window 228

Event Properties command 181

Event Properties window 181

Event Viewer 179

Event Viewer command 172

Event Viewer Menu 180

Event Viewer Toolbar 181

Events to log pane 405, 407, 408, 409

Execute Command 273, 370

Execute Command button 59, 134

Execute Command command 54

Execute Command menu 274

Exit command 51, 281, 295

Export button 191

Export command 189

Export from Phonebook command 51

Export from Phonebook window 66

Extended tab 192

F

Favorites drop-down box 191

Features 12

Figure Marker Menu 236, 363

Figure Marker Tool Menu 236, 363

Figure Markers 235, 362

File Manager Options 126

File Menu 264, 276, 294

File Transfer 142, 354

File Transfer button 59, 134

File Transfer Buttons 163

File Transfer Command 52, 252

File Transfer Status command 295

Index

427

File Transfer Status window 355

Find button 191, 278, 372

Find command 188, 277, 372

Find Next command 189

Find window 189

For Advanced Computer Users 281

For Typical Computer Users 280

Format Menu 277

From section 241, 253

Full Screen button 135

Full Screen command 132

G

Gateway 395

Gateway Communication Profile Edit 396

Gateway Connection 71

Gateway Connection window 71

Gateway Device Group List 396

Gateway device group section 396

Gateway login section 319

Gateway logon 368

Gateway Settings 395

General Tab 198, 241, 253, 309

Get Inventory 279, 373

Get Inventory button 60, 134

Get Inventory command 54

Global Settings 240

Global Settings in the Script File 245

Grant All Guests Default Access Privileges 329

Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using Directory Services 339

Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using NetOp Authentication 333

Grant Each Guest Individual Access Privileges Using Windows Security Management 336

Guest Access Method selection 328

Guest Access Privileges Tab 328

Guest Access Security 39, 327

Guest Access Security button 300

Guest Access Security command 307

Guest Actions 271

Guest Authentication 40

Guest Commands 246

Guest NetOp Log Events 410

Guest Policy 48

Guest Policy Tab 48, 343

Guest Profile 47

Guest Profile window 47, 334

Guest Security Server Login window 42

Guest Sessions 128

Guest Tools 88

H

Help button 235, 362

Help for this Tab button 60

Help for this Tab command 58

Help Menu 172, 297

Help provider field 318

Help Providers window 369

Help Request Notification window 115

Help Request Select Type window 367

Help Request Tab 113, 318

428

Help requested 294

Help service 114

Hide command 296

History List command 281

History List window 281

History Records 79

History Tab 303

Host Actions 366

Host and Extended Host NetOp Log Events 412

Host Commands 246

Host Computer Inventories 87

Host ID field 301

Host ID for log server section 407

Host Name Qualifiers window 97

Host Name Tab 96, 310

Host Section 68

Host Security Guide 39

Host Sessions 352

Host Startup Guide 280

Host Tools 307

Host top most window on connection with Guest option 310

How to Use NetOp Documentation 15

I

Import button 191

Import command 189

Import to Phonebook command 51

Import to Phonebook window 67

Individual NetOp Authentication 41

Individual NetOp Authentication window 368

Infrared 70

Infrared (IrDA) 397

Infrared (IrDA) Communication Profile Edit 398

Infrared (IrDA) Settings 397

Install 23

Install Alternatives 30

Install from a Directory 31

Installation 20

Introduction 12

Inventory 209

Inventory command 172

Inventory Menu 209

Inventory Tab 119

Inventory Toolbar 209

Inventory window 256

Invert Selection command 152

IP Address 386

IP Address field 389

IP Broadcast List 390

IP Broadcast List (Enter) window 390

IP Broadcast List button 388

IP Broadcast List window 390

IPX 377

IPX Communication Profile Edit 378

IPX Settings 377

ISDN (CAPI) 379

ISDN (CAPI) Communication Profile Edit 380

ISDN (CAPI) Settings 380

Italic button 278

Index

429

Italic command 277

K

Key context menu 190

Keyboard/Mouse Tab 225

Keys pane 185

L

Large Icons button 60, 164

Large Icons command 56, 152

Layout Tab 90

Line hold slide 314

Line or Gateway 68

List button 60, 164, 376

List command 56, 153

Load and Unload 32

Load Host at Windows startup option 309

Loading Alternatives 32, 282

Local button 164

Local command 153

Local File Transfer button 60

Local File Transfer command 54

Local NetOp Log 410

Lock Keyboard and Mouse button 137

Lock Keyboard and Mouse command 132

Log file section 245

Log locally option 403

Log on NetOp server option 403

Log On Tab 199

Log Properties command 181

Log Properties window 181

Log Servers window 407

Log Setup 126, 351, 402

Log Setup command 307

Log Setup Tab 403

Log to Windows event log option 403

Log using SNMP traps option 403

Logging Tab 162

Login Tab 95

Login Using NetOp Authentication (Guest credentials) window 41

Login Using NetOp Authentication (Password) window 40

Login Using Windows Authentication window 41

Lower Toolbar 235, 362

M

MAC/IP Address List Setup Tab 49, 345

Magnifier Menu 365

Maintenance Password 126, 349

Maintenance Password (Enter) window 126

Maintenance Password command 307

Maintenance Password Enter window 350

Management 175

Management Menu 172

Management section 174

Marker Mode button 136

Marker Mode command 132

Marker Properties and Help 239, 366

Mask Windows window 215

430

Menu and Toolbar Control 18

Menu Bar 264, 275, 294

Message Pane 279, 372

Message window 275

Messages Tab 306

Minimize command 18

Minimize Host on connection with Guest option 310

Minimize Host when loaded option 309

Modem Configuration 400

Modem Configuration window 400

Modem Database 127, 351, 399

Modem Database and Dialog 399

Modem Database command 307

Modem Dialog 401

Modem Dialog command 56, 295

Modem Dialog window 401

Modem window 399

Modify button 191

Modify command 189

Monitor 139, 354

Monitor button 59

Monitor command 52

Monitor Tab 104

Monitor Toolbox 141

Monitor window 140

Mouse marker button 136

Mouse marker command 132

Move Files button 163

Move Files command 144

Multi Chat Session 167, 355

Multi Guest Session 139, 354

Multi Guest Session Buttons 135

Multiple Host Names Found window 97

N

Name field 219

Name Not Found window 39

Name options section 311

Name Resolution 386

Name Response 386

Name Space ID 311

Names Tab 305

Naming section 310

Navigation Panel 174

Navigation Panel command 172

Net Addresses window 416

NetBIOS 375

NetBIOS Adapter Numbers 377

NetBIOS Communication Profile Edit 376

NetBIOS Settings 376

NetOp Configuration Files 419

NetOp demonstration window 358

NetOp File Manager window 143

NetOp File Manager-Advanced (Delete) window 158

NetOp File Manager-Advanced (Overwrite) window 159

NetOp File Manager-Delete window 157

NetOp File Manager-Options window 155

NetOp File Manager-Overwrite window 158

NetOp Guest 32

Index

431

NetOp Guest Window 50

NetOp Help Request Button 319

NetOp Host 280

NetOp Host button 280

NetOp Host Button Connected Menu 353

NetOp Host Button Menu 281

NetOp Host Window 293

NETOP INI Example 419

NetOp License window 57

NetOp Local Tab 405

NetOp Log 401

NetOp Log Events 410

NetOp Magnifier 237, 364

NetOp Magnifier window 238, 365

NetOp Marker Utility 231, 358

NetOp Marker Utility Button Menu 234, 361

NetOp Marker Utility Title Bar Menu 233, 360

NetOp Marker Utility window 232, 359

NetOp Message 274, 370

NetOp Message window 274, 370

NetOp Name Server section 98, 311

NetOp Network Tab 72

NetOp Screen Video 263

NetOp Script 239

NetOp Security Server Authentication 42

NetOp Server Tab 406

NetOp Sessions 213

NetOp Sessions command 171

NetOp Sessions section 174

NETOP.INI 416

NetOp_License_window 298

Network Point-to-Point 375

Networking 375

New Binary Value command 187

New button 191, 278

New command 186, 276

New DWORD Value command 187

New Expandable String Value command 188

New Folder button 163

New Folder command 55, 144

New Folder window 56, 144

New Key command 186

New Modem command 383

New Multi-String Value command 188

New Phonebook Entry command 55

New Script command 55

New String Value command 186

New Task command 183

New Window window 215

Next command 277

NFM Log Viewer window 154

Novell Network Number window 379

Novell Network Numbers 379

Novell Network Numbers window 379

O

Online Registration command 57, 298

Online Support command 57, 298

Open button 182, 278

432

Open command 180, 276

Open Files Tab 204

Open Saved Event Log window 180

Operating Systems 13

Options 154

Options button 147, 164

Options command 153

Options Menu 153, 266

Options section 212, 319

Organize Favorites command 190

Organize_Favorites_window 190

Other Buttons 163

Other Commands 54

Other Interaction 13

Other Locations of NetOp Configuration Files 421

Overwrite/Delete Tab 243

P

Pack'n Deploy 31

Pass Control command 353

Password section 331

Password window 221

Paste button 278

Paste command 55, 277

Pause button 194

Pause command 193, 264

Phone Number window 381

Phone Number/IP Address field 219

Phonebook Entry button 60

Phonebook Export and Import 66

Phonebook Records 65

Phonebook Tab 62

PING 39

Playback Session Recording command 54

Point-to-Point 375

Prefix with computer workgroup name option 311

Print button 278, 372

Print command 276, 371

Problem description field 318

Processes tab 182

Program Options 89, 308

Program Options button 300

Program Options command 307

Properties button 163, 178, 182, 203

Properties command 145, 177, 194, 202

Properties window 146

Protect Item Tab 221

Protect security configuration files 350

Public Host name option 311

Publish New Updates 128

Q

Quick Connect Tab 67

Quick Guide command 58, 298

R

RAS section 337

Ready to Install window 29

Index

433

Receive port 389

Record button 271

Record command 264

Record Panel 164

Record Tab 230

Record/Pause key 270

Recording Playback window 82

Recording Records 83

Recording Tab 111

Recordings Tab 81

Records Pane 85

Refresh button 178, 182, 184, 191, 194, 202, 209, 213

Refresh command 56, 153, 177, 181, 184, 189, 194, 202, 209, 213

Refresh Rate window 238, 365

Region Menu 265

Registry 184

Registry command 172

Registry Menu 186

Registry Toolbar 191

Remote Control 12, 354

Remote Control button 59, 134

Remote Control command 52

Remote Control Display 138

Remote Control Tab 101

Remote Control window 130

Remote Management 169, 357

Remote Management button 59, 134

Remote Management command 52

Remote Printing Tab 108, 316

Remove button 194, 202

Remove command 193, 202

Rename command 55, 145, 189

Rename window 55, 335

Rename_window 145

Replace command 277

Request Help 366

Request Help button 299

Request Help command 297

Request Help/Cancel Help command 281

Requirements 20

Restart button 194, 211, 299

Restart command 194, 211, 296

Restart Host PC button 135

Restart Host PC command 132

Restart script when finished check box 245

Restart Warning window 28

Restore/Show command 281

Resume command 193

Retrieve Clipboard button 136

Retrieve Clipboard from Host command 131

RSA SecurID Authentication 43

RSA SecurID Login window 43

Run As Tab 320

Run Command 246, 251

Run Program 271, 370

Run Program Browse 273

Run Program button 59, 134

Run Program command 54

Run Program menu 271

Run Program window 251

434

Run Script button 240

Run Setup Wizard 128, 352

Run Setup Wizard command 307

Run Tab 116

Run window 117, 273

Running 294

S

Save As command 276, 303

Save button 182, 278

Save command 181, 276

Save Event Log window 181

Save History As command 294

Save Screen to Clipboard button 136

Save Screen to Clipboard command 132

Save Screen to File button 136

Save Screen to File command 132

Script button 164

Script command 154

Script File 259

Script Log 261

Script Records 85

Script Tab 84

Script window 239

Search Menu 277, 372

Security 13

Security Role 44

Security role section 44, 329

Security Role window 334

Security Warning window 296

Select All command 151

Select By button 164

Select By command 151

Select Color button 235, 362

Select Directory Service window 100, 323

Select Directory Services Groups window 340

Select Directory Services Users window 340

Select driver to use drop-down box 315

Select Font button 235, 362

Select Help Request Communication Profile window 367

Select Pen Thickness button 235, 362

Select Print Redirection Host window 109

Select Print Redirection Printer 110

Select Users window 200

Select window 152

Send Alt+Print Screen command 131

Send Alt+Shift+Tab command 131

Send Alt+Tab command 131

Send button 212, 213, 278

Send Clipboard button 136

Send Clipboard to Host command 131

Send command 213

Send Ctrl+Alt+Del button 135

Send Ctrl+Alt+Del command 131

Send Ctrl+Esc button 135

Send Ctrl+Esc command 131

Send keep alive message option 310

Send Keystrokes command 131

Send Message button 59, 134

Index

435

Send Message command 54, 276

Send Message window 256

Send port 389

Send Print Screen command 131

Serial 382

Serial Communication Profile Edit 383

Serial Settings 382

Service Installation 195

Service Installation File window 195

Service Installation Log On window 196

Service Installation Name window 195

Service Installation Startup window 196

Service Properties 197

Services 192

Services command 172

Services Menu 193

Services Tab 304

Services Toolbar 194

Session Buttons 133, 299

Session Commands 52

Session Menu 296

Session Tools 216, 358

Sessions Tab 204

Settings tab 323

Setup Type window 25

Setup Wizard 34, 283

Setup Wizard Add a Guest Account window 290

Setup Wizard Add a Windows Account window 292

Setup Wizard Add Another Account window 292

Setup Wizard Completed window 37, 287

Setup Wizard Create Windows Modem Communication Profiles window 35

Setup Wizard Default Guest Access Password window 286

Setup Wizard Default TCP/IP Communication Profile window 35

Setup Wizard Guest Credentials window 291

Setup Wizard Host Program Options window 289

Setup Wizard Mode window 284

Setup Wizard NetOp Host Startup Mode window 285

Setup Wizard Register Your NetOp License On-Line window 37, 286

Setup Wizard Security Options window 289

Setup Wizard Select Communication Profiles window 288

Setup Wizard Web Connect window 36

Setup Wizard Welcome window 34, 283

Share a Folder 205

Share a Folder Wizard Name window 206

Share a Folder Wizard Path window 205

Share a Folder Wizard Welcome window 205

Share Properties 206

Share Properties General tab 207

Share Properties Share Permissions tab 208

Shared Folders 201

Shared Folders command 172

Shared Folders Menu 202

Shared Folders Toolbar 202

Shared NetOp Authentication 40

Shared NetOp Authentication window 368

Shares Tab 203

Short-hold mode option 380

Show Connection List button 136

Show file transfer status option 310

Show Free Text button 234, 361

436

Show Magnifier button 234, 361

Silence level slide 314

Small Icons button 60, 164

Small Icons command 56, 152

Smart Card Authentication 44

Smart Card Tab 122, 348

Smart Card window 44

SNMP Traps Tab 409

Sounds Tab 112

Special Note on Receive Port Number 389

Special Shares 203

Standard Buttons 16

Standard tab 192

Start button 299

Start command 193

Start Host when loaded option 309

Start Multi Chat button 135

Start/Resume button 194

Start_command 295

Startup Information window 210

Startup section 309

Startup Tab 222

Status Bar 279, 306

Status Bar command 171

Status field 301

Stealth mode option 309

Stop button 182, 194, 271, 299

Stop command 193, 264, 296

Stop key 270

Stopped 293

Strikeout command 277

Suspend Connect command 353

Suspend Further Connections button 136

Sync Files command 144

Synchronize 156

Synchronize Files button 163

System Control 211

System Control command 172

System Control Host User Message 212

System Control Menu 213

System Control Toolbar 213

System Info 415

System Info button 58, 298

T

Tab Panel 61, 300

Table Control 18

Take Keyboard and Mouse Control button 135

Task Manager 182

Task Manager command 172

Task Manager Menu 183

Task Manager Toolbar 184

TCP IPv6 section 393

TCP section 392, 394

TCP/IP 385

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) 392

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) Communication Profile Edit 393

TCP/IP (TCP IPv6) Settings 392

TCP/IP (TCP) 391

Index

437

TCP/IP (TCP) Communication Profile Edit 392

TCP/IP (TCP) Settings 391

TCP/IP Communication Profile Edit 387

TCP/IP section 388

TCP/IP Settings 386

Terminal Server 31, 398

Terminal Server Communication Profile Edit 399

Terminal Server Settings 398

Test a NetOp Script 260

Text Marker 236, 363

Text Marker Menu 364

Text Marker window 237, 364

Title Bar 264, 275, 371

Tool Buttons 136, 300

Toolbar 271, 278, 299

Toolbar command 171, 295

Toolbar or Toolbox 133

Tools Menu 57, 297

Transfer only if file exists 156

Transfer only one way 156

Transfer Sound 356

Transfer Sound button 137

Transfer Sound command 132

Transfer Status 148

Transfer Tab 242

Tree Pane 84

Tree Window button 60

Tree Window command 56

Type drop-down box 249

Typographical Conventions 16

U

Unavailable Networking Communication Devices 75

Underline button 278

Underline command 277

Undo button 234, 361

Undo/Redo button 278

Undo/Redo command 276

Unload and Stop option 350

Updates 16

Upon connection section 312

Upper Toolbar 234, 361

Use current Host communication profiles option 318

Use default port numbers check box 389

Use dial-up networking check box 375

Use environment variable option 311

Use NetOp Name Server 389

Use NetOp Security Server 342

Use Windows computer name option 311

V

Values pane 185

View button 178

View command 306

View File Manager Log command 56, 153

View Menu 171, 295

View Message command 294

View submenu 177

438

W

Wait Command 246, 248

Wait Dialog window 249

Waiting for confirm access window 46

Wait-Select Dates (of month) window 251

Wait-Select Days (of month) window 250

Wait-Select Days (of week) window 250

Wake on LAN MAC Address field 219

Warning Active Sessions window 93

Warning Invalid Logon window 344

Web Update Schedule window 124, 325

Web Update Tab 123, 324

Welcome to NetOp Remote Control Guest Setup Wizard window 23

Window Control 18

Windows Authentication 41

Windows Authentication window 369

Windows Event Log Tab 408

Windows Firewall Configuration window 28

Windows Modem 384

Windows Modem Communication Profile Edit 385

Windows Modem Settings 384

Windows Network Tab 73

Index

439

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents